JP6640895B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine and the like.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area on a game board surface by a launching device, and a game ball wins a winning hole or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined A number of game balls are paid out. Some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined number of times. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out for the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening executes the big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state. Further, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hitting game in which a special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from a closed state.

  By the way, in recent years, as a configuration of a winning device, there is a gaming machine having a configuration in which a game ball that has entered a large winning opening rolls to the back side of the game board and a winning sensor detects the game ball. As such a gaming machine, Patent Literature 1 has a function of imparting a probable change state after the end of a jackpot game by allowing a game ball to pass through a specific area provided in a special winning opening, and specifying the opening mode of the special winning opening. A gaming machine is disclosed in which the degree of overlap with the operation mode of the area shutter is changed to vary the difficulty level of a game ball passing through a specific area.

JP 2013-255784 A

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, the rolling speed of the game ball cannot be adjusted when the game ball can pass through the specific area where the winning sensor is provided, so that the rolling speed of the game ball is high. In some cases, the winning sensor could not detect the passing of the game ball.

  An object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately detecting the passage of a game ball by a passage detecting means.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines. The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variable prize device (for example, a second big prize device 610 described later) capable of entering a game ball rolling in a game area (for example, a game region 120a described later), and a game ball. The first movable member (for example, V to be described later) is in one of a first state where the ball easily enters the variable winning device and a second state where the game ball hardly passes through the specific area. A shutter 612, etc.) and a guide path (for example, a first guide path 611f, a second guide path described later) for guiding a game ball that has entered the variable winning device when the first movable member is in the first state. 611g, a third guide passage 611h, etc.) and when the first movable member is in the first state, it detects the passage of a game ball that has entered the variable winning device, and gives a predetermined game value to the player. grantable plurality of first passage detection means (for example, below the right award A sensor 613, a left prize ball sensor 614, and the like) and a first state provided below the first passage detecting means, in which a game ball easily passes through a predetermined area (for example, a first guide passage 611f described later). A second movable member (for example, a V-bello 615 described later) which is in one of a second state in which the game ball does not easily pass through the predetermined area, and a second movable member which is in the first state. In the state, among the game balls that have passed through the first passage detection means, a second passage detection means (for example, a V winning sensor 616 described later) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the predetermined area, (2) When the movable member is in the second state, among the game balls that have passed through the first passage detection means, third passage detection means that can detect game balls that have not passed through the predetermined region (for example, a discharge ball described later) Sensor 617) and the second passage detection The step is composed of a first area through which the game ball passes, and a second area through which the game ball does not pass. The step is located below the second movable member and the second area of the second passage detection means. A curved guide path (for example, a later-described deceleration section 611j) capable of reducing the rolling speed of the game ball is provided above the region.
In addition to the above configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention further includes a ball supply passage (first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B) capable of accumulating game balls, and a game ball passing through the ball supply passage. (First and second sprockets 173A and 173B) that can move the moving means to the dispensing passage, driving means (dispensing motor 174) for driving the moving means, and control means (discharging for controlling the driving of the driving means) CPU 301), and a payout detecting means (a first counting switch 181A and a second counting switch 181B) for detecting a game ball moved to the payout passage by the moving means. After driving the means, the driving of the driving means is stopped for a certain period (falling ball monitoring time), and a determination relating to the detection of the game ball by the payout detecting means is made during the certain period. The fixed period includes at least a holding period for holding the posture of the moving unit (excitation data holding period) and a cooling period for cooling the driving unit (cooling period). Is a configuration in which the current applied to the drive unit is maintained at the current when the drive unit is driven, and the current applied to the drive unit is lower than the current when the drive unit is driven during the cooling period. Having.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, the third passage detecting means includes a third region through which a game ball passes, and a fourth region through which a game ball does not pass. A curved guide passage (for example, a second guide passage 611g to be described later) is provided above the third area of the passage detecting means.

  The gaming machine of the present invention includes a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine described later) provided with a movable role (for example, a second movable role 710 described later) that is rotated by driving a driving unit (for example, a motor 712 described later). In the gaming machine 1 etc., the movable member is provided with a first member tooth portion (for example, a base tooth portion 711d described later) in which a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged along an outer edge. A first member (e.g., a base member 711 described below) having a first member main body (e.g., a base body 711a described below), and a first member (e.g., a base member 711 described later) rotatably supported by the first member, and A first movable member main body (for example, a first movable member main body 713a to be described later) that rotates by driving, and a gear rotatably supported by the first movable member main body. A first transmission member (for example, a first transmission Material 713b), and a first movable member (for example, a first movable member 713 described later) having the same, and rotatably supported by the first movable member, and protruding radially along the outer edge. A second movable member tooth portion (for example, a second movable member tooth portion 714c described later) in which a plurality of teeth are arranged, and the second movable member tooth portion meshes with the first transmission member; A member (for example, a second movable member 714 described below).

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a movable accessory that is rotated by driving of the driving unit.
The movable accessory includes a first member, a first movable member, and a second movable member.
The first member has a first member main body provided with a first member tooth portion in which a plurality of teeth projecting in a radial direction are arranged along an outer edge.
The first movable member is a first movable member main body rotatably supported by the first member and rotated by driving of a driving unit, and a gear rotatably supported by the first movable member main body, A first transmission member that meshes with the first member tooth portion.
The second movable member has a second movable member tooth portion rotatably supported by the first movable member and having a plurality of radially projecting teeth arranged along an outer edge thereof. The teeth mesh with the first transmission member.

  Thus, when the driving means is driven, the first movable member main body rotates. When the first movable member body rotates, the first transmission member, which is a gear supported by the first movable member body, also moves. At this time, the first transmission member rotates by moving while meshing with the first member teeth of the first member. When the first transmission member rotates, the second movable member having the second movable member teeth that meshes with the first transmission member rotates.

  That is, the driving force for rotating the first movable member is generated from the driving unit. On the other hand, the driving force for rotating the second movable member is generated when the meshing position between the first transmission member and the first member teeth of the first member moves with the rotation of the first movable member main body. I do.

  As described above, the driving force for rotating the first movable member and the second movable member is not only generated simply by the driving means, but also different from each other in the location where the driving force is generated. For this reason, for example, it is possible to determine the driving mode of the first movable member by the driving unit and determine the driving mode of the second movable member by the first member. For example, two driving members can be determined by one driving unit. It can be driven in different modes.

  Therefore, while the first movable member and the second movable member are interlocked with each other, the first movable member and the second movable member are rotated by driving forces having different generation points. For this reason, it becomes possible to diversify the variation of the operation of the movable role composed of a plurality of movable members, to give each movable member an individual effect, and to increase the effect synergistically. Therefore, even when a plurality of movable members are linked, it is possible to enhance the individual effect of each movable member, and to enhance the interest of the player in the effect.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, the first member is further rotatably supported by the first member main body, and is rotated by driving of the driving means. Base transmission member 711b), the first member main body is provided with a pair of the first member teeth, and the first movable member main body is provided with a plurality of radially protruding along the outer edge. It has a first movable member tooth portion (for example, a first movable member tooth portion 713d described later) in which teeth are arranged, and the first movable member tooth portion meshes with the second transmission member, and The transmission member meshes with one of the first member teeth, and the movable member is further rotatably supported by the first member, has an outer edge, and extends in the radial direction along the outer edge. Movable member teeth portion (for example, a third movable member tooth described later) 715d) and a gear rotatably supported by the third movable member main body, and the other first member tooth. A third transmission member (for example, a third transmission member 715b described later) that meshes with the portion, and a third movable member (for example, a third movable member 715 described later) having a rotation. A fourth movable member tooth portion (e.g., a fourth movable member tooth portion 716c, which will be described later), which is rotatably supported, has an outer edge, and has a plurality of radially projecting teeth arranged along the outer edge. A fourth movable member (for example, a fourth movable member 716 to be described later) in which the fourth movable member tooth portion meshes with the third transmission member. Meshing with a second transmission member, the first movable member, the second movable member, The second transmission member, the first movable member, the second movable member, and the second movable member move to the drive position, which is a stopped position after rotating from the initial position, from the initial position. A formed body having a predetermined shape is integrally formed by the third movable member and the fourth movable member.

In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the first member has the second transmission member in addition to the first member main body.
The second transmission member is rotatably supported by the first member main body, and is rotated by driving of the driving unit. The first member main body is provided with a pair of first member teeth.
And the 1st movable member main body has the 1st movable member tooth part in which the several tooth protruded in the radial direction was arranged along the outer edge.
The first movable member tooth portion meshes with the second transmission member. The first transmission member meshes with one of the first member teeth.
The movable role includes a third movable member main body and a fourth movable member in addition to the first member, the first movable member, and the second movable member.
The third movable member has a third movable member main body and a third transmission member. The third movable member main body has a third movable member tooth portion rotatably supported by the first member and having a plurality of radially projecting teeth arranged along an outer edge. The third transmission member is a gear rotatably supported by the third movable member main body, and meshes with the other first member tooth portion.
The fourth movable member is rotatably supported by the third movable member, has an outer edge, and has, along the outer edge, a fourth movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged. Then, the fourth movable member tooth portion meshes with the third transmission member.
The third movable member tooth portion meshes with the second transmission member.
Then, the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member move from the initial position to a driving position, which is a stopped position after rotating, and thereby the second transmission member, the first movable member, and the first movable member. A formed body having a predetermined shape is integrally formed by the movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member.

Thus, when the driving unit is driven, the second transmission member rotates. When the second transmission member rotates, the first movable member main body having the first movable member tooth portion meshing with the second transmission member and the third movable member main body having the third movable member tooth portion meshing with the second transmission member are formed. Rotate.
When the first movable member body rotates, the first transmission member, which is a gear supported by the first movable member body, also moves. At this time, the first transmission member rotates by moving while meshing with one of the first member teeth of the first member.
When the third movable member body rotates, the third transmission member, which is a gear supported by the third movable member body, also moves. At this time, the third transmission member rotates by moving while meshing with the other first member teeth of the first member.
When the first transmission member rotates, the second movable member having the second movable member teeth that meshes with the first transmission member rotates. Further, when the third transmission member rotates, the fourth movable member having the fourth movable member teeth that meshes with the third transmission member rotates.

  That is, when the second transmission member is rotated by the driving of the driving unit, the third movable member and the fourth movable member are also rotated in addition to the first movable member and the second movable member. As described above, in addition to the first movable member and the second movable member, the third movable member and the fourth movable member can be driven by one driving unit. Further, like the first movable member and the second movable member, the third movable member and the fourth movable member are rotated by different driving forces at different locations while being interlocked. For this reason, it is possible to make the drive mode of the second movable member and the fourth movable member different from the drive mode of the first movable member and the third movable member. It can be driven in different modes.

  In addition, the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member move to the driving position, so that the first member, the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, A formed body having a predetermined shape is integrally formed by the fourth movable member.

  Therefore, the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member can diversify the operation variations while interlocking, and can have a predetermined shape at the driving position. It becomes possible to form it to a completed state. Therefore, each of the movable members can have an individual effect, and the effect can be enhanced synergistically, and the effect of the movable movable body as a whole can be improved.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, in the movable role, the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member move to the drive position. In this case, when the second movable member and the fourth movable member are close to each other at their ends, a completed state is formed in which one component is formed.

  In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the end of the second movable member pivotally supported by the first movable member and the end of the fourth movable member pivotally supported by the third movable member are close to each other at the driving position. By doing so, the first member, the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member are in a completed state in which one component is formed. This makes it possible to individually rotate the plurality of movable members up to the driving position, and to form a continuous component at the driving position. Therefore, each of the movable members can have an individual effect, and the effect can be enhanced synergistically, and the effect as the movable movable body as a whole can be further improved.

  Further, the present invention provides the following gaming machines. In the gaming machine of the present invention, a first game area in which game balls can roll (for example, a game area 120a to be described later) and a specific area (for example, a specific area 611c to be described later) easily pass through a first area. A first movable member (for example, a V-shutter 612 described later) which is in one of a state and a second state in which the game ball hardly passes through the specific area; and a second movable state provided in the game area. When the first movable member is in the first state, a guide path (for example, a first guide path 611f, a second guide path 611g, and a third guide path 611h, which will be described later) that guides the game ball passing through the specific area. And the like, and a variable prize device (for example, a second large prize device 610 described later) capable of visually recognizing at least a part of the game ball guided by the guide passage. The apparatus comprises the first movable member In the first state, first passage detecting means (for example, a right prize ball sensor described later) capable of detecting the passage of a game ball entering the variable prize device and giving a predetermined game value to the player. 613, a left prize ball sensor 614, etc.) and a first state provided below the first passage detecting means, in which a game ball easily passes through a predetermined area (for example, a first guide passage 611f described later). A second movable member (for example, a V-bello 615 described later) in one of a second state and a second state in which the game ball hardly passes through the predetermined area, and the second movable member in the first state At the time, among the game balls that have passed through the first passage detection means, it is possible to detect the game balls that have passed through the predetermined area, and to provide the player with an advantageous game state when the passage of the game balls is detected. The second passage detecting means (for example, a V winning sensor 616 described later) ) And third passage detection means (which can detect game balls that have not passed through the predetermined area, among game balls that have passed through the first passage detection means when the second movable member is in the second state). For example, a below-described discharge sensor 617) is further provided, and a reduction section (for example, a reduction section 611j described later) capable of reducing the rolling speed of the game ball passing through the predetermined area is further provided in the predetermined area. It is characterized by being arranged.

A gaming machine having such a configuration includes a gaming area in which gaming balls can roll, and a variable winning device.
The variable winning device has a first movable member and a guide passage. The first movable member is in one of a first state in which the game ball easily passes through the specific area and a second state in which the game ball hardly passes through the specific area. The guide path is provided in the game area, and guides the game ball that has passed through the specific area when the first movable member is in the first state. The variable winning device can visually recognize at least a part of the game ball guided by the guide passage.
In addition, the variable winning device includes a first passage detection unit, a second movable member, a second passage detection unit, and a third passage detection unit.
When the first movable member is in the first state, the first passage detection means detects the passage of a game ball that has entered the variable prize device, and enables the player to be given a predetermined game value.
The second movable member is provided below the first passage detection means, and is one of a first state in which the game ball easily passes through the predetermined area and a second state in which the game ball hardly passes through the predetermined area. It becomes one state.
When the second movable member is in the first state, the second passage detecting means can detect, among the game balls that have passed through the first passage detecting means, game balls that have passed through a predetermined area, and that the passage of the game balls has occurred. Upon detection, an advantageous gaming state can be given to the player.
When the second movable member is in the second state, the third passage detecting means can detect, among the game balls that have passed through the first passage detecting means, game balls that have not passed through the predetermined area.
And, in the predetermined area, a reduction portion capable of reducing the rolling speed of the game ball passing through the predetermined area is arranged.

Thereby, for example, when the first movable member (for example, the shutter or the like) is in the first state (for example, the open state), the game ball that has entered the variable winning device is guided by the guide passage. At least a part of the game ball becomes visible.
Since the first passage detection unit (for example, a prize ball sensor), the second passage detection unit (for example, a winning sensor), and the third passage detection unit (for example, a discharge sensor) are provided in the game area, A game ball rolling in the area can be detected. For this reason, the game ball can roll in the game area at least immediately before the game ball is detected by each passage detecting means.

  Therefore, for the player, at least a part of the game ball can be visually recognized from when the game ball enters the variable prize device to when it reaches each of the prize sensors. Visibility can be improved. In addition, since it is possible to roll the game area until the game ball is detected by each passage detection unit, it is possible to perform an effect using the game ball rolling the game area even in the variable winning device. It is possible to improve the effect for the player.

  Further, since the guide passage is provided in the game area and the first passage detection means, the second passage detection means, and the third passage detection means are provided in the game area, the game area can be used as a part of the variable prize device. Therefore, for example, it is possible to omit the passage path of the game ball provided on the back side of the game board as in the related art, and it is also possible to simplify the configuration of the variable winning device.

  Further, when a game ball rolling in the game area passes through the second passage detection means, if the game ball passes through the game area at the same speed as the rolling speed, the rolling speed is too high, and the second passage detection means It is conceivable that it is not possible to accurately detect the passage of the ball, and in order for the second passage detection means to accurately detect the passage of the game ball, it is necessary to reduce the speed of the game ball rolling in the game area, In order to adjust the rolling speed of such a game ball, it is possible to use a speed reduction unit. Therefore, it is possible to accurately detect the passage of the game ball by the passage detecting means.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, in addition to the configuration, the variable winning device is provided between the plurality of first passage detection units, the first movable member, and the first passage detection unit, and A contact member (for example, a contact member 611d described later) that can contact a game ball that has passed through the region and a game ball that has passed through the specific region are passed through the first passage detection means on one side and the first passage on the other side And a distributing unit (for example, a distributing unit 611e described later) that can be distributed to any of the detecting means. A game ball that has passed through one of the first passage detecting means has the second movable member having a second movable member. A game ball that can pass through the predetermined area in the state of 1 and has passed through the other first passage detection means is detected by the third passage detection means regardless of the state of the second movable member. It is characterized by.

In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the variable prize device further includes a plurality of first passage detection units, a contact member, and a distribution unit.
The contact member is provided between the first movable member and the first passage detection means, and is capable of contacting a game ball that has passed through the specific area.
The distribution unit is capable of distributing the game ball that has passed through the specific area to one first passage detection unit and the other first passage detection unit.
The game ball that has passed through one of the first passage detection means can pass through a predetermined area when the second movable member is in the first state. Further, the game ball that has passed through the other first passage detection means is detected by the third passage detection means regardless of the state of the second movable member.

Thereby, for example, when the game ball rolls from upstream to downstream from the first movable member, the speed of the game ball is reduced by the contact of the game ball with the contact member on the downstream side, and the game ball of the player It is possible to raise awareness about
Further, the distribution unit can distribute the game ball to one of the first passage detection means and the other first passage detection means. The game ball that has passed through one of the first passage detection means may pass through the second passage detection means capable of providing an advantageous gaming state to the player, but the other first passage detection means Passes through the third passage detecting means without passing through the second passage detecting means. That is, the rolling of the game ball in the distribution unit determines whether or not it is advantageous for the player.

  Therefore, the distributing portion improves the playability, and the contact member improves the playability, so that it is possible to reduce the rolling speed of the game ball immediately before the distributing portion, thereby improving the visibility of the game ball. It is possible to further improve the effect of the variable prize device for the player.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, the distance between the other first passage detection unit and the first movable member is greater than the distance between one first passage detection unit and the first movable member. And the contact member is provided above the other first passage detection means, and is not provided above one of the first passage detection means.

As a result, the distance between the other first passage detection means and the first movable member is shorter than the distance between one first passage detection means and the first movable member. The rolling speed of the game ball passing between the first movable member and the other first passage detecting means is smaller than the game ball passing between the first movable member and the one first passage detecting means. It is conceivable that the other first passage detection means makes it difficult to detect the passage of the game ball, but by reducing the rolling speed of the game ball by the contact member, the other first passage detection means tends to be faster. The passage of the game ball can be reliably detected by the passage detecting means.
Further, since the contact member is provided above the other first passage detection means and is not provided above one of the first passage detection means, the contact member is provided above both the first passage detection means. It is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost as compared to a gaming machine that has been used.

  Here, the game ball having passed through one of the first passage detection means can be detected by the second passage detection means when the second movable member is in the first state. When the second movable member is in the first state, the second passage detecting means can detect a game ball that has passed a predetermined area, and when the passage of the game ball is detected, a game state advantageous to the player is provided. Can be given. For this reason, a contact member is also provided above one of the first passage detecting means, the second movable member is in the first state, the game ball contacts the contact member, and the falling speed decreases, Before the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the second movable member may be in the second state, and the game ball may not be able to pass through the second passage detection means capable of providing an advantageous game state. In such a case, there is a possibility that the interest of the player in the game may be reduced.

  However, by providing the contact member only above the other first passage detection means and not above the one first passage detection means, the contact member allows the player to be aware of the game ball while collecting consciousness. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the present invention provides the following gaming machines. The gaming machine of the present invention includes a movable machine (for example, an upper left third movable machine 720 and the like described later) that is rotated by driving a driving unit (for example, a motor 722 and the like described later) (for example, a gaming machine and the like described later). The pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), wherein the movable role object includes a first member (for example, a base member 721 described later) to which the driving unit is attached, and a predetermined position (for example, described later) on the first member. A second member (for example, an arm member 723 described later) that is rotatably supported about a predetermined position 723a) and is rotatably driven by the driving unit, and is rotatable about the second member. A rotating member (e.g., described later) that pivots about the predetermined position and rotates about a specific position (e.g., a specific position 725a described later) separated from the predetermined position by a predetermined distance. A rotating member 725, etc.) The rotation member has a gear (for example, a second connection member 726 described later) that rotates around the specific position in accordance with the rotation of the second member, and the gear has a peripheral edge thereof. A contact member (for example, a contact member 726b to be described later) is formed, and in the rotation around the specific position, the contact member rotates from a standby position where rotation starts to a drive position where rotation ends, and The contact member can be biased by magnetic force in the direction of the drive position in the vicinity of the drive position.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a movable accessory that is rotated by driving of the driving unit.
The movable accessory includes a first member, a second member, and a rotating member. The first member is provided with a driving unit. The second member is pivotally supported by the first member so as to be rotatable around a predetermined position, and is rotated by driving of the driving unit. The rotation member is rotatably supported by the second member and rotates about a predetermined position and also rotates about a specific position that is a predetermined distance away from the predetermined position.
The rotating member has a gear that rotates around a specific position in accordance with the rotation of the second member. The gear has a contact member formed on the periphery thereof. Further, in the rotation around the specific position, the gear rotates from a standby position where rotation starts to a driving position where rotation ends. This contact member can be biased by magnetic force in the direction of the drive position in the vicinity of the drive position.

Thus, for example, the second member rotates when the driving unit is driven, and the second member rotates, so that the rotating member rotates from the standby position to the driving position around the specific position. For example, when a magnet (or a component made of a ferromagnetic material) with which the contact member of the gear contacts at the driving position is provided on the second member or the like, and the contact member is formed of a ferromagnetic material (or magnet), Is in the standby position, the magnet and the contact member keep a constant distance, so that the contact member is not biased.
On the other hand, when the gear rotates to the drive position, the magnet and the contact member come close to or come into contact with each other, so that the accessory can be urged by the attraction (magnetic force) of either one.

  In this way, by providing the gear for rotating the movable rotating member with the contact member biased by the magnetic force at the drive position where the rotation is completed, an accessory such as the rotating member becomes a single unit. Even after the operation, the state after the operation can be easily stabilized. Therefore, with the configuration in which the operating accessory can be fixed, the state of the accessory after the operation can be easily stabilized.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above-described configuration, the rotating member is attached to the gear, and emits light in a predetermined mode (for example, an electric decoration 727 described later) and the specific position. A tape measure (for example, a tape measure 728a to be described later) formed in a tape measure shape that is wound around and elastically deformable and has an urging force in a winding direction, and is connected to the electric decoration body. A member (for example, a flat cable 728 to be described later), wherein the gear is formed in a tubular shape, and a storage portion (for example, a storage portion 726c to be described later) that stores the tape measure portion; A locking portion (for example, a locking portion 726d described later) that locks with one end of the tape measure that is housed, and the tape measure is configured such that one end of the tape measure is wound in the inside of the housing portion. The urging force of And wherein the biasing said gear toward said waiting position.

In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the rotating member includes an illuminated body and a connection member. The illuminated body is attached, for example, by being fixed to a gear, and emits light in a predetermined mode. The connection member is wound around a specific position, is formed into a tape measure shape so as to be elastically deformable, has a tape measure part having a biasing force in a winding direction, and is connected to the electric decoration.
Further, the gear has a housing portion and a locking portion. The housing portion is formed in a tubular shape and houses the tape measure. The locking portion locks one end of the tape measure portion stored in the storage portion.
Then, the tape measure portion is elastically deformed in the winding direction inside the accommodating portion, thereby urging the gear toward the standby position via the locking portion.

  The tape measure portion of the connection member is elastically deformed in a winding direction inside the gear receiving portion, and the elastic force of the connection member urges the gear in a direction of rotating the gear through the locking portion, thereby forming the gear. The movable speed can be increased, and the gears are used as the storage positions of the connection members, so that space can be saved.

Here, when a gear is used for the movable role, a backlash is usually provided between the gear and another member that meshes with the gear in order to smoothly rotate the gear. This backlash causes the member attached to the gear to slightly move when the gear stops.
However, in the rotating member, a tape measure is formed on a connection member connected to the electric decoration attached to the gear, and one end of the tape measure is biased in a direction in which the tape measure is wound inside the gear housing. By urging the gear in the direction of the standby position via the locking portion locked by the above, it is possible to reduce the slight movement of the rotating member due to backlash when the gear stops.

  Further, the present invention provides the following gaming machines. The gaming machine of the present invention includes a gaming area (for example, a later-described gaming area 120a or the like) in which a gaming ball can roll, and a prize device (for example, a later-described third area) in which a gaming ball rolling in the gaming area can enter. (For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like described below), the winning device being capable of detecting that a game ball has passed a predetermined area. (For example, a prize detecting means 514 described later) and a first guideable state in which the game ball can be guided to the predetermined area based on a predetermined driving condition being satisfied, and a first guideable state in which the game ball cannot be guided. A first movable piece (for example, a first movable piece 515 described later) that can be driven to an impossible state, and a first movable piece that is provided above the first movable piece and can guide a game ball to the first movable piece. Driving between the second guideable state and the second non-guideable state A second movable piece (e.g., a second movable piece 516 described later) that is capable of moving the first movable piece from the first non-guideable state to the first guideable state. The second movable piece is driven from the second non-guideable state to the second guideable state, the game ball can be guided to the predetermined area by the first movable piece, and the first movable piece is the first guide. When the second movable piece is driven from the second guideable state to the second non-guideable state when driving from the enabled state to the first guideable state, the predetermined movement by the first movable piece is performed. The guide of the game ball to the area can be blocked by the second movable piece.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a game area in which game balls can roll, and a winning device in which game balls rolling in the game area can enter.
The winning device includes a winning detecting means, a first movable piece, and a second movable piece. The winning detection means can detect that the game ball has passed a predetermined area. The first movable piece can be driven into a first guideable state in which the game ball can be guided to a predetermined area and a first guideable state in which the game ball cannot be guided, based on a predetermined drive condition being satisfied. is there. The second movable piece is provided above the first movable piece, and can be driven into a second guideable state in which the game ball can be guided to the first movable piece and a second guideable state in which the game ball cannot be guided. is there.

  When the first movable piece is driven from the first non-guideable state to the first guideable state, the second movable piece is driven from the second non-guideable state to the second guideable state, and the first movable piece is driven. Thereby, the game ball can be guided to a predetermined area. In addition, when the first movable piece is driven from the first guideable state to the first non-guideable state, the second movable piece is driven from the second guideable state to the second non-guideable state, whereby the first movable piece is driven. The guide of the game ball to the predetermined area by the movable piece can be blocked by the second movable piece.

  Here, usually, the gaming machine switches the first movable piece between the first guidance-enabled state and the first guidance-impossible state at a timing based on the performance related to the prize ball set in advance. Normally, the benefit of the player due to the first movable piece being in the first guideable state ends when the first movable piece starts driving to the first non-guideable state. However, thereafter, while the first movable piece is being driven from the first guideable state to the first non-guideable state, the game ball is guided by the first movable piece to a predetermined area detected by the winning detection means and wins. There are cases. For example, a prize ball based on such a prize is an unexpected profit for a player and an unexpected loss for a game hall.

According to the present invention, when the first movable piece is driven from the first guideable state to the first non-guideable state, the second movable piece is driven from the second guideable state to the second non-guideable state. Even when the first movable piece is guiding the game ball to the predetermined area detected by the prize detecting means at the time of starting driving from the first guideable state to the first guideable state, The game ball guided to the first movable piece can be prevented from being guided to the predetermined area by the second movable piece. Thus, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls are won, even in a gaming machine that switches between the first guideable state and the first non-guideable state, it is possible to prevent the winning from exceeding the predetermined number. It becomes possible.
Therefore, it is possible to accurately calculate the performance related to the prize ball of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately manage the balance of the profit between the player and the game hall.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above-described configuration, the winning device may include a driving unit (for example, a driving unit 517 to be described later) drivable based on the predetermined driving condition being satisfied, and a driving unit (not shown). Extending to one end, one end rotatably engaged with the first movable piece, the other end rotatably engaged with the second movable piece, and having a fulcrum between the one end and the other end. And an interlocking member (for example, a link member 518 described later) that rotates about the fulcrum when one of the one end side and the other end side is driven by the driving means. Is driven from the first non-guideable state to the first guideable state when the interlocking member turns in a predetermined direction, and when the interlocking member turns in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, Driving from the first guideable state to the first guideable state, the second movable state; Is driven from the second non-guideable state to the second guideable state when the interlocking member turns in the predetermined direction, and when the interlocking member turns in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. Then, driving is performed from the second guideable state to the second guideable state.

In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the variable winning device further includes a driving unit and an interlocking member. The driving means can be driven based on a predetermined driving condition being satisfied. The interlocking member extends from one end to the other end, and one end side is rotatably engaged with the first movable piece, the other end side is rotatably engaged with the second movable piece, and is between the one end side and the other end side. , And one of the one end and the other end rotates around the fulcrum by driving of the driving means.
Then, the first movable piece is driven from the first non-guideable state to the first guideable state when the interlocking member rotates in the predetermined direction, and when the interlocking member rotates in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. , From the first guideable state to the first guideable state. Further, the second movable piece is driven from the second non-guideable state to the second guideable state when the interlocking member rotates in the predetermined direction, and when the interlocking member rotates in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. , From the second guideable state to the second guideable state.

  As described above, by engaging the plurality of movable pieces with the interlocking member together, for example, if one movable piece is driven by one driving unit, the other movable piece can also be driven. Further, by using the interlocking member, for example, when a second movable piece is further added to a game machine having only the first movable piece driven by the driving means, the second movable piece is provided without providing another driving means. The piece can be driven in conjunction with the first movable piece. As a result, the winning device can be easily designed and replaced.

  In addition, since the first movable piece and the second movable piece are configured to be interlocked by the interlocking member, for example, the first movable piece stops during driving from the first guideable state to the first guideable state due to a malfunction. When the first movable piece alone, the game ball continues to be picked up, and this game ball may be guided to a predetermined area detected by the prize detecting means, but by providing the second movable piece, The second movable piece can prevent the game ball from being guided to a predetermined area to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately calculate the performance of the gaming machine with respect to the prize ball, and it is possible to more accurately manage the balance of the profit between the player and the game hall.

  Further, the present invention provides the following gaming machines. The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine to be described later) including a movable role (for example, an upper left third movable role 820 to be described later) driven by a driving unit (for example, a motor 722 to be described later). 1), wherein the movable accessory is rotatable about a predetermined position on a first member (for example, a base member 721 described later) to which the driving means is attached. A second member (e.g., an arm member 830 described later) that is rotatably supported by the driving unit and rotatably supported by the second member and meshes with the first member; A first connecting member (for example, a first connecting member 724 and the like described later) that rotates by moving an abutting position that meshes with the first member due to a movement of the axis by the rotation of the second member; The first connecting member is rotatably supported by two members. A second connecting member (for example, a second connecting member 726 described later) that rotates with the rotation of the first connecting member, and a second connecting member that is attached to the first connecting member and rotates the first connecting member. A third connecting member (e.g., a third connecting member 840 described below) that rotates with the movement, and a decorative member (e.g., a third member that is attached to the second connecting member and rotates with the rotation of the second connecting member) , An electric decoration 727 to be described later), and the second member has a base end side engaged with the driving means, and a first arm member (for example, a second arm member to be described later) for pivotally supporting the first connecting member. A fourth arm (eg, a first arm member 831) movably engaged with the first arm member, pivotally supporting the second arm member, and meshing with the third arm member. A second arm member (e.g., a second arm member 832 described below) having four connection members 835, and the like; The second arm member is configured such that after the decorative member is rotated from a standby position by the rotation of the second connecting member, the third connecting member meshes with the fourth connecting member, and the third connecting member By the rotation of the member, the member moves in a direction extending from the distal end side of the first arm member, and the decorative member moves in a direction in which the second arm member extends from the distal end side of the first arm member. , And can be in contact with other members.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a movable accessory that is rotated by driving of the driving unit.
The movable accessory includes a first member, a second member, a first connecting member, a second connecting member, a third connecting member, and a decorative member. The first member is provided with a driving unit. The second member is pivotally supported by the first member so as to be rotatable around a predetermined position, and is rotated by driving of the driving unit. The first connecting member is rotatably supported by the second member, meshes with the first member, and the abutting position meshing with the first member is moved by the rotation of the second member so that the axis moves. And rotate. The second connection member is rotatably supported by the second member, meshes with the first connection member, and rotates with the rotation of the first connection member. The third connecting member is attached to the first connecting member, and rotates with the rotation of the first connecting member. The decorative member is attached to the second connecting member, and rotates with the rotation of the second connecting member.
The second member has a first arm member and a second arm member. The base end of the first arm member is engaged with the driving means, and the first arm member supports the first connecting member. The second arm member movably engages with the first arm member, pivotally supports the second connection member, and has a fourth connection member that can mesh with the third connection member.
The second arm member is configured such that, after the decoration member is rotated from the standby position by the rotation of the second connection member, the third connection member is engaged with the fourth connection member, and the second arm member is rotated by the rotation of the third connection member. It moves in the direction extending from the tip side of the one-arm member.
The decoration member can come into contact with another member by moving the second arm member in a direction extending from the distal end side of the first arm member.

  Thereby, after the decoration member rotates from the standby position by the rotation of the second connection member, the third connection member meshes with the fourth connection member of the second arm member, thereby rotating the first arm member. As a result, the first connecting member and the third connecting member rotate, and the second arm member moves in the extending direction, so that the second arm member can come into contact with another member. In this way, after performing the effect of rotating the decoration member, the decoration member is moved so that the decoration member can be brought into contact with another member, for example, the decoration member is quickly rotated and slowly contacted with another member. It becomes possible. Therefore, breakage of the movable accessory due to contact with other members can be avoided.

In addition, for example, when a plurality of movable members provided with such a decorative member are provided and they are interlocked, the decorative members of the plurality of movable members are respectively rotated, and then the respective second arm members extend. In the direction, and the decorative members can be brought into contact with each other. Thus, when the plurality of decorative members that do not form one design when rotating are moved in the direction in which the second arm members extend, the decorative members come into contact with each other to form one design. Can be performed, the player's interest in the movement of the decorative member can be enhanced, and the effect expression by the decorative member can be improved.
Therefore, when the movable role is driven and brought into contact with another member, it is possible to improve the effect of the movable role while avoiding damage to the movable role due to the contact.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, the first arm member extends in a direction in which the second arm member moves, and a rotation axis (for example, a rotation axis of the second connecting member that moves with the second arm member). , And a groove (for example, a slide groove 831a to be described later) movably engaged with an end of a rotation shaft 726e (to be described later).

  Accordingly, when the second arm member moves, the end of the rotation shaft of the second connecting member moves while engaging with the groove, so that the groove serves as a guide, and the decorative member attached to the second connecting member. Swing can be suppressed, and it can be moved smoothly.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately detecting the passage of a game ball by the passage detecting means.

It is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 4A is a front view showing a configuration of a second big winning device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 4A shows a state where a game ball does not win a V winning opening, and FIG. Is a state in which the game ball wins the V winning opening. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram of a payout unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the prize ball case unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board concerning the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 9A is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a second starting opening winning device of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 9A illustrates the second starting opening winning device in a winable state. FIG. 9B is a diagram showing the second starting opening winning device in a state where a winning is not possible. FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a game ball contact portion of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating a game ball contact portion of a first modification. FIG. 10 (b) is a diagram showing a game ball contact portion according to a second modification, and FIG. 10 (c) is a diagram showing a game ball contact portion according to a third modification. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 2nd big winning a prize device of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is the perspective view which looked at the front decoration set of the pachinko gaming machine concerning the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention from the back side. It is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention in a state where a front decoration set of a second big winning device of the pachinko gaming machine is removed. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 1st movable combination of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 1st movable combination of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 2nd movable role of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 2nd movable role of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 2nd movable role of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 2nd movable role of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a front view of the 3rd movable role and the 4th movable role of the pachinko gaming machine concerning the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the upper left third movable role of the pachinko gaming machine concerning the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the upper left third movable role of the pachinko gaming machine concerning the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the upper left third movable role of the pachinko gaming machine concerning the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 2nd connecting member of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the upper left third movable role of the pachinko gaming machine concerning the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the upper left third movable role of the pachinko gaming machine concerning the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the upper left third movable role of the pachinko gaming machine concerning the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the arm member of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 28A is a sectional view taken along the line AA 'in FIG. 25, and FIG. 28B is a sectional view taken along the line BB' in FIG. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 3rd connecting member of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 4th movable combination of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 4th movable combination of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a front view of the 3rd movable role and the 4th movable role of the pachinko gaming machine concerning the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 34A is a diagram showing an example of a table showing basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention, FIG. 34A is a diagram showing a special symbol game specification table, and FIG. FIG. 34C is a diagram showing a game specification table, FIG. 34C is a diagram showing a hit distribution table, and FIG. 34D is a diagram showing an open pattern table. FIG. 4 is a state transition diagram of main control of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a state transition diagram of sub-control of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of main fluctuation time determination table 1 of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of main fluctuation time determination table 2 of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the ceiling lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the point addition table of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 40 (a) is a figure showing the second high probability state, and FIG. 40 (b) is a normal state state. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of the time-saving no-drawing navigation lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the navigation lottery table at the time of the big hit of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the navigation lottery table at the time of the end of the set game of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the main processing performed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the main processing performed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol fluctuation time management processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit start interval management processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of small hitting processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing after the end of the small hit in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit start interval management process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big winning opening opening process in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the big hit end interval processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the system timer interruption processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input process in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol related switch check processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the movable member control processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control main process performed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the timer interruption processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command interruption process in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol effect start command receiving process in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing in the normal gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing in the normal gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing in the normal gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st high probability medium effect determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd high-probability effect determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 3rd high-probability medium-effect decision processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fourth high-probability effect determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the big hit start command reception in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the V hit start command reception in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of receiving a small hit end command in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of receiving a display command during a special winning opening opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of receiving a special symbol hit interval end command in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure showing an effect per 16R of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure showing an effect per 2R of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interruption process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the security ball presence detection process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the detection processing without a security ball performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the count switch detection processing performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start waiting process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor starting initial process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows the excitation system of the payout motor in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding reception of prize ball control data of the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding transmission of payout error information data by a payout control circuit in a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure showing a modification of the form of communication between the main control circuit and the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a timing chart at the time of error information transmission by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a method of synthesizing error information in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a view illustrating a mode of reporting error information in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a timing chart of the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment is not completed using the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure showing the excitation data according to the number of drop requests in the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart when a retry operation is required during the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a payout state notification display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. 6 is a timing chart when an overpayout error occurs in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. 6 is a timing chart at the time of occurrence of a payout ball clogging error in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. 6 is a timing chart at the time of occurrence of an error when the lower plate is full in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. 6 is a timing chart when a payout motor abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding the receiving processing of the payout control circuit when the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention is turned off. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the point addition table of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention, FIG. 110 (a) is a figure showing the second high probability, and FIG. 110 (b) is a normal medium. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of a lottery table at the time of a loss super reach of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the timer interruption processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 2 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing in the 1st high probability state in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the prize ball case unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interruption process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the count switch detection process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor drive process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the origin adjustment excitation data setting processing performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the count switch detection processing performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start waiting process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor starting initial process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine concerning other embodiments of the present invention.

  Hereinafter, the configuration and various operations of a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

(Embodiment 1)
First, a gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described.

[Structure of pachinko machine]
The structure of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main body 2, a base door 3 openably and closably mounted on the main body 2, and a glass door openably and closably mounted on the base door 3. 4 is provided.

[Body]
The main body 2 is formed of a frame-like member having a rectangular opening 2a (see FIG. 2). The main body 2 is formed of a material such as wood, for example.

[Base door]
The base door 3 is formed of a plate-like member having a rectangular outer shape substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 2. The base door 3 is disposed in front of the main body 2 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and the base door 3 is rotated around one side edge of the main body 2 as an axis to thereby rotate the main body 2. The opening 2a is opened and closed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the base door 3 is provided with a square opening 3a. The opening 3 a is formed from the vicinity of the central portion of the base door 3 to the upper region, and has a size occupying most of the base door 3.

  Further, a speaker 11, a game board 12, a liquid crystal display device 13, a dish unit 14, a firing unit 15, a payout unit 16, and a board unit 17 are attached to the base door 3.

  The speaker 11 is disposed above the base door 3 (near the upper end). The game board 12 is arranged in front of the base door 3 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and is arranged so as to cover the opening 3a of the base door 3.

  The game board 12 is formed of a plate-shaped resin member having optical transparency. Note that, as the resin having a light transmitting property, for example, an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a methacryl resin, or the like may be used.

  Further, on the front surface of the game board 12 (the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1), a game area 12a in which the game ball fired from the firing device 15 rolls is formed. The game area 12a is an area surrounded by a guide rail 41 (specifically, an outer rail 41a shown in FIG. 3 described later), and its outer peripheral shape is substantially circular.

  Further, a plurality of gaming nails (see FIG. 3 described later) are driven into the gaming area 12a. The configuration of the game board 12 (game area 12a) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  The liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The liquid crystal display device 13 has a display area 13a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 13a is set so as to occupy all or a part of the surface of the game board 12.

  In the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, various images such as an effect identification pattern, an effect image, a decorative image (decorative pattern), and the like are displayed. The player can visually recognize various images displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 via the game board 12.

  In the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 13 is used as the display device, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the liquid crystal display device 13, for example, display devices such as a plasma display, a rear projection display, and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display may be applied.

  A spacer 19 is provided on the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The spacer 19 is provided between the back surface of the gaming board 12 (the surface on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 13 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The space which becomes the flow path of the game ball which rolls in game field 12a is formed.

  The spacer 19 is formed of a material having optical transparency. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the spacer 19 may, for example, be partially formed of a material having light transmittance or may be formed of a material having no light transmittance. .

  The dish unit 14 is arranged below the game board 12. The plate unit 14 has an upper plate 21 and a lower plate 22 arranged below the plate 21. As shown in FIG. 2, the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22 are formed with payout ports 21a and 22a for lending game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls), respectively.

  When the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout ports 21a and 22a and stored in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22, respectively. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are fired by the firing device 15 to the game area 12a.

  Further, the dish unit 14 is provided with an effect button 23. Specifically, effect button 23 is attached on upper plate 21. A dial operation unit (jog dial) 24 is attached to the periphery of the effect button 23 so as to be rotatable with respect to the effect button 23.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a predetermined effect function performed using at least one of the effect button 23 and the dial operation unit 24. When a predetermined effect is performed, the display of the liquid crystal display device 13 is performed. An image prompting operation of at least one of the effect button 23 and the dial operation unit 24 is displayed in the area 13a.

  The launching device 15 is disposed in the lower right area (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 3. The firing device 15 includes a firing handle 25 that can be operated by a player, and a panel body 26 that engages with a lower right portion of the dish unit 14. The firing handle 25 is arranged on the front side of the panel body 26 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 26.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a solenoid actuator (drive device) for controlling the firing operation of the game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 26. Similarly, although not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a touch sensor is provided on the periphery of the firing handle 25, and a firing volume is provided inside the firing handle 25. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 25, and changes the power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the player's hand contacts the touch sensor of the firing handle 25, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. That is, it is detected that the player grips the firing handle 25. Then, when it is detected that the player grips the firing handle 25, the game ball can be fired by the solenoid actuator.

  Then, when the player grips the firing handle 25 and turns in the clockwise direction (clockwise as viewed from the player side), the resistance value of the firing volume changes according to the turning angle of the firing handle 25. Then, electric power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are sequentially fired, and the fired game balls are guided to the guide rail 41 (see FIG. 3 described later) and released to the game area 12a of the game board 12.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a firing stop button is provided on the side of the firing handle 25. The firing stop button is a button provided for stopping the firing of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. Even when the firing handle 25 is held and rotated by the player, the firing of the game ball is stopped by the player pressing the firing stop button.

  The payout unit 16 and the board unit 17 are arranged on the back side of the base door 3. Game balls are supplied to the payout unit 16 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout unit 16 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied from the storage unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22 based on establishment of a payout condition.

  The board unit 17 has various control boards. Various control boards are provided with a main control circuit 70, a sub control circuit 200, a payout control circuit 300, and the like, which will be described later (see FIG. 33, which will be described later).

[Glass door]
The glass door 4 is formed of a plate-like member having a substantially square surface. The glass door 4 is arranged on the front side of the game board 12 and has a size to cover the game board 12. On the front surface of the glass door 4, a speaker cover 29 is provided in an upper region facing the speaker 11.

  In the central part of the glass door 4, an opening is formed in a region facing the game region 12a of the game board 12 so as to expose at least the game region 12a. The opening of the glass door 4 is provided with a light-transmitting protective glass 28, which closes the opening.

  Therefore, when the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the protective glass 28 is arranged so as to face at least the game area 12a of the game board 12.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a guide rail 41, a ball passage detector 43, a first starting port 44, a second starting port 45 (starting area), and a normal electric accessory 46 are provided on the front surface of the game board 12. Are provided. In addition, on the front of the game board 12, a general winning opening 51, 52, a first big winning device 54 (variable winning device), a second big winning device 53 (variable winning device), an out opening 55, a plurality of Game nail 56 is provided.

  Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, a special symbol display device 61 (identification information display means, special symbol display means) and a normal symbol display are provided above the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 which is disposed substantially at the center. A device 62, a normal symbol hold display 63, a first special symbol hold display 64, and a second special symbol hold display 65 are provided.

  In the first embodiment, a notification LED (Light Emitting Diode) that lights when the result of the special symbol stop display is “big hit”, a round number display LED that displays the number of rounds during the big hit game, and the like are provided. Is also good.

[Various components in the game area]
The guide rail 41 includes an outer rail 41a extending in an arc shape that defines the game area 12a, and an inner rail 41b extending in an arc shape disposed inside (inner peripheral side) of the outer rail 41a. Is done.

  The game area 12a is formed inside the outer rail 41a. The outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b are arranged so as to face each other near the left end of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side, so that the firing device is located between the outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b. A guide path 41c that guides the game ball fired by 15 to the upper part of the game area 12a is formed.

  A ball discharge port 41d is formed at the tip of the inner rail 41b located at the upper left portion of the game area 12a by the tip of the inner rail 41b and a part of the outer rail 41a facing the tip. A ball return preventing piece 42 is provided at the tip of the inner rail 41b so as to close the ball discharge port 41d.

  The ball return preventing piece 42 prevents the game ball discharged from the ball discharge port 41d into the game area 12a from passing through the ball discharge port 41d again and entering the guide path 41c.

  The game ball discharged from the ball discharge port 41d flows down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12a. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 12a, such as the plurality of game nails 56, the first starting port 44, and the second starting port 45, and changes the traveling direction of the game area 12a. It flows down from the top to the bottom.

  A display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 12a. An obstacle 13b is provided at the upper end of the display area 13a. By providing the obstacle 13b, the game ball does not pass over an area overlapping the display area 13a in the game area 12a.

  The ball passage detector 43 is arranged near the right end of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The ball passing detector 43 is provided with a passing ball switch 43a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passing detector 43. In addition, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a “hit” has occurred, and a variation display of the normal symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

  The first starting port 44 is disposed below the display area 13a, and the second starting port 45 is disposed below the first starting port 44. The first starting port 44 and the second starting port 45 are formed of members capable of receiving game balls.

  Hereinafter, when a game ball enters or passes through the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45, it is referred to as "winning". When a game ball wins the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, three game balls are paid out when the first starting port 44 is won, and two game balls are paid out when the second starting port 45 is won. The game balls to be paid out are called prize balls.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting port 44, a lottery is performed to determine whether the hit is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and the special symbol changes based on the result of the lottery. Display starts. When a game ball enters the second starting port 45, a lottery is performed to determine whether the hit is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and a variation display of a special symbol is started based on a result of the lottery. Is done. In the first embodiment, the probability of winning a “small hit” when a game ball enters the first starting port 44 is zero. In other words, even if the ball enters the first starting port 44, no "small hit" is won. In the first embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 45, the player wins the "small hit" with a higher probability than the probability of winning the "big hit". That is, when the ball enters the second starting port 45, it is easier to win the "small hit" than the "big hit".
In the first embodiment, as described above, the probability of winning a “small hit” when a game ball enters the first starting port 44 is zero, but is not limited to zero. This probability only needs to be lower than the probability of winning a “small hit” when a game ball enters the second starting port 45. As described above, even when a game ball enters the first starting port 44, the possibility of winning a "small hit" can increase the range of the game. For example, it is possible to shift to a set game described later from a state other than the “time-saving game state” described later, and to expand the range of the game.

  The first starting port 44 is provided with a first starting port winning ball switch 44a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the first starting port 44. The second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the second starting port 45. The game balls that have won the first starting port 44 and the second starting port 45 pass through a collecting port (not shown) provided in the game board 12 and are conveyed to a collecting section (not shown) for game balls. Is done.

  The normal electric accessory 46 is provided at the second starting port 45. The ordinary electric accessory 46 includes a pair of wing-like members rotatably attached to both sides of the second starting port 45, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a for driving the pair of wing-like members (see FIG. 33).

  The ordinary electric accessory 46 is driven by an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a to open the pair of wing-shaped members so that a game ball can easily enter the second starting port 45, and the pair of wing-shaped members. One of the closed states in which the member is closed and the game ball cannot be won at the second starting port 45 is generated.

  In the first embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in the closed state, the opening form of the pair of wing-shaped members is not a form that makes it impossible to win, but a form that makes it difficult to win game balls. It may be.

  The general winning opening 51 is disposed near the lower left of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side. In addition, the general winning opening 52 is arranged below the ball passage detector 43, and is arranged near the lower right of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side.

  The general winning opening 51 and the general winning opening 52 are formed of members capable of receiving game balls. Hereinafter, the entry or passage of a game ball into the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52 is also referred to as “winning”. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, when the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52 is won, there are ten prize balls.

  The general winning opening 51 is provided with a general winning ball switch 51a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the general winning opening 51. The general winning opening 52 is provided with a general winning ball switch 52a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the general winning opening 52.

  The first special winning device 54 and the second special winning device 53 are arranged below the ball passing detector 43 and between the first starting port 44 and the general winning port 52. The first special winning device 54 and the second special winning device 53 are arranged vertically along the flow path of the game ball, and the second special winning device 53 is arranged above the first special winning device 54. You.

  The first special winning device 54 is a so-called attacker type opening / closing device, and includes a shutter 54a that can be opened and closed, and a solenoid actuator (a first special winning opening solenoid 54b in FIG. 33 described later) that drives the shutter.

  The first big winning device 54 receives a game ball when the corresponding shutter 54a is open (open state: first state) and the shutter 54a is closed (closed state: second state). When the game ball is not accepted.

  Hereinafter, the entry or passage of a game ball into the first big winning device 54 is also referred to as “winning”. When a game ball wins in the first big winning device 54, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first big winning device 54, there are 15 winning balls.

  Further, the first big winning device 54 is provided with a count switch 54c (see FIG. 33 described later) for counting the game balls that have won the first big winning device 54.

  The second big winning device 53 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the second big winning device of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 4A shows a state where the game ball does not win the V winning opening, and FIG. 4B shows a state where the game ball wins the V winning opening. The second big winning device 53 has a blade member 53a that can be opened and closed, and when the blade member 53a is in an open state, the second big winning device 53 receives a game ball and the blade member 53a is in a closed state (FIG. 3). Do not accept game balls at the time of (Ref.). That is, when the blade member 53a is in the open state, there is a possibility that a game ball enters the second big winning device 53, and when the blade member 53a is in the closed state, there is a possibility that a game ball enters the second big winning device 53. Absent.

  Hereinafter, the entry of a game ball into the second big winning device 53 is also referred to as “winning”. When a game ball wins in the second big winning device 53, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, there are also 15 prize balls when a game ball wins in the second big winning device 53.

  Further, a V winning opening 57 is provided inside the second big winning device 53. The second big winning device 53 has a movable member 57a that can be opened and closed to open and close the V winning opening 57. When the V winning opening 57 is open, the V winning opening 57 accepts a game ball, and when the V winning opening 57 is closed, the V winning opening 57 does not accept a game ball. Entering the game ball into the V winning opening 57 is referred to as "V winning". In addition, when the game ball wins the V winning opening 57, it becomes “V hit”.

  The timing at which the movable member 57a enters the open state is related to the timing at which the blade member 53a enters the open state. For example, both the blade member 53a and the movable member 57a are normally in a closed state. When the blade member 53a is in the open state, the movable member 57a may be in the open state at the same time or slightly after that, and the movable member 57a may be in the closed state before the blade member 53a is in the closed state. For example, the time when the blade member 53a is in the open state may be twice as long as the time when the movable member 57a is in the open state.

  In addition, the second big winning device 53 is provided with a count switch 53c (see FIG. 33 described later) for counting game balls that have won the second big winning device 53. Further, the V winning opening 57 is provided with a V winning opening winning ball switch 57c (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the V winning opening 57. The second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the second starting port 45. Furthermore, the second big winning device 53 has a V winning opening solenoid 57b for operating the movable member 57a.

  The out port 55 is provided at the lowermost part of the game area 12a. The out port 55 does not win any of the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, the general winning port 51, the general winning port 52, the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53. Accept the ball.

  When the arrangement of various components in the game area 12a of the first embodiment is arranged as shown in FIG. 3, when a player hits a game ball in the area on the right side of the game area 12a (when hit right), A game ball is guided to the vicinity of the second starting port 45 below the first starting port 44 by the game nail 56 or the like.

  In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first starting port 44. As described above, in the first embodiment, when the first starting port 44 is won, the "small hit" is not won. Further, in the first embodiment, when the second starting port 45 is won, it is easier to win the “small hit” than the “big hit”.

  Therefore, in the “time saving game state” described later, in which winning in the second starting port 45 is relatively easy, by performing right-handing, the possibility of winning in the first starting port 44 is reduced, and It is possible to increase the possibility of winning in the starting opening 45 and make it easier to win the "small hit".

[Special design display]
As shown in FIG. 3, the special symbol display device 61 is disposed substantially at the center of the upper part of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The special symbol display device 61 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) a special symbol in a special symbol game. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the special symbol display device 61 is configured by a device that displays a special symbol with a symbol or a symbol.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display device 61 may be configured by, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern formed by turning on / off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

  The special symbol display device 61 changes the display of the special symbol (identification information) when the game ball wins the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 (special symbol starting prize). Then, the special symbol display device 61 performs a special symbol change display for a predetermined time, and then performs a special symbol stop display.

In the following, a special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when a game ball has won the first starting port 44 is referred to as a first special symbol. In addition, a special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball has won the second starting port 45 is referred to as a second special symbol. Whether the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be determined by the displayed color. That is, the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is displayed in different colors when it is the first special symbol and when it is the second special symbol. For example, when the first special symbol is displayed, it may be displayed in red, and when the second special symbol is displayed, it may be displayed in green. This makes it possible to distinguish which special symbol is displayed.
In the first embodiment, the special symbol display device 61 has one digit. For example, the special symbol display device 61 has two digits, and the left digit (tenth place) is the first special symbol, and the right digit (one digit). Position) may display the second special symbol, and thereby, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol can be distinguished from each other without using different colors. it can.

  In the special symbol display device 61, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in a specific mode ("big hit" mode), the gaming state is more advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state. The state shifts to the jackpot game state. That is, in the special symbol display device 61, a state where the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a state of shifting to the big hit game state is "big hit". In the special symbol display device 61, when the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in the "small hit" mode, the blade member 53a is in the open state. As described above, even if the first starting port 44 is won, no "small hit" is won.

  In the big hit game state, the first big winning device 54 is in an open state. Specifically, in the first embodiment, the game ball wins the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the special symbol display device 61. In this case, the first big winning device 54 is opened.

  The open state of the first big winning device 54 is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won, or until a certain period elapses. In addition, there are a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, and the opening time of the first big winning device 54 is not constant but varies depending on each type. When the elapsed time of the open state of the first big winning device 54 satisfies any one of these conditions, the open big winning opening which has been in the open state is closed.

  Hereinafter, a game in which the first big winning device 54 is in a state (open state) in which game balls can easily be received is referred to as a round game. During the round game, the first big winning device 54 is in a closed state.

  The round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

  That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the special symbol display device 61, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the gaming state is shifted or maintained according to the result.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 44 during the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is changed. The display (holding ball) is held.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the held first special symbol is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable display of the first special symbol to be retained (so-called “reserved number (the number of retained balls)”) is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces).

  Further, in the first embodiment, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 45 during the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (reserved ball). Is suspended.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the held second special symbol is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable displays of the second special symbol to be held (the number of held) is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces). Therefore, in the first embodiment, the total number of variable display of special symbols held is a maximum of eight in total.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is executed with higher priority than the variable display of the other special symbol. . Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the special symbol may be changed and displayed in the reserved order. Note that the second special symbol may not be held.

[Normal symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol display device 62 is disposed substantially at the center of the upper part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. In the first embodiment, the normal symbol display device 62 is disposed on the right side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

  The normal symbol display device 62 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) the normal symbols in the normal symbol game. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the ordinary symbol display device 62 is configured by two LEDs (ordinary symbol display LEDs) arranged in the vertical direction. In the ordinary symbol display device 62, a display pattern formed by turning on / off each ordinary symbol display LED is represented as an ordinary symbol.

  The ordinary symbol display device 62 alternately turns on and off the two ordinary symbol display LEDs when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, and performs a variable display of the ordinary symbol. Then, the normal symbol display device 62 performs a change display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a stop display of the ordinary symbol.

  In the normal symbol display device 62, when the stopped and displayed normal symbol is in a predetermined mode ("hit" mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the stop-displayed normal symbol is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of “losing”), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state. In the first embodiment, when the normal symbol is in the “hit” mode, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 46 from the closed state to the closed state via the open state is performed three times in succession. The time in the open state is 1.5 seconds.

  In addition, the lottery in the normal symbol game has a high probability in the "time saving game state", and has a low probability in other cases. In the first embodiment, no winning is made in the case of a low probability, and all winnings are made in the case of a high probability. In this case, in the lottery, a random value is acquired in the case of low probability, but may not be won, or in the case of low probability, the lottery itself may not be performed.

  That is, the ordinary symbol game is a game in which the ordinary symbol is fluctuated and displayed by the ordinary symbol display device 62, and thereafter the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

  When the game ball passes the ball passage detector 43 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the ordinary symbol currently being displayed in the variable display is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the ordinary symbol whose variable display has been suspended is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable displays of the ordinary symbols to be retained (that is, the “reserved number”) is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces).

[Normal symbol hold display]
As shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol hold display device 63 includes a display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.
It is located approximately in the center of the upper part of the. In the first embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 63 is disposed below the special symbol display 61 and the ordinary symbol display 62.

  The ordinary symbol hold display device 63 is a device for displaying the number of held ordinary symbols in variable display. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the ordinary symbol hold display device 63 is configured by four LEDs (ordinary symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, in the ordinary symbol hold display device 63, the number of ordinary symbols held for variable display is displayed by turning on / off each ordinary symbol hold display LED.

  Specifically, when the number of variable display of the normal symbols is one, the normal symbol hold display LED located at the leftmost side when viewed from the player side (the first normal symbol hold display LED from the left). Lights up, and the other ordinary symbol hold display LEDs go out.

  In the case where the number of variable display of normal symbols is two, the first and second normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left turn on, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs turn off. When the number of variable display of ordinary symbols is three, the first to third ordinary symbol holding display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other ordinary symbol holding display LEDs are turned off. Then, when the number of variable display of the normal symbols is four, all the normal symbol holding display LEDs are turned on.

[First Special Symbol Hold Display Device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol holding display device 64 is disposed above the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 and to the left of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

  The first special symbol holding display device 64 is a device that displays information relating to the variable display of the held first special symbol (the holding ball of the first special symbol). In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol reservation display device 64 includes a first special symbol reservation number display section 64a and a first special symbol reservation information display section 64b.

  The first special symbol hold information display section 64b is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display device 61, and the first special symbol hold number display section 64a is arranged on the left side of the first special symbol hold information display section 64b. Is done.

  The first special symbol reservation number display section 64a has four LEDs (first special symbol reservation display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. In addition, the display mode of the first special symbol hold number display section 64a is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol hold display device 63.

  In other words, when the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, the first special symbol suspension display LEDs from the first leftmost special symbol suspension display LED to the number of retained positions as viewed from the player side. Lights up.

  Further, the first special symbol holding information display section 64b displays information on the holding ball of the first special symbol. For example, the first special symbol holding information display section 64b displays information (identification information) on the holding ball of the first special symbol to be displayed next in a variable manner with a symbol or the like.

  Note that the configuration of the first special symbol hold display device 64 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 3, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the variable display count of the first special symbol. .

[Second special symbol hold display]
As shown in FIG. 3, the second special symbol holding display device 65 is disposed above the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 and to the right of the ordinary symbol display device 62 when viewed from the player side.

  The second special symbol holding display device 65 is a device that displays information relating to the variable display of the held second special symbol (holding ball of the second special symbol). In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the second special symbol holding display device 65 includes a second special symbol holding number display section 65a and a second special symbol holding information display section 65b.

  The second special symbol hold information display section 65b is arranged on the right side of the ordinary symbol display device 62, and the second special symbol hold number display section 65a is arranged on the right side of the second special symbol hold information display section 65b. Is done.

  The second special symbol reserved number display section 65a has four LEDs (second special symbol reserved display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. The display mode of the second special symbol reserved number display section 65a is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol reserved display device 63.

  That is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, the second special symbol suspension display LED from the second leftmost special symbol suspension display LED located at the leftmost position when viewed from the player side to the number of retained second special symbols is displayed. Lights up.

  Further, the second special symbol holding information display section 65b displays information on the holding ball of the second special symbol. For example, the second special symbol holding information display section 65b displays information (identification information) on the holding ball of the second special symbol which is to be displayed next in a fluctuating manner with a symbol or the like.

  The configuration of the second special symbol hold display device 65 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 3, and may be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the variable display number of the second special symbols. .

[Liquid crystal display]
The liquid crystal display device 13 is composed of liquid crystal as described above, and performs various effect displays in its display area 13a.

  Specifically, in the first embodiment, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being fluctuated and displayed on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of effect identification symbols (decorations) including, for example, numbers 1 to 8 and various characters, except for a specific case. (Design) is variably displayed in the display area 13a.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol (such as a liquid crystal symbol that will be described later) are also stopped and displayed in the display area 13a.

  Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is "big hit"), the special symbol is displayed to the player to recognize that it is "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 13a.

  As an effect for causing the player to recognize that it is a “big hit”, for example, first, a plurality of stopped and displayed decorative symbols are arranged in a specific mode (for example, a mode in which the same decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction). ), And then an effect of displaying an image for notifying “big hit” is given.

  In the first embodiment, an effect image related to the display contents of the first special symbol hold display device 64 and the second special symbol hold display device 65 is displayed in the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. For example, in the display area 13a, hold information (for example, the same number of holding symbols as the number of holding symbols) for notifying the holding number of variable display of special symbols is displayed. When performing a so-called pre-reading effect, which is a well-known technique, based on the information of the reserved ball of the special symbol, a notice at this time may be displayed in the display area 13a.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 62 is in a predetermined mode, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp the information is displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. A function for causing the function to be performed may be further provided.

[Information production]
As will be described later in detail, in the first embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied, the game ball is awarded in the V winning opening 57 and the notification of the game state executed when “V hit” is given, This is executed when the small hit that triggers the “V hit” is won. This notification is performed by displaying an effect image in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. This allows the player to execute an advantageous game state by performing a shooting operation of the game ball based on the notification. Specifically, according to the content of the notification, a shooting operation is performed such that a game ball enters the second big prize winning device 53 so as to achieve "V hit", or a second operation is performed so that "V hit" does not occur. It is possible to perform a firing operation such that a game ball does not enter the large winning device 53.

[Schematic configuration of payout unit]
Next, the payout unit 16 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of the payout unit 16 and is a view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the back. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a configuration of a winning ball case unit 170 as a payout device described later.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the payout unit 16 is supplied with a game ball from a storage unit (not shown) at the upper part of the gaming machine, and a ball tank 161 as a ball storage tank for storing the supplied game ball; The ball tank lower passage 162 connected to the ball tank 161 so as to communicate with the tank 161 and the payout of game balls can be managed, such as paying out game balls to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22. A prize ball case unit 170.

  Further, a board unit 17 in which various control boards including the payout control circuit 300 are incorporated is disposed below the ball tank 161 and the ball tank lower passage 162 so as to be in parallel with the prize ball case unit 170. .

  Here, the above-mentioned storage unit (not shown) is, for example, a replenishing device serving as ancillary equipment of a hall (game hall) provided for supplying game balls to the ball tank 161 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the payout unit 16, the game balls supplied from the storage unit are guided to the prize ball case unit 170 through the ball tank 161 and the ball tank lower passage 162, and are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the prize ball case unit 170 includes a plurality of first opening openings 44, a second starting opening 45, and a general winning opening 51 as a plurality of winning openings provided in the above-described gaming area 12a (see FIG. 3). The game ball is paid out from the ball tank 161 to a payout passage 180 described later on condition that the game ball has won one of the general winning opening 52, the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53. is there. The payout passage 180 is arranged at the lowermost part of the winning ball case unit 170.

  The prize ball case unit 170 includes a first ball supply passage 171A, a first 15-ball security switch 172A as supply detecting means, and a first sprocket 173A as moving means. Here, the prize ball case unit 170 is omitted except for a part in FIG. 6, but is the same as the first ball supply passage 171A, the first 15 ball security switch 172A, and the first sprocket 173A. A second ball supply passage 171B, a second 15-ball security switch 172B, and a second sprocket 173B as a moving means having a configuration are arranged on the back side in the paper direction of FIG. 6 (the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1). I have.

  That is, the prize ball case unit 170 has a structure including two rows of the ball supply passage 171, the 15 ball security switch 172, and the sprocket 173.

  However, the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B are arranged out of phase with each other by 60 °. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the first ball supply passage 171A and the second ball supply passage 171B are collectively referred to as a “ball supply passage 171”, and the first 15-ball security switch 172A and the first The two 15-ball security switches 172B are collectively referred to as “15-ball security switch 172”, and the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B are generically referred to as “sprocket 173”.

  Also, the payout passage 180 is actually a two-row structure having a first payout passage 180A and a second payout passage 180B. However, in the following, the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B are collectively referred to as “payout passage 180” unless otherwise specified.

  The ball supply passage 171 communicates with the ball tank 161 via the ball tank lower passage 162, and game balls are supplied from the ball tank 161 via the ball tank lower passage 162. The ball supply passage 171 can store up to a specified number (15 in the first embodiment) of game balls supplied from the ball tank 161. It should be noted that in actuality, the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B have a two-row structure, so that a total of 30 game balls can be accumulated in these passages.

  The 15-ball security switch 172 detects a game ball replenished in the ball supply passage 171. Specifically, the 15-ball security switch 172 detects that the ball is supplied by detecting the ball detection shield plate 172a by the detection sensor 172b every time the ball is supplied (passes). I do.

  Therefore, when the number of the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 is insufficient, that is, less than 15, the ball detection shield plate 172a operates and moves out of the detection area of the detection sensor 172b, so that the ball supply passage 171 It is detected that the specified number (15 in the first embodiment) has not been accumulated.

  The 15-ball security switch 172 is kept ON while detecting that the game balls are being replenished. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the 15-ball security switch 172 detects the replenished game balls.

  The 15-ball security switch 172 is turned on while detecting that the game ball supplied to the ball supply passage 171 is passing over the 15-ball security switch 172. The "supply of the game ball" means that the 15-ball security switch 172 detects that the game ball passes through the ball supply passage 171 and that the game ball exists in the ball supply passage 171. This includes ensuring that a predetermined number of game balls exist in the ball supply passage 171 on the premise that game balls are connected.

  The sprocket 173 is connected to a payout motor 174 as a driving means constituted by a stepping motor, and is configured to rotate clockwise in the drawing in accordance with driving of a payout motor 174 described later. The sprocket 173 receives the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 one by one, rotates by driving the payout motor 174 by a predetermined number of steps, and moves to the payout passage 180 one ball at a time, that is, pays out. It has become.

  In addition to the above, the sprocket 173 rotates when the payout motor 174 is driven by a predetermined number of steps, and as a result, the sprocket 173 rotates so that the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 can be received one by one. This may include a form depending on the rotation of the payout motor 174.

  In other words, it can be expressed that the sprocket 173 performs the rotation that can be accepted one ball at a time and pays out one ball at a time by the payout motor 174, and as a result of the predetermined rotation of the payout motor 174, the sprocket 173 turns one ball at a time. It can also be expressed that they accepted and paid out one ball at a time.

  The sprocket 173 is presumed to rotate, but is not limited to this. The sprocket 173 is formed in a plate shape and is slidable such that the sprocket 173 is movable or driven parallel to and perpendicular to the payout passage 180. The sprocket 173 may have any shape as long as the sprocket 173 receives a predetermined number of game balls at a time and can be paid out.

  The dispensing motor 174 uses a common motor for the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B. The sprocket 173 and the payout motor 174 in the first embodiment constitute a game ball control unit and a payout unit that can move the game ball that has passed through the ball supply passage 171.

  Further, a first counting switch 181A and a second counting switch 181B are provided in the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B, respectively. However, in the following, the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B are collectively referred to as “counting switch 181” unless otherwise specified.

  The counting switch 181 detects the game balls paid out to the payout passage 180 by the sprocket 173. The counting switch 181 in the first embodiment constitutes a payout detecting unit.

  In addition, a ball ejection shutter 175 is provided near the uppermost portion of the ball supply passage 171. When the ball removing shutter 175 is rotated clockwise in the drawing, the ball supply passage 171 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the upper portion of the ball supply passage 171 are discharged through the ball removal passage 176. It has become. The ball release shutter 175 is normally locked, and is used, for example, when discharging game balls stored in the ball tank 161.

[Modification 1 of Embodiment 1]
Next, a first modification of the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided on a game board 120 or a game board 120 described below in addition to or instead of the configuration provided on the game board 12 or the game board 12 of the first embodiment. A configuration can be provided.

  FIG. 7 is a front view showing a configuration of a game board of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the game board according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. Here, the player plays a game facing a game area 120a of the game board 120 described later. In the description of the game board 120, “front side” means the player side (the front side shown in FIG. 8), and “back side” means the side opposite to the player (the back side shown in FIG. 8). Side). Further, “right” means right as viewed from the player (as viewed from the front side shown in FIG. 8), and “left” is viewed from the player (as viewed from the front side shown in FIG. 8). Means left).

  As shown in FIG. 8, the game board 120 according to the first modification is disposed on the front side and has a panel main body 500 having a panel opening 500 a formed therein, and a center fitted into the panel opening 500 a of the panel main body 500. A base plate 600 and a rear box 700 arranged on the back side of the panel body 500 are provided.

  The panel main body 500 has a game area 120a on the front surface of which a game ball can roll, and in the game area 120a, a second starting port winning device 510 is provided below the panel opening 500a.

  The center base plate 600 is formed in a ring shape, and has a game area 120a connected to the game area 120a of the panel main body 500. In the center base plate 600, a second big winning device 610 is provided in the game area 120a, and a first movable role 620 movable inside the ring shape is provided.

  In the rear box 700, a substantially rectangular box opening 700a is formed at a position overlapping the panel opening 500a of the panel body 500, and a second movable role 710 is provided below the box opening 700a. Four third movable roles (upper left third movable role 720, upper right third movable role 730, lower left third movable role 740, lower right third movable role 750) are respectively provided near the four corners of portion 700a. A fourth movable role 760 is provided above the box opening 700a.

  The second starting opening winning device 510, the second big winning device 610, the first movable role 620, the second movable role 710, the third movable role (the upper left third movable role 720, the upper right third movable role 730) , The lower left third movable role 740, the lower right third movable role 750) or the fourth movable role 760 will be described as a configuration provided on the game board 120 of the first modification of the first embodiment. The configuration can be provided at any position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to any of the first to fourth embodiments.

(Second starting opening winning device of Modification 1)
FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a second starting port winning device of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 9A illustrates a second starting port in a winable state. It is a figure which shows a prize-winning apparatus, and FIG.9 (b) is a figure which shows the 2nd starting opening prize-winning apparatus of the state which cannot be awarded. FIG. 9 is a side view of the second start-up opening device.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, a second starting port winning device 510 as a winning device is capable of entering a game ball rolling in the game area 120 a, and a winning device opening formed in the panel body 500. A front decoration 511 arranged on the front side of the front surface 500b, a ball entrance 512 formed between the front decoration 511 and the panel body 500 and capable of entering a game ball rolling in the game area 120a; And. The electric chute unit 513 includes a winning detection unit 514, a first movable piece 515, a second movable piece 516 inside a second starter winning device box (not shown) fixed to the back of the panel main body 500. It includes a driving unit 517 and a link member 518 as an interlocking member.

  The winning detection means 514 can detect that a game ball that has entered the entrance 512 has passed through the predetermined area 514a. The winning detection means 514 is provided with a second starting opening winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later).

  The first movable piece 515 is slidably provided on the second starting port winning device box (not shown) below the entrance 512 in a front or rear side. The first movable piece 515 indicates that a predetermined driving condition has been satisfied (for example, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3 is in a predetermined mode ("hit" mode)). The first guideable state in which the game ball can be guided to the predetermined area 514a of the winning detection means 514 (the state shown in FIG. 9A) and the first guideable state in which the game ball cannot be guided (FIG. 9). (State shown in (b)). The predetermined driving condition may be satisfied when the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61 shown in FIG. 3 is in a predetermined mode ("hit" mode). Also, the second starting opening winning device 510 is an example of a winning device, and among the winning devices having the same configuration as the second starting opening winning device 510, it is a normal design that a game ball is detected by the winning detecting means 514. In this case, the winning device normally functions as a winning opening having an electrically-powered accessory, and when the detection of the game ball by the winning detecting means 514 is the starting condition of the special symbol. This winning device functions as a winning opening having a special electric accessory.

  The first movable piece 515 is connected to the guide surface 515a for guiding the game ball in the direction of the winning detection means 514, and to the guide surface 515a, and extends upward and inclines to the front side, and protrudes to the front side in the first guideable state. And a receiving surface 515b for receiving the ball.

  The second movable piece 516 is located below the entrance 512 and above the first movable piece 515 (upper middle in FIG. 9A). It is slidably provided on the side or the back side. The second movable piece 516 indicates that a predetermined driving condition has been satisfied (for example, when the stopped and displayed normal symbol is in a predetermined mode ("hit" mode) in the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3). From the second non-guideable state (the state shown in FIG. 9B) based on the second guideable state in which the game ball can be guided to the first movable piece 515 (FIG. 9A). (The state shown).

  The second movable piece 516 includes a game ball contact portion 516a that abuts on a game ball in contact with the receiving surface 515b of the first movable piece 515 and does not abut on a game ball in contact with the guide surface 515a of the first movable piece 515. . That is, the distance between the lower end of the game ball contact portion 516a of the second movable piece 516 (the portion of the game ball contact portion 516a closest to the first movable piece 515) and the guide surface 515a of the first movable piece 515 is , The size of which is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a game ball contact portion of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating a game ball contact portion according to a second modification, and FIG. 10C is a diagram illustrating a game ball contact portion according to a third modification. FIG. 10 is a view of the game ball contact portion viewed from the side.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the game ball contact portion 516a of the first modification is provided at the front end of the second movable piece 516, extends downward, and the front surface is a vertical surface. An inclined surface 516a 'that is inclined from the back side to the front side toward the lower end is formed on the back side surface. By forming the inclined surface 516a 'on the rear surface in this way, for example, the second movable piece 516 can be finely moved up and down, and is in the second guideable state (the state shown in FIG. 9A). When the vehicle is driven to the second non-guideable state (the state shown in FIG. 9B), it becomes easier to get over a game ball rolling on the first movable piece 515 on the back side of the game ball contact portion 516a (winning detection means 514). (See FIG. 9).

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the game ball contact portion 516b of Modification 2 is provided at the front end of the second movable piece 516A, extends downward, and on the front surface, toward the lower end. An inclined surface 516b 'that is inclined from the front side to the back side is formed, and the surface on the back side is a vertical surface. By forming the inclined surface 516b 'on the front surface in this way, for example, the second movable piece 516A can be finely moved up and down, and is in the second guideable state (the state shown in FIG. 9A). When the vehicle is driven to the second non-guideable state (the state shown in FIG. 9B), it becomes easier to get over the game ball rolling on the first movable piece 515 on the front side of the game ball contact portion 516b (winning detection means). 514 (see FIG. 9).

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the game ball contact portion 516c of the third modification is provided at the front end of the second movable piece 516B, extends downward, and faces the lower end on the front surface. An inclined surface 516b 'inclined from the front side to the back side is formed, and an inclined surface 516a' inclined from the back side to the front side toward the lower end is formed on the back side surface. As described above, by forming the inclined surface 516b 'on the front surface and forming the inclined surface 516a' on the rear surface, the effect of the inclined surface 516a 'of the first modified example is added to the above modified example. The effect of the second inclined surface 516b 'is added, the result of the game ball becomes more fluid, and the effect of the game ball can be improved.

  The driving means 517 is formed of, for example, a solenoid, is provided on the back side of the second movable piece 516, and establishes a predetermined driving condition for the piston 517a connected near the rear end of the second movable piece 516 ( For example, in the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3, the stopped and displayed normal symbol is drawn back to the rear side based on a predetermined mode ("hit" mode), and a predetermined end condition is satisfied. (For example, in the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol stopped and displayed is pushed to the front side based on a predetermined mode (a “hit” mode) after a predetermined time has elapsed). Note that the driving means 517 may be provided behind the first movable piece 515, and the piston 517a may be connected near the rear end of the first movable piece 515.

  The link member 518 extends from one end to the other end, and has one end rotatably engaged with the first movable piece 515, the other end rotatably engaged with the second movable piece 516, and one end and the other end. There is a fulcrum 518a between the two sides, and the other end and one end rotate around the fulcrum 518a by driving of the driving means 517.

  As described above, the first movable piece 515 and the second movable piece 516 are engaged with the one end side and the other end side of the link member 518, and the link member 518 is rotated about the fulcrum 518a, whereby the first movable piece 515 and the second movable piece 516 are rotated. When the piece 515 drives from the first non-guideable state to the first guideable state, the second movable piece 516 drives from the second non-guideable state to the second guideable state, and the game is played by the first movable piece 515. The sphere can be guided to the predetermined area 514a. Further, when the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first guideable state to the first non-guideable state, the second movable piece 516 is driven from the second guideable state to the second non-guideable state. The guide of the game ball to the predetermined area 514a by the first movable piece 515 can be blocked by the second movable piece 516.

  Specifically, the driving unit 517 pulls the piston 517a to the rear side based on the establishment of a predetermined driving condition. Then, the link member 518 rotates in a predetermined direction, the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first non-guideable state to the first guideable state, and the second movable piece 516 is moved from the second non-guideable state to the second guideable state. It is driven to a state in which it can be guided to a state shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, the driving unit 517 pushes the piston 517a to the front side based on the satisfaction of the predetermined end condition. Then, the link member 518 rotates in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first guideable state to the first guideable state, and the second movable piece 516 is shifted from the second guideable state. It drives to the 2nd guidance impossible state, and will be in the state shown in FIG.9 (b).

  At this time, among the game balls in contact with the first movable piece 515, the game balls flowing down to the guide surface 515a are guided to the predetermined area 514a without abutting on the game ball contact portion 516a of the second movable piece 516. The game ball in contact with the receiving surface 515b comes into contact with the game ball contact portion 516a of the second movable piece 516, and the guidance to the predetermined area 514a is blocked.

  According to the second starting-port winning device 510 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first modification of the first embodiment described above, the following operation and effect can be obtained. According to the second starting opening winning device 510, when the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first guideable state to the first non-guideable state, the second movable piece 516 is switched from the second guideable state to the second guidance. In order to drive to the impossible state, the first movable piece 515 guides the game ball to a predetermined area detected by the winning detection means 514 at the time of starting driving from the first guideable state to the first impossible state. Even if the player is in the middle of the game, the second movable piece 516 can prevent the game ball guided by the first movable piece 515 from being guided to a predetermined area. Thus, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls are won, even in a gaming machine that switches between the first guideable state and the first non-guideable state, it is possible to prevent the winning from exceeding the predetermined number. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to accurately calculate the performance related to the prize ball of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately manage the balance of the profit between the player and the game hall.

  In addition, by engaging the first movable piece 515 and the second movable piece 516 together with the link member 518, for example, if one driving means is driven by one driving means 517, the other movable piece is also driven. be able to. In addition, by using the link member 518, for example, when a second movable piece 516 is further added to a game machine having only the first movable piece 515 driven by the driving means 517, without providing another driving means, The second movable piece 516 can be driven in conjunction with the first movable piece 515. As a result, the winning device can be easily designed and replaced.

  Further, since the first movable piece 515 and the second movable piece 516 are configured to be linked by the link member 518, for example, the first movable piece 515 is changed from the first guideable state to the first guideable state due to a failure. When stopped during driving, if only the first movable piece 515 is used, the game ball continues to be picked up, and this game ball may be guided to a predetermined area detected by the prize detecting means 514. By providing the piece 516, the second movable piece 516 can prevent the game ball from being guided to a predetermined area to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately calculate the performance of the gaming machine with respect to the prize ball, and it is possible to more accurately manage the balance of the profit between the player and the game hall.

(Second Grand Prize Winner of Modification 1)
FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the second big winning device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The second big prize device 610 as a variable prize device includes a front decoration set 611, a V shutter 612 as a first movable member, and a plurality of right prize ball sensors 613 and left prize ball sensors 614 as a plurality of first passage detecting means. , A V-belo 615 as a second movable member, a V winning sensor 616 as a second passage detecting unit, and a discharge sensor 617 as a third passage detecting unit. In the following description, the second special winning device 610 will be described as a second special winning device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same configuration as the second special winning device 610 may be used as a first special winning device and a starting port. And a general winning opening device as a general winning opening. Also, for example, when the same configuration as the second big winning device 610 is applied to the starting device, the first starting-port winning ball switch 44a (see FIG. 33 described later) or the second starting instead of the V winning sensor 616. A winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later) may be provided. Further, for example, when the same configuration as the second big winning device 610 is applied to a general winning opening device, a passing ball switch 43a (see FIG. 33 described later) may be provided instead of the V winning sensor 616.

  The front decoration set 611 is provided on the front side of the center base plate 600 and in the game area 120a. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the front decoration set of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the back side.

  The front decoration set 611 includes a front plate 611a that is arranged at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the center base plate 600 (see FIG. 11), a side wall 611b extending from the center base plate 600 to the front plate 611a, and a side wall at the top. 611b is not provided, and a specific area 611c in which a V shutter 612 (see FIG. 11) is arranged, and a projection protruding from the front plate 611a toward the center base plate 600 in the vicinity of the uppermost portion, the V shutter 612 and the right prize ball sensor 613 (FIG. 11) provided between the contact member 611d).

  A game ball can pass between the protruding tip of the contact member 611d and the front surface of the center base plate 600. The contact member 611d can make contact with a game ball that has passed through the specific area 611c. The contact member 611d is provided in a substantially right half range of the specific area 611c. As will be described in detail later, a right prize ball sensor 613 is provided below the right side of the specific area 611c, and a left prize ball sensor 614 is provided below the left side of the specific area 611c. That is, the contact member 611d is provided above the right prize ball sensor 613, and is not provided above the left prize ball sensor 614.

  Also, the front decoration set 611 is a space formed by the front plate 611a and the side wall 611b below the specific area 611c and the distribution portion 611e formed by the side wall 611b, and guides a game ball passing through the specific area 611c. A first guide passage 611f, a second guide passage 611g, and a third guide passage 611h functioning as guide passages that are provided.

  A first guide passage 611f, which is an example of the predetermined area, is provided between the V-velo 615 and the V winning sensor 616. The first guide passage 611f is provided with a speed reduction portion 611j that can reduce the rolling speed of the game ball passing through the first guide passage 611f. Here, the deceleration unit 611j in the present embodiment is provided between the V-belo 615 and the V winning sensor 616, and before the game ball that has passed through the first guide passage 611f reaches the V winning sensor 616. A member having a function of enabling the rolling speed of the game ball to be attenuated (decelerated). If such a function is provided, the shape may be a rib, a curved passage, or the like. That is, the deceleration unit 611j is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment as long as it has a function of attenuating the rolling speed of the rolling game ball. The ribs that protrude, the ribs that protrude from the front plate 611a of the front decoration set 611 toward the game board 12, and the rolling directions of the game balls formed in the game area 120a where the second big winning device 610 is provided. An arbitrary configuration such as a guideable curved passage (curved portion), a windmill, and a structure including a distribution valve can be used. By temporarily lowering the rolling speed of the game ball by such a deceleration unit 611j, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the game ball, and thereafter, a V that can provide an advantageous game state to the player can be given. Since this game ball passes through the winning sensor 616, it is possible to enhance the effect on the game ball passing through the V winning sensor 616. In the first guide passage 611f, a passage protruding portion that protrudes from the front plate 611a toward the center base plate 600, extends along the first guide passage 611f, and can contact a game ball flowing down the first guide passage 611f. 611k are provided. By providing such a passage protrusion 611k, a game ball flowing down the first guide passage 611f flows down while contacting the passage protrusion 611k in the first guide passage 611f as compared with a case where the game ball simply flows down. It moves more complicatedly and the performance by the game ball is improved.

  As illustrated in FIG. 11, the distribution unit 611e is formed in a mountain shape that is inclined leftward and downward with the approximate center in the left-right direction being the apex. The first guide passage 611f extends below a skirt of one of the distribution portions 611e (the left side in FIG. 12), and a V-belo 615 is disposed at an intermediate portion. The second guide passage 611g extends below the other (right side in FIG. 12) skirt of the distribution portion 611e. One end of the third guide passage 611h is connected above the V-belo 615 of the first guide passage 611f, the other end is connected to the second guide passage 611g, and the other end is inclined. Further, the front decoration set 611 is formed of a transparent material, and at least a part of the game ball guided by the first guide passage 611f, the second guide passage 611g, and the third guide passage 611h can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention in a state where a front decoration set of a second big winning device is removed. The V shutter 612 is slid to the front side or the back side by a solenoid actuator (a second big winning opening solenoid 53b in FIG. 33 described later). The V shutter 612 is disposed in the specific area 611c (see FIG. 11), slides rearward, and in a state where the game ball easily passes through the specific area 611c when retracted from the front surface of the center base plate 600 (see FIG. 11). (Opened state), slides to the front side, and enters a second state (closed state) in which the game balls hardly pass through the specific area 611c in a state of protruding from the front surface of the center base plate 600. The V shutter 612 is disposed so as to be inclined downward from one side (for example, the left side in the example shown in FIG. 11) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front side, to the other side (for example, the right side in the example shown in FIG. 11). I have.

  The right prize ball sensor 613 and the left prize ball sensor 614 are arranged side by side at substantially the same height in the left-right direction in the game area 120a, provided with a count switch 53c (see FIG. 33 described later), and provided with a V shutter 612. In the first state, it is possible to detect the passage of a game ball that has entered the second big winning device 610 and to give a predetermined game value (for example, a payout of a predetermined number of prize balls) to the player. is there. As described above, the V shutter 612 is arranged to be inclined downward from left to right in the left-right direction, and the right prize ball sensor 613 and the left prize ball sensor 614 are arranged in parallel at substantially the same height in the left-right direction. That is, the distance between the right prize ball sensor 613 and the V shutter 612 is shorter than the distance between the left prize ball sensor 614 and the V shutter 612. In the present embodiment, the V shutter 612 is disposed so as to be inclined downward from left to right in the left and right direction, and the right prize ball sensor 613 and the left prize ball sensor 614 are disposed side by side at substantially the same height in the left and right direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the V shutter 612 is disposed substantially horizontally in the left-right direction, and the right prize ball sensor 613 is disposed at a position higher than the left prize ball sensor 614 (closer to the V shutter 612). Is also good.

  The V-velo 615 is slid to the front side or the rear side by a solenoid actuator (V winning opening solenoid 57b in FIG. 33 described later). The V-velo 615 is disposed below the left prize ball sensor 614, slides rearward, and the first state in which the game ball easily passes through the first guide passage 611f when retracted from the front surface of the center base plate 600. (Open state), slides to the front side, and enters a second state (closed state) in which the game balls are difficult to pass through the first guide passage 611f in a state of protruding from the front side of the center base plate 600.

  The V winning sensor 616 is arranged below the V-velo 615 in the game area 120a, is provided with a V-prize opening winning ball switch 57c (see FIG. 33 described later), and is in the left state when the V-velo 615 is in the first state. Of the game balls that have passed through the prize ball sensor 614, the game balls that have passed through the first guide passage 611f can be detected, and when the passage of the game balls is detected, a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a small It is possible to provide a winning game (game by a later-described FIG. 27).

  The discharge sensor 617 is disposed below the right prize ball sensor 613 in the game area 120a, and when the V-velo 615 is in the second state, the discharge sensor 617 includes a game ball that has passed the right prize ball sensor 613 or the left prize ball sensor 614. It is possible to detect a game ball that has not passed through the first guide passage 611f.

  Returning to FIG. 11, a specific region 611c is formed at the top of the second big winning device 610, and a V shutter 612 is arranged in the specific region 611c. The sorting unit 611e is arranged below the specific area 611c. A right prize ball sensor 613 is disposed on the right skirt of the distribution unit 611e, and a left prize ball sensor 614 is disposed on the left hem of the distribution unit 611e. That is, the distribution unit 611e can distribute the game ball that has passed the specific area 611c to the left prize ball sensor 614 as one first pass detection unit and the right prize ball sensor 613 as the other first pass detection unit. It is.

  Below the left prize ball sensor 614, a first guide passage 611f reaching the V winning sensor 616 is formed, and below the right prize ball sensor 613, a second guide passage 611g reaching the discharge sensor 617 is formed. . Further, a V guide 615 is arranged in the first guide passage 611f, and a third guide passage 611h connected to the second guide passage 611g is connected above the V guide 615. With such a configuration, a game ball that has passed through the left prize ball sensor 614 can pass through the first guide passage 611f when the V-belo 615 is in the first state (open state). On the other hand, when the V-velo 615 is in the second state (closed state), the game ball that has passed through the left prize ball sensor 614 flows into the second guide passage 611g through the third guide passage 611h, and enters the second guide passage 611g. , And can be detected by the discharge sensor 617. The game ball that has passed through the right prize ball sensor 613 is guided to the second guide passage 611g, and is detected by the discharge sensor 617 regardless of the state of the V-velo 615.

  According to the second big winning device 610 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following operation and effect can be obtained. According to the second special winning device 610, for example, when the V shutter 612 is in the first state (for example, the open state), the game ball that has entered the second special winning device 610 is the first ball. When guided by the guide passage 611f, the second guide passage 611g, or the third guide passage 611h, at least a part of the game ball becomes visible. Since the right prize ball sensor 613, the left prize ball sensor 614, the V winning sensor 616, and the discharge sensor 617 are provided in the game area 120a, it is possible to detect a game ball rolling in the game area 120a. Therefore, the game ball can roll in the game area 120a at least immediately before the game ball is detected by each sensor.

  Therefore, at least a portion of the game ball can be visually recognized by the player from the time when the game ball enters the second big winning device 610 to the time when the game ball reaches each sensor. It is possible to improve the visibility of the game balls in the device 610. Further, since it is possible to roll the game area 120a until the game ball is detected by each sensor, it is possible to perform an effect using the game ball rolling the game area 120a even in the second big winning device 610. Becomes possible, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect on the player.

  Also, a first guide passage 611f, a second guide passage 611g, and a third guide passage 611h are provided in the game area 120a, and a right prize ball sensor 613, a left prize ball sensor 614, a V prize sensor 616, and a discharge sensor 617 are provided. Since the game area 120a is provided in the area 120a, the game area 120a can be used as a part of the second big winning device 610. For example, a passage path of a game ball provided on the back side of a game board as in the related art can be omitted. Also, the configuration of the variable winning device can be simplified.

  Also, when a game ball rolling in the game area 120a passes through the V winning sensor 616, if the game ball passes through the game area 120a at the speed of rolling, the rolling speed is too fast, and the V winning sensor 616 It is also conceivable that it is not possible to accurately detect the passage of the ball, and in order for the V winning sensor 616 to accurately detect the passage of the game ball, it is necessary to reduce the speed of the game ball rolling in the game area 120a, The speed reduction unit 611j can be used to adjust the speed at which such game balls roll. Therefore, it is possible to accurately detect the passage of the game ball by the passage detecting means.

  In addition, for example, when the game ball rolls from upstream to downstream from the V shutter 612, the speed of the game ball is reduced by the contact of the game ball with the contact member 611d on the downstream side, and the player's movement with respect to the game ball. It is possible to raise awareness. Further, the distribution unit 611e can distribute the game ball to one of the left prize ball sensor 614 and the right prize ball sensor 613. The game ball that has passed through the left prize ball sensor 614 may pass through the V prize sensor 616 that can provide the player with an advantageous game state, but has passed through the right prize ball sensor 613. Passes through the discharge sensor 617 without passing through the V winning sensor 616. That is, the rolling of the game ball in the distribution unit 611e determines whether or not it is advantageous for the player.

  Therefore, while the game performance is improved by the distribution unit 611e, and the rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced immediately before the distribution unit 611e in which the game performance is improved by the contact member 611d, the visibility to the game ball is improved. This makes it possible to further enhance the effect of rendering the second large winning device 610 for the player.

Further, since the distance between the right prize ball sensor 613 and the V shutter 612 is shorter than the distance between the left prize ball sensor 614 and the V shutter 612, of the game balls that have passed through the V shutter 612, the V shutter 612 and the left prize The rolling speed of a game ball passing between the V shutter 612 and the right prize ball sensor 613 tends to be faster than that of a game ball passing between the ball sensor 614. Although it may be difficult to detect the passage of the game ball, the contact member 611d reduces the rolling speed of the game ball, so that the right prize ball sensor 613 can reliably detect the passage of the game ball.
In addition, since the contact member 611d is provided above the right prize ball sensor 613 and is not provided above the left prize ball sensor 614, the contact member 611d is provided more than the gaming machine in which the contact members are provided above both the prize ball sensors. Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, by providing the contact member 611d only above the right prize ball sensor 613 and not above the left prize ball sensor 614, the contact member 611d allows the player to be aware of the game ball while playing the game. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.
In addition, since the contact member 611d is provided only above the right prize ball sensor 613 and is not provided above the left prize ball sensor 614, the falling speed of the game ball passing through the left prize ball sensor 614 is not reduced. The game ball that has passed the left prize ball sensor 614 quickly rolls in the direction of the V-velo 615.
If the contact member 611d also exists above the left prize ball sensor 614, the falling speed of the game ball is excessively reduced, and the V-bello 615 is arranged after the game ball passes through the left prize ball sensor 614. The time required to pass through the first guide passage 611f becomes longer.
This is because when the opening time (time in the first state) is provided in the V-velo 615, the opening time ends because the falling speed of the game ball is reduced, and the V-velo 615 is in the closed state (second state). ), Which leads to a loss of the opportunity for the game ball passing through the left prize ball sensor 614 to pass through the first guide passage 611f. For this reason, according to the second big winning device 610 of the first modification, by not providing the contact member 611 d above the left winning ball sensor 614, the falling speed of the game ball before reaching the V-velo 615 is reduced. It is possible to prevent a disadvantage to the player due to the reduction.
The second big winning device 610 of Modification 1 does not reduce the falling speed of the game ball until it passes through the first guide passage 611f in which the V-velo 615 is arranged as described above. A mechanism for reducing the rolling speed of the game ball temporarily is provided upstream of the speed reduction unit 611j.

  In this manner, in the first guide passage 611f, it is possible to guide the game ball so as to pass through the V winning sensor 616 after the speed of the game ball passing through the V-velo 615 is reduced by the speed reduction unit 611j. For this reason, the player's consciousness of the game ball is concentrated on the game ball whose rolling speed has been temporarily reduced by the deceleration unit 611j, and thereafter, the V prize which can provide an advantageous game state to the player is provided. Since the game balls pass through the sensor 616, it is possible to enhance the effect of the game balls passing through the V winning sensor 616.

(1st movable character)
FIGS. 14 and 15 are diagrams illustrating the configuration of the first movable role of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. 14 and 15 are front views of the first movable role 620. In order to facilitate understanding of the first movable role 620, only the outer shape of the decorative portion 625 provided on the forefront is indicated by a dotted line. Is shown. FIG. 14 shows a state (drive position) before driving the first movable auditory component 620, and FIG. 15 shows a state (drive position) after driving the first movable accessory 620.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the first movable accessory 620 includes a base member 621 attached to the center base plate 600 (see FIG. 8), a motor 622 fixed to the back side of the base member 621, and a base member 621. 623, a movable base 624 provided on the front side of the base member 621, and a decorative portion 625 fixed to the front side of the movable base 624.

  The base member 621 is formed with a pair of engagement grooves 621a which engage with the movable base 624 and extend in a predetermined direction (in the example shown in FIG. 14, the direction of the arrow shown in FIG. 14). The drive of the motor 622 is controlled by a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. The gear 623 is rotated by the drive of the motor 622. The movable base 624 engages with the engaging portion 624a in which a plurality of teeth arranged in the same direction as the engaging groove 621a mesh with the gear 623, and the pair of engaging grooves 621a of the base member 621, respectively. And a pair of engaging portions 624b that can move along. The decoration unit 625 displays, for example, characters and characters, and is provided with an LED board, and this LED board can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33).

  Next, the operation of the first movable role 620 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 14 (standby position), when the gear 623 rotates counterclockwise by the drive of the motor 622 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33), the driving force The power is transmitted to the engaging portion 624 a of the movable base 624 that meshes with the 623. Then, the movable base 624 is guided by the pair of engagement grooves 621a of the base member 621 in the direction in which the pair of engagement portions 624a are guided and the engagement groove 621a and the engagement portion 624a extend (in the example shown in FIG. 14, obliquely downward). Slide to move. Further, the decorative portion 625 fixed to the movable base 624 also slides with the movable base 624 to be in the state (drive position) shown in FIG.

  Thus, an effect in which the decorative portion 625 slides in the predetermined direction can be provided. Further, by providing a pair of engagement grooves 621a of the base member 621 with which the movable base 624 engages, the movable base 624 can be slidably moved more stably than when only one engagement groove 621a is provided. Becomes possible.

(Second movable character)
16 to 19 are diagrams illustrating the configuration of the second movable role of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. 16 and 19 are front views of the second movable role 710 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 16 shows a state (initial position) of the second movable role 710 before driving, and FIG. The state (drive position) of the accessory 710 after driving is shown. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the second movable role 710 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the second movable role object 710 as viewed from the rear side. 17 and 18, the first movable member cover 713c and the third movable member 713 of the first movable member 713 shown in FIG. 16 are described in order to explain the inside of the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715. 715 shows a state where the third movable member cover 715c is removed.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the second movable role 710 includes a base member 711 as a first member, a motor 712, a first movable member 713, a second movable member 714, a third movable member 715, And a fourth movable member 716.

  As shown in FIG. 18, a base member 711 is fixed to a rear box 700 (see FIG. 8), and a base body 711a as a first member body and a second transmission member rotatably supported by the base body 711a. And a motor drive transmission member 711c (see FIG. 16) that meshes with the base transmission member 711b.

  The base body 711a has a pair of left and right arc-shaped outer edges, and a pair of left and right first member tooth portions 711d as a first member tooth portion in which a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged along the outer edge. A movable member receiving portion 711e projecting from the base teeth portion 711d in the left-right direction, and supporting the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 in an initial state from below. Are formed. Due to the movable member receiving portion 711e, when the second movable role 710 is in the initial state (a state before driving or in a standby state), a load applied to a joint portion of each component in the movable role in which a large number of components are spread in the left-right direction. Thus, it is possible to prevent the failure due to the failure of the joint. As shown in FIG. 16, a base front panel 711f having a symmetrical outer shape is formed on the front side of the base body 711a. The base front panel 711f has an upper edge (an arc shape in the example shown in FIG. 16) and a lower edge (a straight line shape in the example shown in FIG. 16) having different shapes. Accordingly, a formed body having a variety of shapes having different shapes between the outer periphery and the inner periphery can be formed.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the base transmission member 711b includes four gears arranged in the left-right direction, and gears adjacent to each other mesh with each other. The motor drive transmission member 711c (see FIG. 16) is formed of gears, rotates by driving the motor 712, and meshes with any of the four gears forming the base transmission member 711b. The motor 712 is an example of a driving unit, is fixed to the base member 711, and is driven and controlled by a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the first movable member 713 has a right end side rotatably supported by the base member 711 and a first movable member main body 713a, and is rotatably supported by the first movable member main body 713a. It includes a first transmission member 713b and a first movable member cover 713c (see FIG. 16) fixed to the first movable member main body 713a and covering the first transmission member 713b.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the first movable member main body 713a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the right end side, and a plurality of radially projecting teeth are arranged along the outer edge. 713d. The first movable member tooth portion 713d meshes with a gear disposed at the left end of the base transmission member 711b. As a result, the motor drive transmission member 711c (see FIG. 16) is rotated by the driving of the motor 712, the base transmission member 711b meshing with the motor drive transmission member 711c is rotated, and the first movable member meshing with the base transmission member 711b is rotated. The first movable member main body 713a having the member tooth portion 713d rotates. That is, the first movable member main body 713a is rotated by the drive of the motor 712 via the motor drive transmission member 711c and the base transmission member 711b.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the first transmission member 713b is arranged in the left-right direction, and is configured by two gears that mesh with each other. The right end gear meshes with the left base tooth portion 711d of the base member 711.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the first movable member cover 713c is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the left half of the base front panel 711f.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the second movable member 714 is fixed to a second movable member main body 714a whose right end side is rotatably supported by the first movable member 713 and a front side of the second movable member main body 714a. A second movable member cover 714b.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the second movable member main body 714a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the right end side, and a plurality of radially projecting teeth arranged along the outer edge. 714c. The second movable member tooth portion 714c meshes with a gear disposed at the left end of the first transmission member 713b.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the second movable member cover 714b is formed in substantially the same shape as the shape of the left half of the base front panel 711f.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the third movable member 715 has a left end side rotatably supported by the base member 711 and a third movable member body 715a rotatably supported by the third movable member body 715a. It includes a third transmission member 715b and a third movable member cover 715c (see FIG. 16) fixed to the third movable member main body 715a and covering the third transmission member 715b.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the third movable member main body 715a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the left end side, and a plurality of radially projecting teeth arranged along the outer edge. 715d. The third movable member tooth portion 715d meshes with a gear disposed at the right end of the base transmission member 711b.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the third transmission member 715b is arranged in the left-right direction and is configured by two gears that mesh with each other. The left end gear meshes with the right base tooth portion 711d of the base member 711.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the third movable member cover 715c is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the right half of the base front panel 711f.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the fourth movable member 716 is fixed to a fourth movable member main body 716a whose left end is rotatably supported by the third movable member 715, and to the front side of the fourth movable member main body 716a. And a fourth movable member cover 716b.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the fourth movable member main body 716a has a circular arc-shaped outer edge on the left end side, and a plurality of radially projecting teeth arranged along the outer edge. 716c. The fourth movable member tooth portion 716c meshes with a gear disposed at the right end of the third transmission member 715b.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the fourth movable member cover 716b is formed in substantially the same shape as the shape of the right half of the base front panel 711f.

  Next, the operation of the second movable role object 710 will be described. When the motor 712 rotates in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise) under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) in the state before driving (initial position) shown in FIG. The drive transmission member 711c and the base transmission member 711b rotate. At this time, of the four gears of the base transmission member 711b, the leftmost gear rotates leftward, and the rightmost gear rotates rightward. Then, the first movable member 713 meshing with the gear at the left end of the base transmission member 711b rotates rightward, and the third movable member 715 meshing with the gear at the right end of the base transmission member 711b rotates leftward. That is, the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 rotate so as to approach each other.

  When the first movable member 713 rotates to the right, the right gear of the first transmission member 713b that meshes with the left base tooth portion 711d rotates to the right, and the left gear that meshes with the right gear changes to the left. To rotate. When the third movable member 715 rotates to the left, the left gear of the third transmission member 715b that meshes with the right base tooth portion 711d rotates to the left, and the right gear that meshes with this left gear changes to the right. To rotate.

  Then, the second movable member 714 meshing with the left gear of the first transmission member 713b rotates to the right. In addition, the fourth movable member 716 meshing with the right gear of the third transmission member 715b rotates to the left. That is, the second movable member 714 and the fourth movable member 716 rotate so as to approach each other. Then, the second movable role object 710 moves to the drive position where the second movable member 714 and the fourth movable member 716 are stopped after the ends of the second movable member 714 and the fourth movable member 716 are rotated to the position where they face each other, as shown in FIG. State.

  As described above, the right gear of the first transmission member 713b is installed on the first movable member 713, and the left gear of the third transmission member 715b is installed on the third movable member 715. When the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 move, together with these, the rotation axis (axis) of the right gear of the first transmission member 713b and the rotation axis of the left gear of the third transmission member 715b ( The axis also moves. At this time, the left base tooth portion 711d meshed with the right gear of the first transmission member 713b and the right base tooth portion 711d meshed with the left gear of the third transmission member 715b are part of the base member 711. And is fixed. Thereby, the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 move, and the gears of the first transmission member 713b and the third transmission member 715b rotate. That is, the movement of the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 generates a driving force for rotating the gears of the first transmission member 713b and the third transmission member 715b.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first movable member cover 713c of the first movable member 713, the second movable member cover 714b of the second movable member 714, the third movable member cover 715c of the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member. The fourth movable member cover 716b of the base member 716 is formed in substantially the same shape as a half portion of the base front panel 711f of the base member 711, so that the base front panel 711f, the first movable member cover 713c, and the A formed body having a predetermined shape (in the example shown in FIG. 19, a formed body having a hexagonal outer shape and a circular inner shape) by the second movable member cover 714b, the third movable member cover 715c, and the fourth movable member cover 716b. ) Are integrally formed.

  The second movable role 710 includes a first movable member cover 713c of the first movable member 713, a second movable member cover 714b of the second movable member 714, a third movable member cover 715c of the third movable member 715, and a third movable member cover 715c. When the fourth movable member cover 716b of the fourth movable member 716 moves to the drive position, the second movable member cover 714b of the second movable member 714, the fourth movable member cover 716b of the fourth movable member 716, As a result of the ends being close to each other, one component (in the example shown in FIG. 19, a component having a hexagonal outer shape and a circular inner shape) is completed. Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the second movable member cover 714b of the second movable member 714 and the end of the fourth movable member cover 716b of the fourth movable member 716 are close to each other means that the second movable member is closed. In the case where the ends of the cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b are in contact with each other, and when the second movable member cover 714b and the fourth movable member When the second movable member cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b are visually recognized, the second movable member cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b overlap in the front-rear direction, or the second movable member cover 714b And the fourth movable member cover 716b is close to (or in contact with) the front, rear, up, down, left, and right directions. In addition, when the second movable member cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b are close to each other, the second movable role object 710 has a hexagonal outer shape as a completed state as illustrated in FIG. Although it has a circular inner shape, the player can visually recognize the display area 13a (see FIG. 3) through the inside of the circular inner shape, and the circular inner shape and the display in the display area 13a are displayed. (For example, characters, characters, images, and the like are displayed in an area of the display area 13a that can be visually recognized through the inside of the circular inner shape), and the movable member of the player and the display area are displayed. Interest in the performed performance may be improved. In addition, the hexagonal outer shape and the circular inner shape described above are each treated as one component, and a display linked to the hexagonal outer shape is performed in the display area 13a, and a display linked to the circular inner shape is displayed. This can be performed in the display area 13a. In addition, the shape of the completed movable object 710 in the completed state is not limited to the hexagonal shape, and may be any shape as long as it forms a ring, a square, or another component.

  Further, when the motor 712 rotates in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise rotation) under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) in the driving position shown in FIG. Is rotated to the initial position shown in FIG.

  According to the second movable role 710 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following operation and effect can be obtained. According to the second movable role 710, the driving force for rotating the first movable member 713 is generated from the motor 712. On the other hand, the driving force for rotating the second movable member 714 is that the meshing position between the first transmission member 713b and the base tooth portion 711d of the base member 711 moves with the rotation of the first movable member main body 713a. Caused by

  As described above, the driving force for rotating the first movable member 713 and the second movable member 714 is not only generated simply by the motor 712 but also generated at different locations. For this reason, for example, the driving mode of the first movable member 713 can be determined by the motor 712, and the driving mode of the second movable member 714 can be determined by the base member 711. The members can be driven in different ways.

  Therefore, the first movable member 713 and the second movable member 714 are rotated by the driving forces generated at different locations from each other, while being linked. For this reason, it becomes possible to diversify the variation of the operation of the movable role composed of a plurality of movable members, to give each movable member an individual effect, and to increase the effect synergistically. Therefore, even when a plurality of movable members are linked, it is possible to enhance the individual effect of each movable member, and to enhance the interest of the player in the effect.

  In addition, the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 move to the driving position, so that the base member 711, the first movable member 713, and the second movable member 714 are moved. The third movable member 715 and the fourth movable member 716 integrally form a formed body having a predetermined shape. Accordingly, the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 can diversify the operation variation while interlocking with each other, and can move to the drive position. Thus, it is possible to form a predetermined shape to obtain a completed state. Therefore, each of the movable members can have an individual effect, and the effect can be enhanced synergistically, and the effect of the movable movable body as a whole can be improved.

  In addition, the end of the second movable member 714 supported by the first movable member 713 and the end of the fourth movable member 716 supported by the third movable member 715 are close to each other at the driving position. The base member 711, the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 form a completed state in which one component is formed. This makes it possible to individually rotate the plurality of movable members up to the driving position, and to form a continuous component at the driving position. Therefore, each of the movable members can have an individual effect, and the effect can be enhanced synergistically, and the effect as the movable movable body as a whole can be further improved.

(Third movable object of Modification 1)
FIG. 20 is a front view of a third movable role and a fourth movable role of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The third movable role is, when viewed from the front side, an upper left third movable role 720 disposed at the upper left, an upper right third movable role 730 disposed at the upper right, and a lower left third movable position disposed at the lower left. An accessory 740 and a lower right third movable accessory 750 disposed at the lower right are provided. FIG. 20 shows a state before driving the upper left third movable role 720, the upper right third movable role 730, the lower left third movable role 740, the lower right third movable role 750, and the fourth movable role 760 (standby). Position). FIGS. 21 to 23 are diagrams illustrating the configuration of the upper left third movable role of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the upper left third movable role 720 viewed from the rear side, and FIGS. 22 and 23 are rear views of the upper left third movable role 720. FIG. 22 shows a state before driving the upper left third movable role 720 (standby position), and FIG. 23 shows a state after driving the upper left third movable role 720 (drive position). 22 and 23, the illustration of the flat cable 728 is omitted for easy understanding, and only the outer shape of the arm member 723 is shown. Portions that cannot be seen from the side are indicated by dotted lines.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the upper left third movable role 720 includes a base member 721 as a first member, a motor 722, an arm member 723 as a second member, a first connecting member 724, and a rotating member. 725.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the base member 721 is fixed to the rear box 700 (see FIG. 8), and the motor 722 is attached. In addition, the base member 721 includes a base rotating portion 721a that rotates at a position separated by a predetermined distance from a rotation shaft 722a of the motor 722 when driven by the motor 722, and a plurality of base members 721 that project radially along the outer edge of the arc shape. And a position detection unit 721c that detects the state of the base rotation unit 721a at the standby position.

  The base rotation unit 721a has a detection piece 721a 'detected by the position detection unit 721c at the standby position. The position detection unit 721c is configured by, for example, a photo sensor, detects the detection piece 721a ′ of the base rotation unit 721a, and when the detection piece 721a ′ is detected, for example, the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. (3) A standby position signal indicating that the movable object is at the standby position is transmitted. Note that the position detection unit 721c is provided only at the position where the detection piece 721a 'is detected at the standby position, but may be provided at the position where the detection piece 721a' is detected at the driving position. When the position detecting section 721c provided at this position detects the detecting piece 721a ', for example, it sends a driving position signal indicating that the third movable role is at the driving position to the sub-control circuit 200 described later. Send.

  The motor 722 is an example of a driving unit, is attached to the base member 721, and is driven and controlled by a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later.

  The arm member 723 is formed in a substantially U shape, and is rotatably supported by the base member 721 so as to be rotatable around a predetermined position 723a near the apex of the substantially U shape. In addition, the arm member 723 extends from the base end in the direction of the predetermined position 723a on the base end side from the predetermined position 723a, and has an engagement groove 723b in which the base rotating portion 721a of the base member 721 is slidably engaged. On the distal end side from the position 723a, there is provided a magnet 723c for drawing a contact member 726b of a second connecting member 726 described later. Further, when the base rotating portion 721a is rotated by the drive of the motor 722, the arm member 723 is rotated around the predetermined position 723a by the base rotating portion 721a rotating while sliding in the engagement groove 723b. Rotate. That is, the arm member 723 is pivotally supported by the base member 721 so as to be rotatable around a predetermined position 723a, and is rotated by the drive of the motor 722.

  The first connection member 724 is rotatably supported by the arm member 723. In addition, the first connection member 724 is fixed to the first gear 724a and the first gear 724a that meshes with the base tooth portion 721b of the base member 721, and meshes with the second connection member 726 described later. A second gear 724b having the same axis. The first connecting member 724 is rotated by the rotation of the arm member 723 so that the abutment position at which the first coupling member 724 engages with the base tooth portion 721b of the base member 721 is moved. The second gear 724b is not limited to the configuration fixed to the first gear 724a, but may be rotatably fixed to any of the first connecting members 724, or may be formed integrally with the first gear 724a. Is also good.

  The rotating member 725 is rotatably supported by the arm member 723 and rotates around a predetermined position 723a, and also around a specific position 725a that is a predetermined distance away from the predetermined position 723a. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the rotating member 725 includes a second connecting member 726, an electric decoration 727 which is an example of a decorative member, and a flat cable 728 as a connecting member.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the second connection member 726 is rotatably supported by the arm member 723, and rotates around a predetermined position 723 a in accordance with the rotation of the arm member 723. It meshes with the member 724 and rotates around the specific position 725a with the rotation of the first connecting member 724.

  The second connecting member 726 includes a second connecting member main body 726a, an abutting member 726b, an accommodating portion 726c, and a locking portion 726d. The second connection member main body 726a is formed of a gear, and meshes with the second gear 724b of the first connection member 724. The contact member 726b is formed on the periphery of the second connecting member main body 726a, is formed of a ferromagnetic material, and is attracted to and joined to the magnet 723c near the magnet 723c of the arm member 723. In the second connection member 726, a magnet 723c is provided in place of the contact member 726b formed of a ferromagnetic material, and in the arm member 723, a contact member 726b formed of a ferromagnetic material is used instead of the magnet 723c. It may be provided. Further, the contact member 726b is not limited to a ferromagnetic substance, and may be formed of a magnet having a polarity attracting each other to the magnet 723c.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the second connecting member of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The housing portion 726c is formed in a tubular shape that stands upright on the back side of the second connection member main body 726a, and houses a tape measure 728a of a flat cable 728 described later. The locking portion 726d is a hole formed in the second connecting member main body 726a inside the housing portion 726c, and one end of a tape measure portion 728a described later housed inside the housing portion 726c moves from the back side to the front side. The tape measure can be penetrated, and one end of the tape measure 728a is locked.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the electric decoration 727 is attached to the front side of the second connection member 726, and includes a decoration member 727a and an electric decoration board 727b. The decorative member 727a is formed in a predetermined shape (for example, a shape obtained by dividing a donut shape into four parts. The illuminated board 727b is provided on the back side of the decorative member 727a, and a flat cable 728 described later is connected. Through the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, through the 728, the decorative member 727a can emit light in a predetermined mode.

  As shown in FIG. 21, one end of the flat cable 728 is connected to the illuminating body 727 via the second connecting member 726, and the other end is connected to a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) via various relay boards. )It is connected to the. As shown in FIG. 24, the flat cable 728 is wound around one end side around a specific position 725a, is formed into a tape measure shape so as to be elastically deformable, and is wound up (the direction in which the second connecting member 726 rotates). The tape measure 728a having an urging force is provided. The tape measure portion 728a is housed in the housing portion 726c of the second connecting member 726, and one end of the tape measure portion 728a extends to the front side from the locking portion 726d and is connected to the electric decoration board 727b (see FIG. 22).

  Next, the operation of the upper left third movable role 720 will be described. The sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) drives the motor 722 in a predetermined direction by rotating the motor 722 from the standby position shown in FIG. Rotate to the state shown in FIG. Further, the sub-control circuit 200 moves the upper left third movable object 720 from the driving position in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction until the detection piece 721a 'is detected by the position detection unit 721c and the standby position signal is transmitted. , And is rotated to the standby position.

  More specifically, when the motor 722 rotates in a predetermined direction under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) at the standby position where rotation starts, as shown in FIG. The moving part 721a rotates while sliding in the engagement groove 723b of the arm member 723, and accordingly, the arm member 723 rotates about the predetermined position 723a.

  Then, the first connecting member 724 that meshes with the base tooth portion 721b of the base member 721 also rotates. The rotation member 725 that meshes with the first connection member 724 rotates around the arm member 723 and the predetermined position 723a, and also rotates around the specific position 725a around the predetermined position 723a. Rotate in the opposite direction. As described above, the second connecting member 726 of the rotating member 725 rotates from the standby position where the rotation starts to the driving position where the rotation ends, in the rotation around the specific position 725a. The state shown in FIG. Note that the rotation member 725 may stop rotating immediately before the contact member 726b comes into contact with the magnet 723c of the arm member 723 at the drive position by the drive control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. Alternatively, the rotation may be stopped by bringing the contact member 726b into contact with the magnet 723c of the arm member 723 in the driving position. The contact member 726b can be urged by the magnet 723c in the direction of the drive position by magnetic force in the vicinity of the drive position. At this time, the tape measure portion 728a (see FIG. 24) of the flat cable 728 is elastically deformed in the winding direction inside the accommodating portion 726c of the second connecting member 726, so that the locking portion of the second connecting member 726 is formed. The rotating member 725 is urged toward the standby position via 726d. In the present embodiment, being energized by a magnetic force means that the members attract each other by the magnetic force or that the kinetic energy of the member is temporarily increased (or the kinetic energy is reduced) as a result of the attractive force acting on the member. Is reduced). Accordingly, when the distance between the members is close to the distance affected by the magnetic force, the movement speed of the members is increased (the reduction in the movement speed is reduced) as compared with the case where these members are not affected by the magnetic force. Case) and an increase in the acceleration of the member (including a case where the decrease in the acceleration is reduced) can be considered. In addition, for example, it is also considered that it is possible to prevent the member from moving in an unintended direction (eg, when moving from the standby position to the driving position and moving in the direction of the standby position) due to backlash. Can be.

  The upper right third movable role 730, the lower left third movable role 740, and the lower right third movable role 750 have a different configuration from the upper left third movable role 720, but have the same configuration and operate similarly. The description is omitted.

  According to the upper left third movable role 720 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following operational effects are obtained. According to the upper left third movable member 720, when the motor 722 is driven, the arm member 723 rotates, and the rotation of the arm member 723 causes the rotation member 725 to rotate from the standby position around the specific position 725a. Rotate to the drive position. For example, the arm member 723 and the like are provided with a magnet 723c with which the contact member 726b of the second connection member 726 contacts at the driving position, and the contact member 726b is formed of a ferromagnetic material. In this case, the magnet 723c and the contact member 726b keep a fixed distance, so that the contact member 726b is not biased. On the other hand, when the second connection member 726 rotates to the drive position, the magnet 723c and the contact member 726b approach or contact with each other, so that the accessory can be urged by the attraction (magnetic force).

  In this manner, by providing the second connecting member 726 for rotating the movable rotating member 725 with the contact member 726b urged by the magnetic force at the drive position where the rotation is completed, the rotating member 725 is provided. However, even if the accessory is driven alone, the state after the operation can be easily stabilized. Therefore, with the configuration in which the operating accessory can be fixed, the state of the accessory after the operation can be easily stabilized.

  In addition, the tape measure 728a of the flat cable 728 is elastically deformed in the winding direction inside the accommodating portion 726c of the second connecting member 726, and the elastic force of the flat cable 728 causes the second connecting member via the engaging portion 726d. By urging the 726 in the direction of the standby position, the movable speed of the second connecting member 726 can be increased, and the second connecting member 726 is used as the storage position of the flat cable 728, so that the saving is possible. Space can be achieved.

  In the rotating member 725, a tape measure 728a is formed on the flat cable 728 connected to the electric decoration 727 attached to the second connecting member 726, and one end of the tape measure 728a is connected to the second connecting member 726. The second connecting member 726 is stopped by urging the second connecting member 726 in the direction of the standby position via the locking portion 726d locked by the urging force in the winding direction inside the housing portion 726c. Then, it is possible to reduce the fine movement of the rotating member 725 caused by the backlash.

  Further, when the second connecting member 726 rotates to the driving position, the magnet 723c and the contact member 726b approach or come into contact with each other to urge the accessory by attractive force (magnetic force). Even without providing the position detection sensor for detecting the state of the object, for example, even when the motor 722 rotates excessively or insufficiently, the accessory can be arranged at an appropriate driving position.

(Third movable character of Modification 2)
Next, a second modification of the first embodiment will be described. Modification 2 differs from Modification 1 in the configuration of the third movable role. In the following description of Modification 2, the same components as in Modification 1 will be assigned the same reference numerals as necessary, and the description thereof will be simplified or omitted. The third movable role of Modification 2 differs from the third movable role of Modification 1 in the configuration of the arm member, and further includes a third connecting member. The third movable role of the second modification is, similarly to the third movable role of the first modification, an upper left third movable role, an upper right third movable role, a lower left third movable role, and a lower right third movable role. Although three movable roles are provided, they have the same configuration and operate in the same manner, although the directions are different from each other. Therefore, the description is omitted, and only the upper left third movable role is described.

  FIGS. 25 to 27 are diagrams illustrating the configuration of the upper left third movable member of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. 25 to 27 are front views of the upper left third movable role 820. FIG. FIG. 25 shows a state before driving the upper left third movable part 820 (standby position), FIG. 26 shows a state where the upper left third movable part 820 is being driven (intermediate position), and FIG. Indicates a state (drive position) of the upper left third movable object 820 after driving. 25 to 27, the second arm member 832 omits the front side cover to show the outer frame for easy understanding, and the first arm member 831 is seen from the front side by the base member 721. The portion without the blank is indicated by a dotted line, and only the outer shape of the illuminated body 727, which is an example of the decorative member, is indicated by a dotted line.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the upper left third movable member 820 includes a base member 721 as a first member, a motor 722, an arm member 830 as a second member, a first connecting member 724, and a rotating member. 725 and a third connection member 840. Since the base member 721, the motor 722, the first connecting member 724, and the rotating member 725 have the same configuration as in the first modification, detailed description will be omitted.

  The arm member 830 includes a first arm member 831 as a first arm member and a second arm member 832 as a second arm member. The first arm member 831 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and is rotatably supported by the base member 721 so as to be rotatable around a predetermined position 723a near the apex of the substantially rectangular shape. Further, the first arm member 831 extends from the base end toward the predetermined position 723a on the base end side from the predetermined position 723a, and engages with the engagement groove 723b in which the base rotating portion 721a of the base member 721 is slidably engaged. Prepare. In addition, the first arm member 831 is open at the distal end side from the predetermined position 723a, and slidably holds the second arm member 832 that slides in a direction protruding from the distal end. In addition, when the base rotating portion 721a is rotated by the drive of the motor 722, the first arm member 831 rotates the base rotating portion 721a while sliding in the engagement groove 723b, thereby moving the predetermined position 723a. Rotate to the center. That is, the arm member 830 is pivotally supported by the base member 721 so as to be rotatable around a predetermined position 723a, and is rotated by the drive of the motor 722.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an arm member of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 28A is a sectional view taken along the line AA 'in FIG. 25, and FIG. 28B is a sectional view taken along the line BB' in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the first arm member 831 extends in a direction in which a second arm member 832 described later slides, and an end of the rotation shaft 726 e of the second connecting member 726 that slides with the second arm member 832. And a slide groove 831a that slidably engages with the slide groove 831a. The slide groove 831a has a length substantially the same dimension as a slidable distance of the second arm member 832, and a height substantially the same dimension as the diameter of the rotation shaft 726e of the second connection member 726. Is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the second arm member 832 is slidably engaged with the first arm member 831 and pivotally supports the second connecting member 726 of the rotating member 725. In addition, the second arm member 832 includes a magnet 723c that draws the contact member 726b of the second connection member 726, and a fourth connection member 835 that can mesh with a third connection member 840 described below.

  The fourth connecting member 835 is opposed to the end surface of the third connecting member 840, and a plurality of teeth capable of meshing with the surface formed in the direction in which the second arm member 832 slides are engaged with the end surface of the third connecting member 840. The teeth are formed.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a third connecting member of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The third connecting member 840 is attached to the front side of the second gear 724b of the first connecting member 724, and rotates with the rotation of the first connecting member 724. The third connecting member 840 has a plurality of teeth formed on a disk-shaped end surface, and a meshing region 841 that meshes with the fourth connecting member 835, and the fourth connecting member 835 has no teeth formed on the disk-shaped end surface. And a non-contact area 842 that is not in contact with.

  Next, the operation of the upper left third movable role 820 will be described. When the motor 722 rotates in a predetermined direction under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) in the standby position where rotation starts, as shown in FIG. 25, the arm member 830 moves to the predetermined position. It rotates around the position 723a.

  Then, the first connecting member 724 that meshes with the base tooth portion 721b of the base member 721 also rotates. At this time, the third connection member 840 attached to the first connection member 724 also rotates. However, since the non-contact area 842 is close to the fourth connection member 835 of the second arm member 832, the third connection member 840 is not. The member 840 and the fourth connection member 835 do not mesh with each other. The rotation member 725 meshing with the first connection member 724 rotates around the arm member 830 and the predetermined position 723a, and also rotates around the specific position 725a around the predetermined position 723a. Rotate in the opposite direction. As described above, the second connecting member 726 of the rotating member 725 rotates from the standby position where the rotation starts to the intermediate position where the rotation ends in the rotation around the specific position 725a. The state shown in FIG. When the contact member 726b contacts the magnet 723c of the second arm member 832 at this intermediate position, the rotation of the rotation member 725 stops around the specific position 725a. The rotation of the rotating member 725 is stopped by the drive control by a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later, immediately before the contact member 726b contacts the magnet 723c of the second arm member 832 at the intermediate position. Alternatively, the rotation may be stopped by the contact member 726b contacting the magnet 723c of the second arm member 832 at the intermediate position.

  When the upper left third movable member 820 is in the state shown in FIG. 26, the meshing region 841 of the third connecting member 840 approaches the fourth connecting member 835 of the second arm member 832, and the third connecting member 840 The fourth connection member 835 meshes with the arm 830, and the arm member 830 rotates about the predetermined position 723a.

  Then, the third connection member 840 rotates together with the first connection member 724 while meshing with the fourth connection member 835, and slides the second arm member 832 in a direction protruding from the distal end of the first arm member 831. The state shown in FIG. 27 is obtained. That is, after the rotation member 725 including the electric decoration 727 is rotated by the rotation of the second connection member 726 from the standby position, the second arm member 832 engages the third connection member 840 with the fourth connection member 835. Then, by the rotation of the third connection member 840, the first arm member 831 slides in the direction extending from the distal end side. In addition, the illuminated body 727 is slid in a direction in which the second arm member 832 extends from the distal end side of the first arm member 831, so that the illuminated body 727 is in contact with another member (for example, a decorative member of the upper right third movable member). Contact is possible.

  According to the upper left third movable role 820 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following operational effects can be obtained. According to the upper left third movable member 820, after the electric decoration 727 is rotated from the standby position by the rotation of the second connecting member 726, the third connecting member 840 is connected to the fourth connecting member of the second arm member 832. When the first arm member 831 rotates, the first connection member 724 and the third connection member 840 rotate by the rotation of the first arm member 831, and the second arm member 832 slides in a direction in which the second arm member 832 extends. It is possible to make contact. In this way, after performing the effect of rotating the illuminated body 727, the illuminated body 727 can be slid to be able to come into contact with other members, for example, the illuminated body 727 is quickly rotated, It is possible to make contact with other members slowly. Therefore, breakage of the movable accessory due to contact with other members can be avoided.

Also, a plurality of movable roles including such an illuminated body are provided (the upper left third movable role, the upper right third movable role, the lower left third movable role, and the lower right third movable role), and these are linked. Since the plurality of movable members are respectively rotated, the illuminated bodies are moved in the direction in which the second arm members extend so that the illuminated bodies can be brought into contact with each other. Thereby, when the plurality of electric decorations that do not form one design when rotating are moved in the extending direction of each second arm member, they contact each other to form one design. Since it is possible to perform an effect, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the movement of the illuminated body and to improve the effect expression by the illuminated body.
Therefore, when the movable role is driven and brought into contact with another member, it is possible to improve the effect of the movable role while avoiding damage to the movable role due to the contact.

  Further, when the second arm member 832 slides, the end of the rotation shaft 726e of the second connecting member 726 slides while engaging with the slide groove 831a, so that the slide groove serves as a guide, and the second connection is performed. The swing of the electric decoration 727 attached to the member 726 is suppressed, and the electric decoration 727 can be moved smoothly.

(4th movable character)
FIGS. 30 and 31 are diagrams illustrating the configuration of the fourth movable role of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 are rear views of the fourth movable accessory 760. FIG. 30 shows a state before driving the fourth movable auditory component 760 (standby position), and FIG. 31 shows a state after driving of the fourth movable auditory component 760 (driving position).

  As shown in FIG. 30, the fourth movable accessory 760 includes a base member 761, a motor 762, a first gear 763, a second gear 764, a relay member 765, an arm member 766, a decoration portion 767, , Is provided.

  The base member 761 is attached to the rear box 700 (see FIG. 8). The motor 762 is fixed to the front side of the base member 761, and is driven and controlled by a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. The first gear 763 is disposed on the back side of the base member 761 and rotates by driving of the motor 762. The second gear 764 is arranged on the back side of the base member 761 and meshes with the first gear 763. One end of the relay member 765 is rotatably mounted near the periphery of the second gear 764, and the other end is rotatably mounted on the arm member 766.

  The arm member 766 is formed in a substantially U-shape, and is rotatably supported by the base member 761 around a predetermined position 766a near the apex of the substantially U-shape. Further, the arm member 766 has a base end side from a predetermined position 766a rotatably attached to the other end of the relay member 765, and a decorative portion 767 attached to a distal end side from the predetermined position 723a.

  The decorative portion 767 is attached to the distal end side of the arm member 766 and is formed in a predetermined shape (for example, a circular shape). For example, a character or a character is displayed or an LED board is provided. By the control of 200 (see FIG. 33), light can be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode. Further, the decoration unit 767 includes a motor, and under the control of the sub control circuit 200, rotates the decoration unit 767, or further provides another member, and rotates this different member on the front side of the decoration unit 767. Can also.

  Next, the operation of the fourth movable role 760 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 30 (standby position), when the first gear 763 is rotated by the drive of the motor 762 in the state (standby position) shown in FIG. The power is transmitted to the second gear 764 meshing with the first gear 763. Then, one end of the relay member 765 rotatably mounted near the periphery of the second gear 764 rotates, and the arm member 766 mounted on the other end of the relay member 765 also rotates about the predetermined position 766a. . As a result, the decorative portion 767 attached to the distal end side of the arm member 766 also rotates, and the state shown in FIG. 32 (drive position) is reached.

  This makes it possible to produce an effect in which the decorative portion 767 is rotated in a predetermined direction. Further, the arm member 766 is rotated by a relay member 765 that is rotatably attached to the vicinity of the periphery of the second gear 764 that rotates by obtaining a driving force. Accordingly, for example, when there is no space in the arm member 766 to provide a gear that meshes with the second gear 764 that rotates by obtaining a driving force, or when there is another member between the arm member 766 and the second gear 764, Even when the gear member 764 cannot be engaged, the arm member 766 can be rotated.

  FIG. 32 is a front view of a third movable role and a fourth movable role of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 32 shows a state after driving of the upper left third movable role 720, the upper right third movable role 730, the lower left third movable role 740, the lower right third movable role 750, and the fourth movable role 760 (driving). Position). The upper left third movable role 720, the upper right third movable role 730, the lower left third movable role 740, the lower right third movable role 750, and the fourth movable role 760 are sub-controlled from the state shown in FIG. Drive is performed by drive control of the circuit 200 (see FIG. 33), and the state shown in FIG. 32 is obtained.

  The upper left third movable role 720, the upper right third movable role 730, the lower left third movable role 740, and the lower right third movable role 750 are each formed into a shape obtained by dividing the donut shape into four at the driving position. The decorative member 727a of the upper left third movable role 720, the decorative member 737a of the upper right third movable role 730, the decorative member 747a of the lower left third movable role 740, and the decorative member 757a of the lower right third movable role 750 are included. The abutment member is in contact with or close to the adjacent decorative members to integrally form a donut-shaped formed body. In addition, the fourth movable role 760 descends while rotating from above the circular decorative portion 767, and is disposed at the center of the formed body having a donut shape. As described above, by driving a plurality of movable roles and, in a state after driving (drive position), disposing them integrally or in relation to each other, the performance can be improved.

[Circuit configuration of pachinko machines]
Next, configurations of various circuits included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Embodiment 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 70 for controlling a game operation, a sub-control circuit 200 for controlling a staging operation in accordance with the progress of the game, and And a payout control circuit 300 that controls payout.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 70 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 71, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 72, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 73. The main control circuit 70 includes a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, and a serial communication IC (Integrated Circuit) 76. As described above, in the first embodiment, a lottery process of a special symbol is performed at the time of winning the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45. This process is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also functions as a means (lottery means) for performing a lottery process for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to an advantageous state for the player.

  The main CPU 71 is connected to a main ROM 72, a main RAM 73, a reset clock pulse generating circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, a serial communication IC 76, and the like. The main ROM 72 stores various programs (see FIGS. 44 to 62) for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 71, various data tables (see FIGS. 37 and 38), and the like.

  The main CPU 71 executes various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 72. The main RAM 73 acts as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 71 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values required by the main CPU 71 for various processes.

  In the first embodiment, the main RAM 73 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 71. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that is readable and writable may be used as the temporary storage area. .

  The reset clock pulse generating circuit 74 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process described later. The initial reset circuit 75 generates a reset signal when power is turned on. Then, the serial communication IC 76 transmits a command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, various devices that operate according to the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70 are connected to the main control circuit 70.

  Specifically, the main control circuit 70 is connected with a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special symbol hold display device 65. Is done.

  Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on an output signal sent from the main control circuit 70. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol display device 61 controls the operation of variably displaying the special symbol in the special symbol game based on the output signal. Do.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 is connected to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, the first winning device solenoid 54b, the second winning opening solenoid 53b, and the V winning opening solenoid 57b. Then, the main control circuit 70 controls the drive of the ordinary electric accessory 46a to bring the pair of wing-shaped members of the ordinary electric accessory 46 into an open state or a closed state.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 controls the driving of the first special winning opening solenoid 54b and the second special winning opening solenoid 53b, respectively, so as to bring the first special winning device 54 and the second special winning device 53 into an open state or a closed state. I do.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 controls the drive of the V winning opening solenoid 57b so as to make the V winning opening 57 open or closed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various switches and receives output signals from the various switches. Specifically, the main control circuit 70 includes count switches 53c and 54c, general winning ball switches 51a and 52a, passing ball switch 43a, first starting port winning ball switch 44a and second starting port winning ball switch 45a, V The winning opening winning ball switch 57c and the backup clear switch 121 are connected.

  The count switch 54c counts the game balls that have won the first big winning device 54, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The count switch 53c counts game balls that have won the second big winning device 53, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70.

  The general winning ball switch 51a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball has won the general winning opening 51, and the general winning ball switch 52a has a game ball winning the general winning opening 52. In this case, a predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 70.

  The passing ball switch 43a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the ball passing detector 43. The first starting port winning ball switch 44a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball has won the first starting port 44.

  The second starting port winning ball switch 45a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball has won the second starting port 45. Further, the backup clear switch 121 outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 when the backup data is cleared in response to an operation of a game arcade manager or the like at the time of a power failure or the like. .

  Further, a payout control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 70. Here, the main control circuit 70 determines the number of prize balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out via the prize ball case unit 170 described later, on condition that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied.

  The main control circuit 70 for determining the number of prize balls constitutes a payout amount determination unit. The predetermined payout condition is that the game balls have won the various starting ports and the various winning ports described above.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 transmits information including the number of winning balls determined as described above to the payout control circuit 300 as a winning ball control command. Therefore, the main control circuit 70 constitutes a signal transmission unit.

[Payout control circuit]
The payout control circuit 300 includes a payout CPU 301, a ROM 302, and a RAM 303. The ROM 302 stores, for example, various programs (see FIGS. 83 to 90) for controlling the payout operation of the game balls by the winning ball case unit 170.

  The payout CPU 301 executes various processes according to a program stored in the ROM 302. The RAM 303 acts as a temporary storage area when the payout CPU 301 executes various processes, and stores values of various flags and variables required by the payout CPU 301 for various processes.

  In the first embodiment, the RAM 303 is used as a temporary storage area of the payout CPU 301. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that is readable and writable may be used as the temporary storage area.

  The payout control circuit 300 is connected to a prize ball case unit 170 for paying out game balls. Specifically, the first and second 15-ball security switches 172A and 172B, the payout motor 174, and the first and second count switches 181A and 181B are connected to the payout control circuit 300.

  The first and second 15-ball security switches 172A and 172B detect game balls replenished in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B, and output a predetermined output signal indicating the result. Output to 300.

  The payout motor 174 is driven according to a control signal from the payout CPU 301. The first and second counting switches 181A and 181B detect gaming balls paid out to the first and second payout passages 180A and 180B by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, respectively, and indicate the results. A predetermined output signal is output to the payout control circuit 300.

  Further, to the payout control circuit 300, a payout state notification display device 178 and a lower plate full switch 179 are connected. As will be described in detail later, the payout state notification display device 178 is a display device for notifying the type of the abnormality when an abnormality has occurred with respect to the payout of game balls, and constitutes a notification unit.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the payout state notification display device 178 includes a seven-segment display, and is provided at, for example, a predetermined position on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that only the manager of the hall can visually recognize the display.

  The lower plate full switch 179 detects when the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 are full, and outputs the result to the payout control circuit 300. When a signal indicating that the lower plate is full is input from the lower plate full switch 179, the payout control circuit 300 performs notification through the payout state notification display device 178 and sends the lower control signal to the main control circuit 70. A signal indicating that the tank is full is output.

  As a result, the main control circuit 70 transmits the effect control command to the sub control circuit 200, and the lower plate 22 is in the full state through the speaker 11, the lamp 18, the LED and the liquid crystal display device 13 by the sub control circuit 200. Notify.

  Further, to the payout control circuit 300, a launching device 15 for launching a game ball, an external terminal plate 140, and a card unit 150 are connected. A data display 141 is connected to the external terminal plate 140, and a lending operation unit 151 is connected to the card unit 150.

  Here, the card unit 150 determines the number of loaned balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out via the request case unit 170 described below, on condition that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The card unit 150 that determines the number of balls to be loaned constitutes a payout amount determination unit. The predetermined payout condition is that the above-described lending operation unit 151 has been operated.

  The payout control circuit 300 supplies electric power to the solenoid actuator of the firing device 15 according to the rotation angle when the firing handle 25 is gripped by the player and rotated clockwise. Thereby, the launching device 15 controls to launch the game ball.

  The external terminal board 140 is used to transmit data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in a hall (game hall). The data display 141 is installed, for example, as an accessory to a hall above the pachinko gaming machine 1 and has a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of hits.

  When operated by the player, the lending operation section 151 outputs a signal requesting lending of a game ball to the card unit 150. When the card unit 150 receives a signal requesting lending of game balls from the lending operation unit 151, the card unit 150 transmits a lending ball control signal including information on the determined number of lending balls to the payout control circuit 300. Therefore, the card unit 150 constitutes a signal transmission unit.

  The payout control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and the lending ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 150, and transmits a predetermined signal to the prize ball case unit 170.

  Thereby, the prize ball case unit 170 pays out game balls. The payout control circuit 300 that receives the prize ball control command and the loan ball control signal as described above constitutes a signal receiving unit.

  In the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 includes first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B, and first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B. The first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B and the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B are provided as functions of the payout CPU 301.

  The first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B calculate the initial value (“1950 times” in the first embodiment) from the secured ball monitoring initial setting process (see S309 and S312 in FIG. 83) described later. While the first and second 15-ball security switches 172A and 172B detect game balls, the counter is decremented by “1” every time a predetermined time (“1 ms” in the first embodiment) elapses.

  In the first embodiment, a counter for counting down is used as the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B, but a counter for counting up may be used.

  Therefore, the payout CPU 301 requires the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B to start paying out game balls and the first and second 15-ball security switches 172A and 172B to detect game balls. The initial value ("1950 times" in the first embodiment) is changed to "1950" each time a predetermined time ("1 ms" in the first embodiment) elapses, that is, each time a system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) described later is performed. "1" is subtracted, that is, updated.

  The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a second update unit. The values updated by the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B can be set to values within a narrower range than values updated by first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B described later. At the same time, it corresponds to the time during which the first and second 15-ball security switches 172A and 172B detect a game ball, and constitutes a second value.

  The first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B determine a predetermined value from the initial value (“2000 ms” in the first embodiment) set in the secured ball monitoring initial setting process (see S309 and S312 in FIG. 83) described later. The timer is decremented by “1” every time the time (“1 ms” in the first embodiment) elapses. In the first embodiment, the countdown timer is used as the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B, but a countup timer may be used.

  Therefore, the payout CPU 301 sets the initial value (“2000 ms” in the first embodiment) to a predetermined time (“1” in the first embodiment) on the condition that the payout of the game balls is started by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B. Every 1 ms ”, that is, every time a system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) described later is performed,“ 1 ”is subtracted, that is, updated.

  Here, the initial value ("2000 ms" in the first embodiment) set in the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B is the time when it is assumed that the security of 15 game balls is completed, that is, The time is set to a time sufficient to pay out a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of game balls from the ball tank 161. The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a first update unit. The values updated by the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B constitute a first value.

[Sub-control circuit]
The sub control circuit 200 is connected to the serial communication IC 76 of the main control circuit 70. The sub control circuit 200 controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 13, the control of the sound generated from the speaker 11, the control of the lamp 18 including the decorative lamp, and the like in response to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70. I do.

  That is, the sub-control circuit 200 executes various effects according to the progress of the game based on the command from the main control circuit 70. In the first embodiment, a signal cannot be supplied from the sub-control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 70. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a signal can be transmitted from the sub-control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 70. May be provided.

  The sub-control circuit 200 is connected to the effect button 23, and is also connected to an effect button switch 23a that outputs a signal by operating the effect button 23. Thereby, the sub-control circuit 200 can also perform an effect control such as a mini game using the effect button 23.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, a sound control circuit 206, and a lamp control circuit 207. The sub CPU 201 is connected to a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, an audio control circuit 206, and a lamp control circuit 207.

  The program ROM 202 stores various programs (see FIGS. 63 to 80) for controlling the staging operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, and various data tables (see FIGS. 39 to 43). Then, the sub CPU 201 executes various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the entire sub control circuit 200 according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

  In the first embodiment, the main ROM 72 and the program ROM 202 are applied as storage means for storing programs and various tables, but the present invention is not limited to this. As such a storage unit, a storage medium of another mode may be used as long as it is a storage medium readable by a computer having a control unit. For example, a storage medium such as a hard disk device, a CDROM and a DVD-ROM, and a ROM cartridge may be used. A medium may be applied.

  Further, each of the programs may be recorded on a separate storage medium. Further, the program may be recorded in a recording medium in advance, or may be downloaded from the outside after power-on, and may be recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like.

  The work RAM 203 acts as a temporary storage area when the sub CPU 201 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values necessary for the sub CPU 201 for various processes. In the first embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium that can be read and written may be used as the temporary storage area.

  The display control circuit 205 controls the liquid crystal display device 13 to display an image related to the effect. Although not shown, the display control circuit 205 includes an image data processor (hereinafter, referred to as a VDP (Video Display Processor)), an image data ROM, a frame buffer, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter, and the like.

  The image data ROM stores data for generating various image data. The frame buffer temporarily stores image data. The D / A converter converts image data (digital electric signal) into an image signal (analog electric signal).

The display control circuit 205 performs various processes for displaying an image on the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the display control circuit 205 temporarily stores image data such as decorative design image data, decorative image data, background image data, and performance image data representing a decorative design (design effect design) based on an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. And store it in the frame buffer.

  Then, the display control circuit 205 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 13 at a predetermined timing. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The sound control circuit 206 includes a sound source IC for controlling sound, a sound data ROM for storing various sound data, an amplifier for amplifying a sound signal (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

  The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 11. The sound source IC selects one audio data from a plurality of audio data stored in the audio data ROM based on an audio generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  Then, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the read audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies it to the AMP. Further, the AMP amplifies the audio signal and generates a sound from the speaker 11.

  The lamp control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a lamp data ROM storing a plurality of types of lamp lighting patterns, and the like. The drive circuit selects one lamp lighting pattern from a plurality of lamp lighting patterns stored in the lamp data ROM based on a lamp lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  Then, the selected lamp lighting pattern is read from the lamp data ROM, the read audio data is converted into a predetermined lamp control signal, and the lamp 18 including the decorative lamp is turned on and off.

[Type of gaming state]
First, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a view illustrating an example of a table indicating basic specifications of a pachinko gaming machine.

  In the first embodiment, the types of game states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 include a “big hit game state”, a “small hit game state”, and a “time reduction game state”.

  The “big hit game state” is a game state in which the “big hit game” is performed, and is a game state in which the shutter 54 a of the first big winning device 54 opens and closes. That is, the "big hit game" is a game in which the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 performs the opening / closing operation and a plurality of round games are performed. The "big hit game" is performed by winning a "big hit" in a lottery performed by entering the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45.

  When a game ball enters the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45, a "big hit" is won with a probability of 1/200, respectively (see FIG. 34 (a)). When the "big hit" is won, the "big hit gaming state" is set. As shown in FIG. 34 (c), when a "big hit" is won by entering the first starting port 44, twelve special maps (1) -1 to (1) -12 are obtained. Are classified into any of the special map types. Further, the special figure type when the "big hit" is won by entering the second starting port 45 is only the special figure (2) -1.

  The hit content of Toku-zu (1) -1 and Toku-zu (1) -2 is "short time with payout". The "big hit game" in this case has five round games. That is, an opening / closing operation in which the shutter 54a is opened five times is performed. The opening time of the shutter 54a for one time is 27.996 seconds (see FIG. 34D). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, if it is detected that ten gaming balls have entered the first big winning device 54, the shutter 54a is closed (see FIG. 34A). The payout of 15 game balls entering the first big winning device 54 is made per one.

  The expected value of Tokuzu (1) -1 is 1%. That is, the probability that the hit type is Tokuzu (1) -1 when the big hit game is determined is 1%. The expected value of Toku-zu (1) -2 is 44%. In addition, after the transition from the normal game, after the “big hit game” of the special map (1) -1 and the special map (1) -2 is performed, the “time reduction game” is performed. Here, the number of times the “time reduction game” is performed is a maximum of 100 times. Although the details will be described later, the number of times that the “time saving game” is performed corresponds to the number of times that the variable display of the special symbol is executed. It should be noted that the presence or absence of the "time reduction game" after the "big hit game" which has not shifted from the "normal game" will be described later.

  The hit content of the special maps (1) -3 to (1) -7 is "time saving without payout". The "big hit game" in this case has five round games. That is, an opening / closing operation in which the shutter 54a is opened five times is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), since the opening time of one time of the shutter 54a is 0.102 seconds and the opening time is short, in this "big hit game", a game ball is placed in the first big winning device 54. Possibility of entering the ball is low. Therefore, in this "big hit game", there is a low possibility that the game ball enters the first big winning device 54, and the game ball is hardly paid out.

  The expected value of each of the special maps (1) -3 to (1) -7 is 1%. In addition, after the transition from the normal game, after the “big hit game” of the special figure (1) -3 to the special figure (1) -7 is performed, the “time reduction game” is performed. Here, the number of times the “time reduction game” is performed is a maximum of 100 times.

  In addition, the hit contents of the special maps (1) -8 to (1) -12 are "normal without payout". The "big hit game" in this case has five round games. That is, an opening / closing operation in which the shutter 54a is opened five times is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), since the opening time of one time of the shutter 54a is 0.102 seconds and the opening time is short, in this "big hit game", a game ball is placed in the first big winning device 54. Possibility of entering the ball is low. Therefore, in this "big hit game", there is a low possibility that the game ball enters the first big winning device 54, and the game ball is hardly paid out.

  The expected value of each of Toku-zu (1) -8 to Toku-zu (1) -11 is 12%, and the expected value of Toku-zu (1) -12 is 2%. In addition, after the transition from the normal game, after the “big hit game” of the special map (1) -8 to the special map (1) -12 is performed, the “time reduction game” is not performed, and the “normal game state” is set. Become.

  The hit content of Toku-zu (2) -1 is "There is a payout". The "big hit game" in this case has five round games. That is, an opening / closing operation in which the shutter 54a is opened five times is performed. The opening time of the shutter 54a for one time is 27.996 seconds. However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, if it is detected that ten gaming balls have entered the first big winning device 54, the shutter 54a is closed (see FIG. 34A). The payout of 15 game balls entering the first big winning device 54 is made per one.

  The expected value of Toku-zu (2) -1 is 100%. That is, when a big hit game is determined by entering the second starting port 45, it is always the special map (2) -1. After the “big hit game” of the special map (2) -1 is performed, the “time reduction game” is performed. Here, the number of times the “time reduction game” is performed is a maximum of 100 times.

  The “small hitting game state” is a gaming state in which the “small hitting game” is performed, and is a game state in which the blade member 53a of the second big winning device 53 performs an opening / closing operation. The “small hit game” is performed by winning the “small hit” by a lottery performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 45. As described above, even if the ball enters the first starting port 44, no "small hit" is won.

  When a game ball enters the second starting port 45, a "small hit" is won with a probability of 199/200 (see FIG. 34 (a)). When the "small hit" is won, the "small hit game state" is set. In addition, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), when a "small hit" is won by entering the second starting port 45, the small hit (2) -1 to the small hit (2) -4 are selected. It is assigned to any of the special figure types.

  The hit content of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2 is "16R per V". In this case, the “small hit game” performs an opening / closing operation in which the blade member 53a is opened three times. Then, the opening time per one time of the blade member 53a is 1.5 seconds for the small hit (2) -1 and 1.2 seconds for the small hit (2) -2 (see FIG. 34D). ). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, when it is detected that four gaming balls have entered the second big winning device 53, the blade member 53a is closed and does not open (FIG. 34 (a)). reference). In addition, when the second large winning device 53 detects that four game balls have entered, the blade member 53a is closed and does not open even if the number of times the blade member 53a is opened is not three times. . The payout of 15 game balls entering the second big winning device 53 is made per one.

  In addition, in the "small hit game" of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 57 of the second big winning device 53, the result is "V hit", Sixteen rounds of "big hit games" are performed. However, in this case, the opening / closing operation of the blade member 53a, which triggered the ball to enter the V winning opening 57, is the first round, so the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 after the ball entering the V winning opening 57. Perform an opening and closing operation to open 15 times. In this manner, a game started by entering the V winning opening 57 is also referred to as a "big hit game". In this “big hit game”, the opening time of the shutter 54a per one time is 27.996 seconds. However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, if it is detected that ten game balls have entered the first big winning device 54, the shutter 54a is closed. Then, the payout of 15 game balls per ball to the first big winning device 54 is made.

  The expected value of the small hit (2) -1 is 16%. That is, when the small hit game is determined, the probability of being the small hit (2) -1 is 16%. The expected value of the small hit (2) -2 is 17%. After the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2 "big hit game" are performed, the "time reduction game" is performed. Here, the number of times the “time reduction game” is performed is a maximum of 100 times. In some cases, the "time saving game" may not be performed after the "big hit game" of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2, which will be described later.

  The hit content of the small hits (2) -3 and (2) -4 is "2R per V". In this case, the “small hit game” performs an opening / closing operation in which the blade member 53a is opened three times. The opening time of the blade member 53a per one time is 1.5 seconds for the small hit (2) -3 and 1.2 seconds for the small hit (2) -4 (see FIG. 34D). ). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, when it is detected that four gaming balls have entered the second big winning device 53, the blade member 53a is closed and does not open (FIG. 34 (a)). reference). The payout of 15 game balls entering the second big winning device 53 is made per one.

  In the case of the small hits (2) -3 and the small hits (2) -4, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 57 of the second big winning device 53 in the "small hit game", the result is "V hit". Two rounds of "big hit games" are performed. However, in this case, since the ball entering the V winning opening 57 is the first round, the opening and closing operation of opening the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 once after entering the V winning opening 57 is performed. In this manner, a game started by entering the V winning opening 57 is also referred to as a "big hit game". This "big hit game" has a different number of rounds from the "big hit game" of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2, but the opening time and the number of payouts are the same.

  The expected value of the small hit (2) -3 is 33%. The expected value of the small hit (2) -4 is 34%. After the “big hit game” of the small hit (2) -3 and the small hit (2) -4, the “time reduction game” is performed. Here, the number of times the “time reduction game” is performed is a maximum of 100 times.

The "time reduction game state" is a game state in which the "time reduction game" is performed, and is a game state in which the probability of winning a normal symbol is relatively high. In other words, the “time-saving gaming state” is a gaming state in which the ordinary electric accessory 46 provided in the second starting port 45 is likely to be in an open state (a gaming state in which the second starting port winning is likely to occur), and for the player. This is an advantageous game state. The “time saving game state” ends when the special symbols are displayed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment), when the “win” is achieved, or when the “big hit” is won. .
In the "time saving game state", not only the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is relatively high, but also the lottery time in the ordinary symbol game may be relatively shortened. In addition, the opening time of the opening and closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be relatively long.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), in the "time reduction gaming state", the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is high, that is, 256/256. In the first embodiment, the lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed with a high probability of 256/256 in the “hour reduction game state”, but the lottery of the ordinary symbols is not performed, and the winning may always be made. In addition, except for the “time reduction gaming state”, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is low, and 0/256, that is, the ordinary symbol is not won. In addition, in the first embodiment, a lottery of a normal symbol is performed with a low probability of 0/256 except for the “time reduction game state”, but a lottery may be always performed without performing a lottery of a normal symbol.

  The "normal gaming state" is a gaming state in which the "normal gaming" is performed, and is a gaming state other than any of the "big hitting gaming state", the "small hitting gaming state", and the "time saving gaming state".

  The transition operation between the various game states described above is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also functions as means for controlling the transition operation between various game states.

[State transition of main control]
The transition between the various game states described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of main control of the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when a game is started in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is usually performed in the "normal gaming state". Here, each time the first starting port 44 is won, a special symbol lottery process for the first starting port 44 is performed. However, as described above, in the “normal gaming state”, the normal symbol is not won, so that the normal electric accessory 46 does not open and the second starting port 45 does not win.

  If a “big hit” is won when the first starting port 44 is won, the game shifts to a “big hit gaming state”. At this time, if the hit content is the special figure (1) -8 to the special figure (1) -12, the game shifts to the "normal game state" after the "big hit game state" (non-time saving big hit).

  In the "normal game state", when the first starting port 44 is won and the "big hit" is won, if the hit content is the special map (1) -1 to the special map (1) -7, the "big hit" After the “game state”, the game shifts to the “time-saving game state” (time-saving big hit). Specifically, a lottery process of a normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43. In the "time saving game state", the normal symbol lottery is won with a high probability, so that when the game ball passes the ball passage detector 43, the normal electric accessory 46 is opened. If the game ball wins the second starting port 45 when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is opened, a lottery process of a special symbol for the second starting port 45 is performed.

  In the “time saving game state”, it is preferable for the player that the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, so that the player preferably performs “right-handed”. For this reason, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may perform an effect that prompts the player to make a “right-hand” with a display and a sound.

  If the "small hit" is won when the second starting port 45 is won, the state shifts to the "small hit game state", and the opening and closing operation of the blade member 53a is performed. When the wing member 53a is in the open state, if the player wins the second big prize device 53 and wins the V prize port 57, the game shifts to the "big hit game state". Note that the number of round games differs depending on the hit content at this time. In the case of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2, the content of the hit is "16R per V", and the blade member 53a in the second big prize device 53 when the hit is "V hit" Is set to one open state, and 16 rounds of the "big hit game" including this round are executed. In the case of the small hit (2) -3 and the small hit (2) -4, the content of the hit is "2R per V", and the blade in the second big winning device 53 when the hit is "V". The opening of the member 53a is defined as one round, and two rounds including this round. In general, the larger the number of rounds, the larger the number of game balls to be paid out. Therefore, for the player, the "small hit" of "16R per V" is "V hit". It can be said that it is more advantageous than "V hit" in "small hit" of 2R ".

  As will be described in detail later, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, by satisfying a predetermined condition, when a “small hit” is won, the “big hit game” transitions to a “big hit” round. Provides information about numbers. Thus, the player is paid out in the "big hit game state" which shifts after "V hit" by changing the firing operation of the game ball such as so-called "stop hit" according to the content of the notification. Game balls can be increased.

  Here, when a time saving big hit occurs in the “normal game state”, the “time saving game state” and the “big hit game state” are alternately shifted by a predetermined number of times. In the first embodiment, after the “big hit game state” after the “normal game state”, the so-called initial hit “big hit game state”, the “time saving game state” and the “big hit game state” are alternately performed a predetermined number of times three times each. Migrate. In other words, "Normal gaming state" → "Big hit gaming state" → "Time saving gaming state" → "Big hit gaming state" → "Time saving gaming state" → "Big hit gaming state" → "Time saving gaming state" → "Big hit gaming state" → The transition is made in the order of the “normal game state”. However, in the transition of these game states, for example, if the "small hit" is won in the "time saving game state", the game shifts to the "small hit game state", but this "small hit game state" is omitted. ing. The "big hit game state" other than the initial "big hit game state" is not always triggered by "V hit". That is, the "big hit game state" by the "big hit" of the special map (2) -1 shown in FIG. 34 is also included, and for example, there is a possibility that the state shifts to the "big hit game state" by the "big hit" three times.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when a time saving big hit occurs, four “big hit games” and three “time saving games” are performed in principle. Regardless of the winning content of the “small hit” in the third “time saving game state”, after the subsequent “big hit game state”, the “normal game state” is set instead of the “time saving game state”. . Regardless of the winning content of the “small hit” in the first and second “time saving game states”, the “time saving game state” is set after the subsequent “big hit game state”.

  In the special symbol lottery of the second starting port 45, a "big hit" may be won without a "small hit" in some cases. In such a case, the state shifts to the "big hit gaming state".

  Here, in the “time reduction gaming state”, the player is highly likely to be “right-handed”, and is unlikely to win the first starting port 44. However, when the first starting port 44 is won and the "big hit" is won, the number of rounds and the opening time are determined according to the content of the hit, and the "big hit game" is performed. In the first and second "time-saving game state" winning of "big hit", even if the hit content is special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -12, after "big hit game state" Becomes the "time reduction game state". Also, in the third “time saving game state”, when the first starting port 44 is won and the “big hit” is won, after any subsequent “big hit game state”, the “time saving game state” The game state is changed to the "normal game state" instead of the "game state".

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the time saving big hit occurs in the “normal game state”, the set game is performed. However, while the “time saving game” is performed 100 times in the “time reduction game state”, the “V If the "hit" is not performed, the game shifts from the "time saving game state" to the "normal game state". However, in the first embodiment, it can be set by adjusting the opening timing of the movable member 57a of the V winning opening 57 when a game ball enters the second big winning device 53. Therefore, when the player performs a normal firing operation, there is a low possibility that “V hit” is not performed while “time-saving game” is performed 100 times. For example, the probability of entering the V winning opening 57 when entering the second big winning device 53 may be about 2/3.
Specifically, the movable member 57a may perform the opening / closing operation until the blade member 53a of the second big winning device 53 starts to open and closes. By adjusting the timing at which the movable member 57a starts the opening operation, the time during which the movable member 57a is open, and the like, it is possible to adjust the probability of entering the V winning opening 57 when entering the second big winning device 53. . Thereby, this probability may be set to about 2/3. For example, the time during which the movable member 57a is open may be set to about ／ of the time during which the blade member 53a is open.

[State transition of sub control]
The transition between the various game states described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a state transition diagram of sub-control of a pachinko gaming machine.

  Here, the "big hit" in the special map (1) -1 to the special map (1) -2 is a trigger for shifting to the "big hit game state" in which the payout of the game ball can be expected. The decorative pattern to be displayed may be, for example, three same numbers arranged. As a result, it is understood that the player also shifts to the advantageous game state. For this reason, the "big hit" of the special map (1) -1 to the special map (1) -2 may be called "symbol big hit".

The "big hit" in the special maps (1) -3 to (1) -12 is a trigger for shifting to the "big hit game state" in which the payout of game balls cannot be expected, and is displayed in the display area 13a at this time. The decorative pattern to be displayed may be different numbers. For this reason, the "big hits" of the special maps (1) -3 to (1) -12 may be called "big hits in which the symbols are not aligned".
Note that the decorative symbols displayed in the display area 13a may have a form in which three symbols of a right symbol, a middle symbol, and a left symbol are arranged, and the special symbols (1) -3 to (1) -12 In the “big hit”, the right symbol and the left symbol may be the same symbol, and a special symbol may be displayed for the middle symbol. A plurality of special symbols, which are special symbols, may be provided, and the effect in the “big hit” may be different depending on the displayed symbol. Then, the degree of expectation of entry into the “time reduction gaming state” may be different depending on the difference between these effects. In this case, if the selectivity of each of a plurality of types of medium symbols is made different for each of the special maps (1) -3 to (1) -12, the degree of expectation of time-saving entry is made different. Good. For example, the middle symbol may be a symbol that draws a fortune, and the fortune that has come out may indicate a shift to a time reduction game.

  As described above, the first embodiment has a “normal gaming state”, a “big hit gaming state”, and a “time reduction gaming state”. As shown in FIG. 36, the “normal gaming state” and the “big hit gaming state” can shift to each other, and the “big hit gaming state” and the “time saving gaming state” can shift to each other. Note that there is also a “small hitting game state”, which is omitted here.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the “normal game state” includes a “first high probability state”, a “second high probability state”, a “third high probability state”, and a “fourth high probability state”. Have been. The "normal gaming state" also includes a "normal gaming state (sub)" other than the "first high probability state" to the "fourth high probability state". As described above, in the first embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a notification is made regarding the number of rounds of the “big hit game” to be shifted to the “big hit” when the “small hit” is won. . It is necessary to determine whether or not to perform this notification, or a notification mode such as the number of times of notification. The notification mode determined in each of the “first high probability state” to the “fourth high probability state” and the “normal game state (sub)” is different.

  First, each of the “first high probability state” to the “fourth high probability state” will be described.

  In the “first high-probability state”, when the special game (1) -1 to the special map (1) -7 is won in the “big hit” and shifted to the set game, the three “3” executed in the set game are executed. In all of the "time saving game states", the number of rounds of the "big hit game" to be transferred when the "small hit" is won and the "win" is announced. In other words, when the game ball wins the V winning opening 57, it is notified which of the 16 round “big hit game” and the 2 round “big hit game” is executed. Note that when the set game ends and shifts to the “normal game state”, the state becomes the “first high probability state”. In addition, when the player wins the "big hit" in the special map (1) -8 to the special map (1) -12 and shifts to a single-shot "big hit game state" instead of a set game, the "big hit game state" Is completed, and the state shifts to the "normal gaming state", the "first high probability state" is maintained.

  The “first high probability state” includes “normal game state” other than “third high probability state” and “fourth high probability state”, that is, “second high probability state” and “normal game state (sub)”. The transition is made when the points accumulated according to the effect in the pachinko game (for example, according to the result of the mini game) reach 100 points. Then, when 20 games have been exhausted in the “first high probability state”, the state shifts to the “second high probability state”. Specifically, in the “first high-probability state”, when the special symbol is fluctuated 20 times, the state shifts to the “second high-probability state”.

  The “second high-probability state” is a state that easily transitions to the “first high-probability state”. That is, the “second high probability state” is a game state in which points that trigger the transition to the “first high probability state” are more likely to be accumulated than in other game states. In addition, when the player wins the "big hit" of the special map (1) -8 to the special map (1) -12 and shifts to the single hit "big hit game state" instead of the set game, the "big hit game state" Is completed and the state shifts to the "normal game state", the state becomes the "first high probability state".

  As described above, the game shifts to the “second high-probability state” when 20 games are consumed in the “first high-probability state”. When 10 games are consumed in the “second high probability state”, the game mode shifts to the “normal game state (sub)” other than the “first high probability state” to the “fourth high probability state”.

In the “normal game state” other than the “first high probability state”, the “third high probability state” and the “fourth high probability state”, that is, the “second high probability state” and the “normal game state (sub)”, In the case of winning the "big hit" in FIG. (1) -1 and shifting to the set game, when the "small hit" is won in all three "time saving game states" executed in the set game, The number of rounds of the “big hit game” to be shifted when the “hit per V” is notified. In addition, when the game is shifted to the set game by winning the "big hit" of the special map (1) -2 to the special map (1) -7, the number of times of the notification of the number of rounds is determined by lottery. This lottery will be described later. Note that when the set game ends and shifts to the “normal game state”, the state becomes the “first high probability state”. In addition, if the player wins the "big hit" in the special map (1) -8 to the special map (1) -12 and shifts to a single-shot "big hit game state" instead of a set game, the "big hit game state" Is completed, and the state shifts to the “normal gaming state”, the state becomes the “first high probability state”.

  The “third high probability state” is a gaming state (ceiling state) for activating a so-called ceiling function. The ceiling function is to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player on condition that the disadvantageous state for the player continues. Specifically, in the case of winning the "big hit" of the special map (1) -1 to the special map (1) -7 in the "third high probability state" and shifting to the set game, the game is executed in the set game. In all of the three "time saving game states", the number of rounds of the "big hit game" to be transferred when the "small hit" is won and the "big hit" is announced. After the end of the set game, the game shifts to the “first high probability state”. Further, in the "third high probability state", the player wins the "big hit" in the special map (1) -8 to the special map (1) -12, and shifts to the "big hit game state" of only one time instead of the set game. In this case, when the "big hit game state" ends and the game mode shifts to the "normal game state", the "third high probability state" is maintained. The “third high probability state” is maintained until the “big hit” in the special maps (1) -1 to (1) -7 is won and the game shifts to the set game.

  As described above, the “third high probability state” is a gaming state for activating the ceiling function. If a state in which the "big hit" does not occur even if a game ball enters the first starting port 44 continues, the state shifts to the "third high probability state". In the first embodiment, a state in which a “big hit” does not occur even when a game ball enters the first starting port 44 is defined as 111 games, 222 games, 333 games, 444 games, 555 games, 666 games, 777 games, 888 games. And 999 games are continued, the ceiling lottery is performed by the sub CPU 201 each time, and when the game is won, the state shifts to the “third high probability state”. The details of the ceiling lottery will be described later.

  In addition, even after shifting to the “third high probability state”, which is the ceiling state, the state in which the “big hit” in the special map (1) -1 to the special map (1) -7 is not won remains in 111 games, 222 games, When 333 games, 444 games, 555 games, 666 games, 777 games, 888 games, and 999 games continue, the sub CPU 201 may perform the ceiling lottery each time. Then, in the case of winning, the “third high probability state” may be accumulated and stored. That is, when a plurality of “third high probability states” are stored, three times are executed in the set game by winning the “big hit” in the special map (1) -1 to the special map (1) -7. In all of the "time saving game states", the notification of the number of rounds of the "big hit game" to be shifted when the "small hit" is won and the "high hit" is stored in the "third high probability state" The number of times can be set to be possible. That is, when the “third high probability state” is stored and stored, the number of times the “third high probability state” is stored is shifted to the “third high probability state” again after the end of the set game.

  Also, after shifting to the “third high probability state”, which is the ceiling state, the number of games that are not won in the “big hit” of the special map (1) -1 to the special map (1) -7 is counted, and the notification is given. When the game is shifted from the “third high-probability state” to the “normal gaming state” and starts counting the number of games to be the reference for the ceiling lottery again, after the shift to the “third high-probability state” The number of games may be counted by adding the number of games.

  The "fourth high probability state" is for giving a privilege (all day navigation) that is advantageous to the player all day. Specifically, in the "fourth high probability state", when a special game (1) -1 to a special game (1) -7 is won and a set game is executed, the set game is executed. In all of the three "time saving game states", the number of rounds of the "big hit game" to be transferred when the "small hit" is won and the "big hit" is announced.

  In the “fourth high-probability state”, when the set game is completed and when the single-shot “big hitting game state” that does not shift to the “time-saving gaming state” is completed, the “fourth high-probability state” is maintained. Is done. As described above, when the state shifts to the “fourth high probability state”, the “fourth high probability state” is maintained. Then, the “fourth high probability state” is maintained unless the work RAM 203 is cleared. As described above, in the “fourth high probability state”, the notification is made in all three “time saving gaming states” executed in the set game, and the “fourth high probability state” is maintained until the work RAM 203 is cleared. Since the store is maintained, the above-described notification in the set game is continued until the store closes. Therefore, the notification in the “fourth high probability state” is referred to as “all day navigation”.

The work RAM 203 is cleared by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while pressing the backup switch. Simply turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not clear the work RAM 203. That is, even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off due to some error, the work RAM 203 is not cleared, and the “fourth high probability state” is maintained. Normally, the work RAM 203 is not cleared during the opening hours of the hall.
Here, when the work RAM 203 is cleared, the RAM clear flag is set, and if the first hit after the RAM clear flag is set is "big hit" in Toku-zu (1) -12, there is a 1/1 probability. The player wins the "fourth high probability state" and shifts to the "fourth high probability state". Also, regardless of the first hit after the RAM clear flag is set, the RAM clear flag is turned off. If the subsequent hit is the "big hit" in Toku-zu (1) -12, the player wins the "fourth high probability state" with a probability of 1/10 and shifts to the "fourth high probability state".
As described above, in order to shift to the “fourth high probability state”, the condition that the work RAM 203 is cleared is a condition, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not cleared and the power It may be set to be turned on. That is, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the first hit is a "big hit" of Toku-zu (1) -12, the player wins the "fourth high probability state" with a 1/1 probability. The transition to the “fourth high probability state” may be made. Note that the power-on flag may be set when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. Then, regardless of the first hit after the power ON flag is set, the power ON flag is turned OFF. If the subsequent hit is a "big hit" in Toku-zu (1) -12, the player is elected to the "fourth high probability state" with a probability of 1/10 and transitions to the "fourth high probability state" It may be. In this case, the “fourth high probability state” may be maintained until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. At the time of the "big hit" of Toku-zu (1) -12, it was decided to win the "fourth high probability state" with a probability of 1/1 or 1/10. The type of winning and the winning probability can be set as appropriate.

  Next, the transition between the “normal gaming state” and the “big hit gaming state” will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the “normal gaming state”, both the case where the “symbol match” (first big hit state) is won and the case where the “symbol unmatched” (first big hit state) is won It shifts to "big hit game state". In addition, when the "symbol hit" is won, the game ball is shifted to the "big hit game state" of five rounds where the payout of the game ball can be expected. When the "symbol hit" is won, the payout of the game ball cannot be expected. It shifts to the "big hit game state" (second big hit state) of the round.

  Then, from the “normal game state” other than the “fourth high probability state”, that is, from the “first high probability state” to the “third high probability state” and the “normal game state (sub)”, the special figure (1) -1 If it is "big hit" in Toku-zu (1) -7, the set game is executed, and after the set game ends, the state shifts to the "first high probability state".

  In addition, from the “normal gaming state” other than the “third high probability state” and the “fourth high probability state”, ie, the “first high probability state”, the “second high probability state”, and the “normal gaming state (sub)” In the case of the special map (1) -8 to the special map (1) -12, when the "big hit" is shifted to the "big hit game state", a single-shot "big hit game state" with no time reduction is performed. After the completion of the processing, the state transits to the “first high probability state”. In addition, when the state shifts from the “third high probability state” to the “big hit game state” in the “big hit” of the special map (1) -8 to the special map (1) -12, the single-shot “big hit game state” , And after the “big hit gaming state” ends, the state shifts to the “third high probability state” again.

  In the case of shifting from the “fourth high probability state” to the “big hitting game state”, the state shifts to the “fourth high probability state” again after the end of the set game or after the end of the single-shot “big hitting game state” with no time reduction.

  Next, the transition between the "big hit gaming state" and the "time saving gaming state" will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, during the set game after the "big hit" by winning the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45, or after the "V hit" in the "small hitting game state". When the set game is being performed, the state shifts from the “big hit game state” to the “time saving game state”.

  The transition from the "time reduction game state" to the "big hit game state" is made when the "V hit" in the "time reduction game state". At this time, if the "big hit game" of 16 rounds is won, the state shifts to the third big hit state, and if the "big hit game" of two rounds is won, the state shifts to the fourth big hit state. Further, in the "time saving game state", even if a "big hit" is won by entering the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 instead of the "V hit", the "big hit game" State ”. In this case, the state shifts to the first big hit state.

[Configuration of Data Table Stored in Main ROM]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main fluctuation time determination table]
First, the main fluctuation time determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 are diagrams showing examples of the main fluctuation time determination tables 1 and 2 of the pachinko gaming machine.

  The main fluctuation time determination table 1 is referred to when a losing or “small hit” is won in the special symbol game. The main fluctuation time determination table 1 defines a relationship among a game state, a reach determination random number range, an effect selection random number range, a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern command, and a fluctuation time.

  In the main fluctuation time determination table 1, the game state is identified as a "time reduction game state" (with time reduction) and a state other than "time reduction game state" (without time reduction). Furthermore, the special figure type is divided into five special figure (1) loss, small hit (2) -1 to small hit (2) -4.

  The reach determination random number range defines whether or not the selected content is reach when the special figure type is special figure (1) loss. The range of the reach fluctuation time for determining the reach fluctuation time and the range of reach reach random numbers for which the reach fluctuation time is not determined are defined. The reach determination random value is extracted from a reach determination counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when a game ball wins the first and second starting ports 44 and 45 in each game state. The reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter of the first embodiment is set to 0 to 250.

  As shown in FIG. 37, for example, if the special map (1) is lost and the gaming state at that time is not a time reduction gaming state, the reach determination random number range for determining the reach fluctuation time is 0 to 250. Range. Furthermore, it is determined that the reach occurs when the reach determination random number range is any one of 0 to 25, and the variation pattern is determined according to the value of the effect selection random number that ranges from 0 to 99. . By determining the variation pattern, the variation time for reach (20,000 ms, 30000 ms, 40000 ms) and the effect contents (“loss normal reach”, “loss super reach A”, and “loss super reach B”) are determined. Note that each of these reaches includes a plurality of types of reach contents, and the subsequent reach contents are determined by the sub-control circuit 200.

  When the special figure (1) is lost and the gaming state at that time is the time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation time (50000 ms) is set to be relatively long. This is because it is difficult to perform the lottery of the first special symbol disadvantageous to the player in the above. The lottery of the second special symbol has priority over the lottery of the first special symbol. If the specification does not have the reservation of the second special symbol, this data does not need to be provided, and thus this data is not provided.

  Here, if the small hits (2) -1 to the small hits (2) -4 and the game state at that time is not the time saving game state, after the "time saving game" is performed 100 times, the second special symbol This is due to reserves and is unlikely to occur. In this case, when "per V" is reached, for example, it is preferable that a resurrection effect such that "time saving game" is performed again is performed.

  The effect selection random number range defines the effect selection random number range corresponding to the reach determination random number, the variation time, and the effect content. The effect selection random number value is extracted from an effect selection counter (not shown) when the game ball wins the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 in each game state. The effect selection random number value extracted from the main-side effect selection counter of the first embodiment is set to 0 to 99.

  For example, if the special map (1) is a loss and the gaming state at that time is not a time reduction gaming state, the reach determination random number range for determining the reach fluctuation time ranges from 0 to 250. Further, it is determined that the normal fluctuation is performed when the reach determination random number range is any of 26 to 250, and the fluctuation pattern is determined according to the value of the effect selection random number that ranges from 0 to 99. You. By determining the variation pattern, the variation time (10000 ms, 5000 ms) and the effect contents (“normal variation A” and “normal variation B”) are determined. Subsequent production contents are determined by the sub-control circuit 200.

  The fluctuation pattern is data representing the effect contents. For example, the fluctuation pattern 02H indicates a loss normal reach. The variation pattern command is data representing a winning or a loss, a variation time, and the effect contents, and is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200. When the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub-control circuit 200, a parameter specifying the game state is also transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

  Next, the main fluctuation time determination table 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main fluctuation time determination table 2 is referred to when a big hit is won in the special symbol game. This main fluctuation pattern determination table 2 defines the relationship among the game state, the big hit type, the effect selection random number range, the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern command, and the fluctuation time.

In the main fluctuation time determination table 2, the gaming state is the same as the main fluctuation time determination table 1, "with time reduction" indicates that the time is reduced when the jackpot is won, and "without time reduction" indicates that the big hit is won. This indicates that the game is not in the time saving game state. The special figure type is divided into 13 special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -12 and special figure (2) -1.
For example, in the case of the special hit (1) -2, when the game state at that time is not the time-saving game state, the content of the big hit type is short with payout (the game ball may be paid out in the big hit game state). It is expected to shift to the time-saving gaming state after the big hit gaming state), and the variation pattern is determined according to the value of the effect selection random number in the range of 0 to 99. By determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time (20100 ms, 30100 ms, 40100 ms) and the effect contents (“normal hit”, “super reach A”, and “super reach B”) are determined. Note that each of these reaches includes a plurality of types of reach contents, and the subsequent reach contents are determined by the sub-control circuit 200.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the special figure (1) -1 and the special figure (1) -2 are reach effects regardless of whether the big hit is in the time saving game state or in the time saving game state. However, in the case of toku-zu (1) -3 to toku-zu (1) -12, an effect without payout is performed. Toku-zu (1) -1 and Toku-zu (1) -2 are "symbol-matching big hits", while toku-zu (1) -3 to toku-zu (1) -12 are "big hits with no matching symbols".

[Configuration of Data Table Stored in Sub-ROM]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the program ROM 72 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Ceiling lottery table]
First, the ceiling lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a view illustrating an example of a ceiling lottery table of a pachinko gaming machine.

  The ceiling lottery table is used at the time of the above-mentioned ceiling lottery. The sub control circuit 200 counts the number of special symbol games (variable display times of special symbols) when a game ball enters the first starting port 44 and the "big hit" is reached after the end of the set game. When the game is shifted to the set game, the count is reset and the number of special symbol games is counted again after the end of the set game. Then, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 111, 222, 333, 444, 555, 666, 777, 888 and 999, a ceiling lottery is performed.

  Here, the range of random numbers in the ceiling lottery is 0-9. First, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 111, the winning random number is 0 to 1. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 20%. Further, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 222, the winning random number value is 0 to 2. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 30%. When the counted number of special symbol games reaches 333, the winning random number value is 0 to 3. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 40%. When the counted number of special symbol games reaches 444, the winning random number value is 0 to 4. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 50%. In addition, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 555, the winning random number value is 0 to 5. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 60%. In addition, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 666, the winning random number value is 0 to 6. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 70%. Further, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 777 times, the winning random number value is 0 to 7. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 80%. When the counted number of special symbol games reaches 888, the winning random number is 0 to 8. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 90%. In addition, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 999, the winning random number value is 0 to 9. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 100%.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the longer the state in which the "big hit" is not won, the higher the probability of winning the ceiling lottery. Then, when the number of special symbol games that do not win the "big hit" reaches 999, the player always wins the ceiling lottery. When the winning in the ceiling lottery is won, the state shifts to the “third high probability state”.

[Point addition table]
The point addition table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a view illustrating an example of a point addition table of a pachinko gaming machine.

  As described above, the “normal game state” other than the “first high probability state”, the “third high probability state” and the “fourth high probability state”, that is, the “second high probability state” and the “normal game state (sub )), Points are accumulated according to the effect, and when 100 points are accumulated, the state shifts to the “first high probability state” (FIG. 36). In the "first high probability state", if the "big hit" ("symbolized big hit") of the special map (1) -1 and the special map (1) -2 is won, the "V hit" in the "time saving gaming state" is achieved. The notification (navigation) of the number of rounds of the “big hit game” to be transferred to the case is performed in all three “time-saving game states”. In the “first high-probability state”, the state shifts to the “time-saving gaming state” of “big hits” (“big hits with unmatched symbols”) in the special maps (1) -3 and (1) -7. Even if a "big hit" is won, the notification (navi) of the number of rounds of the "big hit game" that shifts when the "V hit" in the "time saving game state" is performed in all three "time saving game states" Will be Therefore, it can be said that shifting to the “first high probability state” is advantageous for the player. In the following, the term “navi” simply refers to the notification of the number of rounds of “big hit game” to be shifted to when the “hit per V” is performed.

As described above, the “second high-probability state” is a gaming state in which points easily accumulate, and different point addition tables are used during the “second high-probability state” and during other games. FIG. 40A is a table used during the “second high probability state”. FIG. 40 (a)
As shown in the figure, when the variation pattern command sent from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 is “83H00H”, “83H01H”, “83H02H”, “83H03H” and “83H04H”, Although the value of the added point differs depending on the lottery, some points are added. That is, in the "second high probability state", points are always added if a loss is made. Note that the point determination random number range is 0 to 9, and points to be added are different depending on the obtained random number value.

  The effect content corresponding to “83H00H” is “normal variation A”, the effect content corresponding to “83H01H” is “normal variation B”, and the effect content corresponding to “83H02H” is “losing normal reach”. The effect content corresponding to “83H03H” is “loss super reach A”, and the effect content corresponding to “83H04H” is “loss super reach B” (see FIG. 37). In these effects, a point addition effect may be performed so that the player can recognize that points are added. In the case of "losing super reach B", navigation can be obtained with a probability of 1/10.

  FIG. 40B shows a table used during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 40B, when an effect corresponding to the variation pattern command of “83H00H”, “83H01H”, “83H02H”, “83H03H”, and “83H04H” is made, the value of the addition point is determined by lottery. Is determined, but points may not be added in some cases. The point determination random number range is 0 to 9 as in the “second high probability state”. As can be seen from FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), points are more likely to be accumulated in the “second high probability state” than in the ordinary state.

[Navigation time-saving navigation lottery table]
The no-ballout time-saving navigation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of a time-saving navigation lottery table of a pachinko gaming machine without payout.

  As described above, when the hit content is “no payout time reduction”, a no payout time reduction navigation lottery is performed, and the number of times of navigation is determined according to this lottery. When the hit content is “time saving without payout”, the special figure types are special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. As shown in FIG. 41, the range of the random value is 0-9. In Toku-zu (1) -3, one navigator is assigned when the acquired random number value is “9”, and no navigator is assigned with other random number values. In Toku-zu (1) -4, one navigation is assigned when the acquired random number is “7 to 9”, and no navigation is assigned with any other random number. In Toku-zu (1) -5, two navigations are given when the obtained random number value is “7 to 9”, one navigation is given when the acquired random number value is “2 to 6”, and other random No navigation is given by the numerical value. In the special map (1) -6, two navigations are provided when the obtained random number value is “5 to 9”, and one navigation is provided when the obtained random number value is “0 to 4”. In Toku-zu (1) -7, when the acquired random number value is “9”, three navigations are provided, and when the obtained random number is “0 to 8”, two navigations are provided. When a navigation is given, a navigation acquisition effect is executed. The assigned number of navigations is updated (for example, added) and stored in the work RAM 203, for example.

[Large hit navigation lottery table]
The big hit navigation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a view illustrating an example of a large hit navigation lottery table of a pachinko gaming machine.

  In the “normal game state”, the “first high probability state”, the “third high probability state”, and the “fourth high probability state” are determined to be “winning time” and the transition to the set game is determined. In this case, navigation is performed for all of the three "time-saving gaming states" (see S1127 in FIG. 72, S1164 in FIG. 74, and S1174 in FIG. 75). In the special map (1) -1, navigation is performed for all three "time saving game states" regardless of the game state. However, when the special figure (1) -2 is won in the “normal game state” other than the above-mentioned game state, the sub control circuit 200 randomly selects the number of navigations during the set game. The big hit navigation lottery table is used for this lottery.

  The number of navigations to be won in the jackpot-based navigation lottery and their winning probabilities differ depending on the selected character. In addition, a player selects a character from the characters 1-3. The selection is made, for example, by operating the effect button 23 before winning the "big hit" and starting the one round game. If no character is selected before the start of the one-round game, the initially set character is selected.

  Note that the character is a character image displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. There are a plurality of types of character images (three types in the first embodiment), and the player can select any one of the characters, and can enjoy an effect according to the selected character.

  In the case of the big hit navigation lottery, the range of the random number value is 0-9. As shown in FIG. 42, when the character 1 is selected, the character is “stable” and three navigations are not obtained, but one or two navigations can be obtained and no navigation can be obtained. There is no case. When the character 2 is selected, the character is of the "normal type" and navigation may not be obtained in some cases. However, navigation can be averagely obtained for each of the first to third characters. In addition, when the character 3 is selected, the type is "one-shot reversal type", and when the navigation is obtained, the number is always three, but the navigation cannot be obtained with a probability of 1/2 or more. The player may select a character from these according to his / her preference. However, for each character, the number of navigators and the winning rate thereof are set so that no substantial advantage or disadvantage occurs when any character is selected. Although the number of characters is three in the first embodiment, any other number may be used. By increasing the number of characters, the player has a wider range of character choices, and there is a high possibility that interest in the game will be improved.

[Navi lottery table at the end of set game]
The navigation lottery table at the end of the set game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a navigation lottery table at the end of a set game of a pachinko gaming machine.

  As described above, during the set game, three “time-saving game states” are included. That is, it is possible to execute the navigation three times at the maximum. However, if the "big hit" by the special symbol game is won instead of the "big hit" by the "V hit", the navigation cannot be performed. In such a case, it is impossible for the player to enter an advantageous situation by his own operation. Therefore, in the first embodiment, as a remedy in such a case, a navigation is provided by lottery according to the number of “big hits” in the special symbol game during the set game.

  In the sub-control circuit 200, when the set game ends, the lottery at the end of the set game is performed according to the number of “big hits” in the special symbol game in the set game.

  In the navigation lottery at the end of the set game, the range of the random value is 0 to 9. As shown in FIG. 43, the number of “big hits” in the special symbol game is 0, 1, 2, 3 and lottery is performed, and the number of navigations to be provided is determined. There is a tendency that the greater the number of “big hits” in the special symbol game, the greater the number of navigations provided. In the first embodiment, the number of “big hits” in the special symbol game during the set game is used as a reference. The number may be drawn by lot. That is, during a plurality of continuous set games, the number of navigations is determined based on the number of times a “big hit” has been achieved by a lottery performed by a game ball entering the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45. May be drawn by lot.

  In addition, instead of the number of “big hits” in the special symbol game during the set game, for example, the number of navigations to be provided may be randomly selected based on the total number of rounds in all “big hit gaming states”. . The number of navigations to be provided may be determined by lot according to the game state during the set game. For example, the number of navigations provided based on the type and order of “big hit games” in a set game may be determined by lottery. For example, the lottery rate of the number of navigations to be provided may be different from each other in the order of 2R, 2R, 16R and in the order of 2R, 16R, 16R. .

  In addition, during the set game, a maximum of three “per V” is possible, but if all the results are per 2R, the number of game balls to be paid out is small, so that the result is not so favorable for the player. Absent. Therefore, in such a case, the number of navigations for the next and subsequent set games may be added (see S1210 in FIG. 77). The number to be added may be, for example, one. Also, the number of navigations may be added in the same manner when three 2Rs are successively performed over different set games instead of three 2Rs during one set game. Further, in the case of a different set game, the number of consecutive 2Rs may not be set to three, and if the number of consecutive 2Rs is more than three, the navigation may be added. If the number of 2R hits in a plurality of consecutive set games is equal to or more than a certain number, the navigation may be added. As described above, some rescue measures may be given to the game balls with a small number of payouts in the set game.

  Although the number of navigations provided has been described, the number of navigations provided may be displayed as an effect in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 in, for example, a "big hit game state".

[Description of operation of main control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control main processing]
First, a main control main process under the control of the main CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 44 and 45 are flowcharts showing an example of main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine.

  At S11, a disable setting process of the watchdog timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of disabling the watchdog timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  In S12, an input / output port setting process is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs input / output port setting processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S13.

  In S13, a process is performed to determine whether or not the device is in the power interruption detection state. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is at HI (high level). If the power interruption detection signal is HI, it is determined that it is in the power interruption detection state, and the process proceeds to S13. If the power interruption detection signal is not HI, it is determined that it is not in the power interruption detection state, and the process proceeds to S14. If the power interruption detection signal is HI, the power interruption detection state is determined, and the process returns to S13 to repeat this process until it is determined that the power interruption detection state is not established.

  In S14, a sub-control reception acceptance wait process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 200 receives a signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  In S15, a write permission process for the RAM is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S16.

  In S16, a process is performed to determine whether the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 33) is on. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 33) is on, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S24, and if it determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not on, proceeds to S17. Transfer processing.

  In S17, a process for determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S18 when determining that there is a power interruption detection flag, and shifts the processing to S24 when not determining that there is a power interruption detection flag.

  In S18, a process of calculating a work damage check value is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of checking the work area for damage and calculating a work damage check value. When this process ends, the process moves to S19.

  In S19, a process of determining whether the work damage check value is a normal value is performed. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S20, and if it is not determined that the work damage check value is a normal value, the process proceeds to S24. Move.

  In S20, a process of setting 7FFEH to the stack pointer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting 7FFEH to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  In S21, an initial setting process of a work area at the time of power recovery is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs an initialization process of a work area at the time of power restoration. If this process ends, the process moves to S22.

  In S22, a process of transmitting a power recovery command is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a command to the sub control circuit 200 to return to the gaming state at the time of power failure. If this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S23, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs initialization of devices around the main CPU 71. When this process ends, the program returns to the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area.

  In S24, a process of setting 8000H to the stack pointer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting 8000H to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S25.

  In S25, a process of acquiring the initial value of the random number related to the big hit determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of the random number related to the big hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S26.

  In S26, the entire work area clearing process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing all work areas. When this process ends, the process moves to S27 (FIG. 45).

  In S27, a process of setting an initial value of the random number related to the big hit determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting an initial value of the random number related to the big hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S28.

  In S28, a process of initializing a work area when initializing the RAM is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs initialization of a work area when the main RAM 73 is initialized. If this process ends, the process moves to S29.

  In S29, processing for transmitting a command for initializing the RAM is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a command for initializing the main RAM 73 to the sub control circuit 200. In the sub-control circuit 200, initialization is executed based on the received command. If this process ends, the process moves to S30.

  In S30, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs initialization of devices around the main CPU 71. When this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, an interrupt prohibition process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process for inhibiting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  In S32, an initial value random number updating process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, an interrupt permission process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process for permitting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S34, an effect random number update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  In S35, the main CPU 71 determines whether the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 71 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 73, and if the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, shifts the process to S36, where the system timer monitoring timer value becomes 3 If not, the process proceeds to S31.

  In S36, a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In S37, a timer update process is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 determines a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 70 and the sub control circuit 200, and a large time for measuring the opening time of the first and second big winning devices 54 and 53. A process for updating various timers such as a winning device opening time timer is executed. When this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  In S38, a special symbol control process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 71 extracts a random number for hit determination and a random number for hit symbol determination according to the detection signals from the first starting port winning ball switch 44a and the second starting port winning ball switch 45a, and is stored in the main ROM 72. With reference to the hit determination table, it is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery (big hit or small hit) has been won, and a process of storing the result of the determination in the main RAM 73 is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  In S39, a normal symbol control process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts a random value in accordance with the detection signal from the passing ball switch 43a, and refers to a normal symbol winning table stored in the main ROM 72 to determine whether or not the normal symbol lottery has been won. A process is performed for making a determination and storing the result of the determination in the main RAM 73. In addition, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in an open state, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 45. If this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, a symbol display device control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 73 in S38 and S39 and the result of the ordinary symbol control process. A process of storing a control signal for driving in the main RAM 73 is performed. The main CPU 71 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays and stops and displays the special symbol based on the received control signal. The ordinary symbol display device 62 displays the ordinary symbols in a variable and stopped manner based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  In S41, a game information data generation process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 generates data relating to a game information signal to be transmitted to the stand computer or the hall computer, and stores the data in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S42.

  In S42, a symbol pending number data generation process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether the first starting port winning ball switch 44a, the second starting port winning ball switch 45a, and the passing ball switch are detected in a switch input process (S235 in FIG. 59) in a timer interrupt process described later. Based on the detection signal from 43a and the update result of the reserved number data stored in the main RAM 73, which is updated in accordance with the execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, the display about the reservation about the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is performed. Is stored in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  In S43, a port output process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 73 from each port in the above steps and the like. Specifically, it supplies an LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LED and a solenoid power supply for driving the first special winning opening solenoid 54b, the second special winning opening solenoid 53b, and the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a. When this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  In S44, a winning port related command control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of controlling winning port related commands. When this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  In S45, a payout process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the game ball has won the general winning ports 51, 52, the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, the first big winning device 54, and the second big winning device 53. The check is performed, and if a prize is won, a corresponding payout request command is transmitted to the payout control circuit 300. When this process ends, the process moves to S31.

[Special symbol control processing]
The subroutine (special symbol control processing) executed in S38 of FIG. 45 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 46, numerical values (00H to 10H) described near S52 to S62 indicate control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in a storage area of the main RAM 73 that functions as a control state flag. I have. The main CPU 71 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73, and the special symbol game proceeds.

  First, in S51, a process of loading a control state flag is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 reads a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S52.

  In S52 to S62 described later, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. The control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in S52 to S62 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 71 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the process ends without executing the processing in each step, and another subroutine is executed. Of course, the system timer interrupt processing is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  In S52, a special symbol storage check process is executed. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S53.

  In S53, a special symbol fluctuation time management process is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management and that the predetermined variation time has elapsed in the preceding special symbol variation. When the special symbol change stops, the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management is set in the control state flag, and the wait time after determination (for example, 600 ms) is set in the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the processing of S54 is executed after the elapse of the waiting time after the determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S54.

  In S54, a special symbol display time management process is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management, and that if the waiting time after the determination has elapsed, the main CPU 71 Or small hit). When it is a small hit, the main CPU 71 sets a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the small hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the process of S55 is executed after the time corresponding to the small hit start interval has elapsed.

  In the case of a big hit, the main CPU 71 sets a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the big hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the process of S58 is executed after the time corresponding to the big hit start interval has elapsed.

  In addition, when it is not a hit, the main CPU 71 sets a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S62.

  In S55, a small hit start interval management process is executed. Although the details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management and that the time corresponding to the small hit start interval has elapsed. The data for opening the second special winning device 53 read from the main ROM 72 is stored in the main RAM 73. Then, in the processing of S43 in FIG. 45, the main CPU 71 reads out data for opening the second special winning device 53 stored in the main RAM 73, and outputs a signal to the effect that the second special winning device 53 is opened. It is supplied to the two-prize winning opening solenoid 53b. As described above, the main CPU 71 and the like perform opening / closing control of the second big winning device 53. That is, the "small hitting game state" is executed.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets the value (04H) indicating the small hit in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 1.5 seconds or 1.2 seconds) of the second big winning device 53 to the second. Set the big win device opening time timer. In addition, it is set to execute the process of S56. If this process ends, the process moves to S56.

  In S56, the small hitting process is executed. Although the details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets a special winning opening opening process (07H) or a post-small-hit end process (05H) in the control state flag according to conditions. When this process ends, the process moves to S57.

  In S57, post-completion processing is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may enter the V winning opening 57 in the second big winning device 53 after the closing of the blade member 53a. . In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the special symbol game end process (10H) to the control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S58.

  In S58, a big hit start interval management process is executed. Although the details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to the value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management, and sets the main CPU 71 when the time corresponding to the big hit start interval elapses. The data for opening the first special winning device 54 read from the ROM 72 is stored in the main RAM 73. Then, in the process of S43 in FIG. 45, the main CPU 71 reads data for opening the first special winning device 54 stored in the main RAM 73, and outputs a signal indicating that the first special winning device 54 is to be opened. It is supplied to the big winning opening solenoid 54b. As described above, the main CPU 71 and the like perform opening / closing control of the first big winning device 54. That is, the "big hit gaming state" is executed.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag, and sets the maximum opening time (for example, 27.996 seconds or 0.102 seconds) to the special winning opening timer. set. That is, it is set so that the process of S59 is executed. When this process ends, the process moves to S59.

  In S59, a special winning opening opening process is executed. Although the details of this process will be described later, in this process, when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating that the special winning opening is being opened, the main winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than “10”. It is determined whether one of the following conditions is satisfied or the condition that the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening time timer is “0”). When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the first big winning device 54. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the special winning opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. The main CPU 71 sets the value (09H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag in the case of the last round, and the value (08H) indicating the waiting time management before reopening the special winning opening in the case of not the last round. Is set to the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S60.

  In S60, a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening reopening wait time management and that the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. Then, the storage update is performed so that the special winning opening counter is increased by "1". The main CPU 71 sets a value (07H) indicating that the special winning opening is being opened in the control state flag. The main CPU 71 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.996 seconds or 0.102 seconds) in the special winning opening time timer, that is, sets the process of S59 to be executed. If completed, the process moves to S59.

  In S61, a hit end interval process is executed. Although the details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to the value (09H) indicating the hit end interval, and if the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed, the main CPU 71 The value (10H) indicating the end is set in the control state flag. That is, it is set so that the process of S62 is executed. When this process ends, the process moves to S62.

  In S62, a special symbol game end process is executed. Although details of this processing will be described later, in this processing, when the control state flag is a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game, the main CPU 71 sets a value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check. . That is, it is set to execute the process of S52. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  As described above, by setting the control state flag, the special symbol game is executed. Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “10H” in this order, thereby completing the processing of S52 shown in FIG. , S53, S54, and S62 are executed at a predetermined timing.

  In addition, when the hit determination result is a big hit in the case of no big hit or small hit gaming state, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “06H” in this order. Thus, the processes of S52, S53, S54, and S58 shown in FIG. 46 are executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the big hit gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to “07H” and “08H” in this order to execute the processing of S59 and S60 shown in FIG. And the big hit game is executed. When the jackpot game end condition is satisfied, the processing of S59, S61, and S62 shown in FIG. 46 is executed at a predetermined timing by sequentially setting “07H”, “09H”, and “10H”. , The big hit game will end.

  In addition, when the hit determination result is a small hit in a state of not a big hit or a small hit gaming state, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” in this order. By doing so, the processing of S52, S53, S54, and S55 shown in FIG. 46 is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the small hitting game state is executed. Further, when the control to the small hitting game state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to “04H” to execute the processing of S56 shown in FIG. 46 at a predetermined timing, The big hit game will be executed. In addition, when the end condition of the small hitting game is satisfied, the processing of S57 and S62 shown in FIG. 46 is executed at a predetermined timing by sequentially setting “05H” and “10H”, and the small hitting game is executed. Will end.

  By the way, as described above, the special symbol control process branches the process according to the status. In addition, although not described in detail, the normal symbol control processing is also branched according to the status similarly.

[Special design memory check process]
The subroutine (special symbol storage check processing) executed in S52 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 47, in S71, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. When determining that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S72. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 does not determine that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 71 ends the present subroutine.

  In S72, a process of determining whether or not there is a start memory is performed. Here, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as the start memory in the first special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 73, and the four special symbol games held are held. Are stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) as start memory. Similarly, in the case of the special symbol game of the second special symbol, when the special symbol game of the second special symbol is suspended four times, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the main symbol. The information of the four special symbol games which are stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the RAM 73 as the start memory and are held are stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage. It is stored as the start memory in the area (4). Therefore, a maximum of eight reservations are possible.

  In the process of determining the presence or absence of the start memory in S72, when the main CPU 71 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). ) Or when it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S73. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that there is a start memory, the process proceeds to S74.

  In S73, a demonstration display process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 73. Furthermore, the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area in which the random number value for hit determination is stored) becomes 0 is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, a value for permitting execution of the demonstration display is set as the demonstration display permission value. Then, when the demonstration display permission value is the predetermined value, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting demonstration display command data. The demo display command data stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 as a demo display command. As a result, in the sub control circuit 200, control for displaying the demonstration display in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is performed. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S74, a process is performed to determine whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is the earliest hold. In this processing, the main CPU 71 determines whether the earliest hold is the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol based on the data in the first special symbol start storage area and the data in the second special symbol start storage area. Determine. If it is determined that the earliest hold is not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S75. If it is determined that the earliest hold is the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S76.

  In S75, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating a change of the second special symbol as a change state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S77.

  In S76, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating a change of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 as a change state number. When this process ends, the process moves to S77.

  In S77, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S78.

  In S78, a special symbol storage transfer process is executed. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 71 converts the data in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), A process of shifting (storing) from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) is executed, and if the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol is executed. Each of the data in the symbol start storage area (1) is shifted (stored) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3). Execute the processing to be performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S79.

  In S79, a hit determination process is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 refers to the hit determination table stored in the main ROM 72 and is extracted at the time of the start winning, and is firstly stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Is referred to in the special symbol start storage area set in the special symbol start storage area and the hit determination table. When the hit determination random number value and the hit determination value match, the main CPU 71 determines that the hit is a big hit or a small hit. That is, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the “big hit game state” is set and whether the “small hit game state” is set. If it is not “big hit” or “small hit”, it is determined that a loss has occurred. When this process ends, the process moves to S80.

  In S80, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines the big hit symbol if the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and determines the small hit symbol if the result of the hit determination is a small hit, and is neither a big hit nor a small hit. In the case, that is, in the case of a loss, a process of determining a loss symbol is performed. The details of the special symbol determination process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S81.

  In S81, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 selects a main variation time determination table for determining a special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the process of S80 and the result of the hit determination determined in the process of S79. I do. Specifically, when the big hit is won, the main fluctuation time determination table 2 in FIG. 38 is selected, and otherwise, the main fluctuation time determination table 1 in FIG. 37 is selected. Further, the main CPU 71 determines a variation pattern based on the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination random number counter, the effect selection random number value extracted from the effect selection random number counter, and the selected main variation time determination table. It is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 determines a variation display mode of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 61 based on the data indicating such a variation pattern.

  The data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, the special symbol is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 according to the determined variation pattern. The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a variation pattern command to the sub-control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 performs the effect display according to the received fluctuation pattern command. If this process ends, the process moves to S82.

  In S82, a special symbol variation time setting process is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 sets a fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern in the waiting time timer, and executes processing for clearing the storage area used for the current fluctuation display. When this process ends, the process moves to S83.

  In S83, a process of setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 73 is performed. The special symbol effect start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 starts the effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process ends, the process moves to S84.

  Then, in S84, the main CPU 71 executes a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current fluctuation display. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Special design decision processing]
The subroutine (special symbol determination processing) executed in S80 of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S91, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a big hit has occurred as a result of the hit determination (S79). If it is determined that there is a big hit, the process proceeds to S92. If it is not determined that there is a big hit, the process proceeds to S97.

  In S92, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the change state number is (01H). If it is determined that the fluctuation state number is (01H), the process proceeds to S93. If it is not determined that the fluctuation state number is (01H), the process proceeds to S95.

  In S93, a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the big hit symbol determining random value extracted from the big hit symbol determining counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the process moves to S94.

  In S94, a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the first special symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies the data to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 fluctuates and displays the first special symbol and stops and displays the first special symbol in a form based on the big hit symbol data. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command of a big hit symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies the command to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. Thus, under the control of the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S95, a process of determining the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the second special symbol based on the big hit symbol determining random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determining counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the process moves to S96.

  In S96, a data set of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol and a command set of the big hit symbol are performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 sets the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies the data to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays the second special symbol and stops and displays the second special symbol in a form based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command for a big hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies the command to the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. Thus, under the control of the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  If the main CPU 71 determines in S97 that the hit is a small hit as a result of the hit determination (S79), the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S98. If it is not determined that the small hit has occurred, the process proceeds to S100.

  In S98, a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol according to the random number value extracted from the small hit symbol determining counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S99. In the first embodiment, only the second special symbol wins the "small hit".

  In S99, a data set of a small hit symbol of the second special symbol and a command set of a small hit symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets small hit symbol data of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies the data to the special symbol display device 61. The main CPU 71 sets a command for a small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies the command as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. . Thus, under the control of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in the small hit stop display mode. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S100, a lost symbol data set and a lost symbol command set are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies the data to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays the special symbols, and stops and displays the special symbols in a form based on the lost symbol data. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a lost symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. Thus, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed in the display area 13a in a loss stop display mode. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management processing]
The subroutine (special symbol fluctuation time management processing) executed in S53 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S101, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, and determines that the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. If so, the process proceeds to S102, and if it is not determined that the value is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, this subroutine is ended.

  In S102, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0". If it is determined that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S103. When it is not determined that the waiting time timer is “0”, the present subroutine ends.

  In S103, a process of setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag is executed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 sets (stores) a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S104.

  In S104, a symbol stop command is set. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) the symbol stop command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. Then, the symbol stop command data is transmitted by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process ends, the process moves to S105.

  In S105, after confirmation, a process of setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of storing the determined waiting time in an area of the main RAM 73 that functions as a waiting time timer. Note that the waiting time may be about 100 ms. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Special symbol display time management processing]
The subroutine (special symbol display time management processing) executed in S54 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S111, the main CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management processing. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management processing, the processing shifts to S112. If the control state flag is not determined to be the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management processing, the present subroutine ends.

  In S112, when the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management processing, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management processing is “0”. judge. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S113. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", this subroutine ends.

  In S113, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a big hit has occurred. If it is a big hit, the process proceeds to S119. If it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to S114.

  In S114, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a small hit has occurred. If it is a small hit, the process proceeds to S115. If not, the process proceeds to S124.

  In S115, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S116.

  In S116, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value of a waiting time timer as a hit start interval time corresponding to a small hit in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The waiting time may be, for example, 5000 ms. When this process ends, the process moves to S117.

  In S117, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. This special symbol effect stop command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, whereby the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the stop of the special symbol effect. When this process ends, the process moves to S118.

  In S118, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a small hit start command corresponding to the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this process, the small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the start of the big hit or the small hit. . When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S119, the main CPU 71 sets a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S120.

  In S120, the main CPU 71 performs a process of turning off (clearing) the time saving flag of the main RAM 73. In the "big hit game state", the "time reduction game" is not performed. On the other hand, the counter for the continuous number of time savings is not cleared. When this process ends, the process moves to S121.

  In S121, the main CPU 71 sets a value of a waiting time timer as a big hit start interval time corresponding to a special symbol (a first special symbol or a second special symbol) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The waiting time may be, for example, 5000 ms. When this process ends, the process moves to S122.

  In S122, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special symbol effect stop command is determined with reference to the open pattern table shown in FIG. 34D, and is supplied to the sub-control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub-control circuit 200 Sub CPU 201 recognizes that the special symbol effect has been stopped. If this process ends, the process moves to S123.

  In S123, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a big hit start command corresponding to a special symbol (a first special symbol or a second special symbol) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this process, the jackpot start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the start of the jackpot. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S124, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (10H) indicating a special symbol game end process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S125.

  In S125, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Small hit start interval management processing]
The subroutine (small hit start interval management processing) executed in S55 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.
In the following description, the "large winning opening counter" in S133, S134, S144, and S145 is a "large winning opening counter" used at the time of a small hit, and S151, S173, S174, S178, S187, The “special winning opening number counter” in S203 is a “special winning opening number counter” used at the time of a big hit.

  First, in S131, the main CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management processing. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process, the process proceeds to S132. If the control state flag is not determined to be the value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management processing, the subroutine is terminated.

  In S132, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit start interval management processing is “0”, that is, whether or not the small hit start interval time has been consumed. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S133. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", this subroutine ends.

  In S133, a process of setting the upper limit of the special winning opening counter for the number of times of opening of the second special winning device 53 to a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 is performed. In the first embodiment, the upper limit is limited to 3 (see FIG. 34D). When this process ends, the process moves to S134.

  In S134, the main CPU 71 adds 1 to the special winning opening counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S135.

  In S135, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting an opening / closing pattern for each number of times of opening according to the type of the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 according to the opening pattern table shown in FIG. In the first embodiment, the opening time for each opening count is set in the same manner. When this process ends, the process moves to S136.

  In S 136, the main CPU 71 sets the special winning opening open display command data for the second special winning device 53 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special winning opening opening display command data is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 as a special winning opening opening display command under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. When this process ends, the process moves to S137.

  In S137, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the small hitting process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S138.

  In S138, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the special winning opening winning counter related to the winning number of the second special winning device 53. When this process ends, the process moves to S139.

  In S139, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer for the opening time of the second big winning device 53 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The waiting time may be, for example, 1200 ms or 1500 ms. When this process ends, the process moves to S140.

  In S140, regarding the operation of the movable member 57a of the V winning opening 57, the main CPU 71 sets a movable member in-operation flag indicating whether or not the movable member 57a is in an open state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. Perform processing. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Small hit processing]
The subroutine executed during S56 in FIG. 46 (small hitting process) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S141, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the small hitting process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hitting process, the process proceeds to S142. If the control state flag is not determined to be the value (04H) indicating the small hitting processing, the present subroutine is terminated.

  In S142, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening counter of the second special winning device 53 is 4 or more. Here, before the second special winning device 53 is opened four times, there is a possibility that four game balls enter and the special winning opening counter counts 4 or more. That is, as in one round in the case of a big hit, each time the second big winning device 53 is opened, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening counted by the big winning counter is determined. Differently, the total number of gaming balls entering the special winning opening counted by the special winning counter is determined regardless of the number of times the second special winning device 53 is opened for one small hit. When the special winning opening counter is 4 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S148. If the special winning opening counter is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S143.

  In S143, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit processing is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the waiting time timer has reached 0 and the opening time or closing time of the second big winning device 53 has ended. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S144. If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the process proceeds to S147.

  In S144, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening number counter is equal to or larger than the special winning opening number upper limit set in S133. That is, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening counter has reached the number of times of opening of the second special winning device 53 set in S133 three times. The main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S148 when the special winning opening number counter is equal to or larger than the maximum winning opening number. If the winning opening counter is not equal to or greater than the winning opening upper limit, the process proceeds to S145.

  In S145, if this time is closed, the main CPU 71 adds 1 to the special winning opening opening counter. That is, when the special winning opening number counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening number upper limit, the "small hitting game state" is continued, and the second special winning device 53 which is in the closed state is later opened, and again. In order to determine the number of times of opening the second special winning device 53 of the special winning opening counter, 1 is added to the special winning opening counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S146.

  In S146, the main CPU 71 sets the next opening / closing mode data and the opening / closing timer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. That is, the opening / closing mode data and the opening / closing timer of the second big prize winning device 53 which is again in the open state or the closed state are set here. When this process ends, the process moves to S147.

  In S147, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag related to winning in the V winning opening 57. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S150. If there is no V winning flag, this subroutine ends.

  In S148, the main CPU 71 determines in S142 that the special winning counter for the second special winning device 53 is 4 or more, or in S144, sets the special winning opening release counter to the special winning opening set in S133. When it is determined that the number of times of release is equal to or more than the upper limit, the processing for clearing the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hitting processing is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S149.

  In S149, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S150. If there is no V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S156.

  In S150, the main CPU 71 sets the special winning opening opening process (07H) to the control state flag. That is, in S149, when the main CPU 71 determines that the V winning flag is present, it means that the preparation for the "big hit game" to be started from the "V hit" is started. If this process ends, the process moves to S151.

In S151, a process of setting the special winning opening counter to 2 is performed. As described above, in this processing, in the “big hit game” started from the “big hit”, the opening of the second big winning device that is thrown into the V winning opening 57 becomes the first round, and the subsequent “big hit game” This is a process that occurs when the opening of the second big winning device of "" is the second round. If this process ends, the process moves to S152.
In S152, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the upper limit of the special winning opening counter for the first special winning device 54 in the main RAM 73. In this case, the upper-limit value of the special winning opening counter is set to "2" or "16" depending on the content of the small hit, which is the trigger per V. If this process ends, the process moves to S153.

  In S153, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a timer value as a start interval time per V in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. This time may be the same as the interval between rounds, for example, 5000 ms. If this process ends, the process moves to S154.

  In S154, the main CPU 71 performs a process of turning off the V winning flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S155.

  In S155, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a V hit start command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S156, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating the process after the end of the small hit in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S157.

  In S157, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a timer value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 as the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit. This time may be, for example, 5000 ms. This process is necessary to perform a process of confirming that there is no game ball that may enter the V winning opening 57 in the second winning device 53 after the closing of the blade member 53a. is there. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Small hit end processing]
The subroutine (processing after the end of the small hit) executed in S57 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S161, the main CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating post-small-hit end processing. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the processing after the end of the small hit, the processing shifts to S162. If the control state flag is not determined to be the value (05H) indicating the processing after the end of the small hit, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S162, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the timer value of the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is “0”. That is, it is determined whether the remaining monitoring time at the end of the small hit has been consumed. When the value of the timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S164. If the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S163.

  In S163, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. The determination as to whether or not there is a V winning flag is performed at this timing. Even if, for example, a fraudulent act of intentionally setting the V winning flag is performed at other timings, the determination of the V winning flag is not performed. Not done. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S150 in FIG. If there is no V winning flag, this subroutine ends.

  In S164, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a small hit command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S165.

  In S165, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Big hit start interval management processing]
The subroutine (big hit start interval management processing) executed in S58 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the big hit start interval management process, as shown in FIG. 54, in S171, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process, the process proceeds to S172. If the control state flag is not determined to be the value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management processing, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S172, when the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management processing, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the big hit start interval management processing is “0”. I do. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S173, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 ends this subroutine.

  In S173, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the upper limit value of the special winning opening counter for the first special winning device 54 in the main RAM 73. In the first embodiment, since the “big hit game” by special symbols is all five rounds, the upper limit of the special winning opening counter is set to “5”. If this process ends, the process moves to S174.

  In S174, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening counter in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S175.

  In S175, the main CPU 60 refers to the opening pattern table of FIG. 34 (d) and performs a process of setting an opening / closing pattern for each round according to the type of the big hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In the first embodiment, the opening / closing pattern according to the type of the big hit symbol is set to be different, and as this opening / closing pattern, two patterns of a special winning opening time of 27.996 seconds or 0.102 seconds are set. However, the opening / closing pattern according to each round is set the same without any difference. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S176, the main CPU 71 sets (stores) the special winning opening open command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The big win opening display command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S177.

  In S177, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a special winning opening opening process in a predetermined region functioning as a control status flag in the main RAM 73, in the control status flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S178.

  In S178, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the special winning opening winning counter in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S179.

  In S179, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening time in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Grand prize opening process]
The subroutine (big winning opening opening process) executed in S59 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the special winning opening opening process, as shown in FIG. 55, in S181, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the process proceeds to S182. If the control state flag is not determined to be the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S182, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than "10". In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than “10”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S185, and when the main winning 71 does not determine that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than “10”. Then, the process is moved to S183.

  In S183, a special winning opening opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of opening and closing the first big winning device 54 according to the opening and closing pattern for each round set in S175. Specifically, a process of closing and opening the first big winning device 54 after a certain time is performed according to the opening / closing pattern for each round. When this process ends, the process moves to S184.

  In S184, it is determined whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening time timer is "0". When the main CPU 71 determines that the waiting time timer of the predetermined area functioning as the special winning opening time timer in the main RAM 73 is “0”, the processing is shifted to S185, and the waiting time timer is “0”. If not, the subroutine ends. That is, when it is determined that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than "10" or when the special winning opening time timer is "0", the process proceeds to S185, and the special winning opening winning counter is determined. This subroutine is terminated when it is not determined that is equal to or more than “10”, and when it is not determined that the special winning opening time timer is “0”.

  In S186, processing for setting the special winning opening closing data is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 updates the variables located in the main RAM 73 based on the data read from the main ROM 72 in order to close the special winning opening. The variables stored in this manner cause the first special winning opening solenoid 54b to be in the closed state by the processing of S43 in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S187.

  In S187, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number. In this processing, the main CPU 71 compares the special winning opening release frequency counter stored in the main RAM 73 with the special winning opening releasing frequency upper limit or more, and sets the special winning opening releasing frequency counter to the special winning opening releasing upper limit value. It is determined whether or not this is the case. If it is determined that the number is equal to or larger than the special winning opening number upper limit value, the process proceeds to S191. If it is not determined that the number is equal to or larger than the special winning opening number upper limit value, the process proceeds to S188.

  In S188, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval time between rounds and the remaining ball monitoring time in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S189.

  In S189, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening of the special winning opening in a predetermined area functioning as a control status flag in the main RAM 73, in the control status flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S190.

  In S190, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting round display command data in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S191, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as a big hit end interval time and a remaining time monitoring time in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S192.

  In S192, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process in a predetermined area functioning as a control status flag in the main RAM 73, in the control status flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S193.

  In S193, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the special symbol-per-interval end display command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Management processing of waiting time before reopening of the winning opening]
The subroutine (wait time management processing before reopening the special winning opening) executed in S60 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management process, in S201, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (08H) indicating the special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time managing process. Is determined. If the control state flag is determined to be the value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening of the special winning opening, the process proceeds to S202. If the control state flag is not determined to be the value (08H) indicating the waiting time management processing before reopening of the special winning opening, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S202, when the control state flag is the value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening of the special winning opening, whether the value of the waiting time timer as the interval time between rounds is “0” or not. Determine whether or not. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the processing of S203, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 ends this subroutine.

  In S203, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to a special winning opening counter in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S204.

  In S204, the main CPU 71 sets (stores) the special winning opening open command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this case, the display command data during the opening of the special winning opening is data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The special winning opening opening command data is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 as a special winning opening opening command. The display command during opening of the special winning opening includes an instruction to the sub CPU 201 to perform the round counter +1. If this process ends, the process moves to S205.

  In S205, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a special winning opening opening process in a predetermined region functioning as a control status flag in the main RAM 73, in the control status flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S206.

  In S206, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the special winning opening winning counter in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S207.

  In S207, the main CPU 71 sets a waiting time timer as a special winning opening time in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Big hit end interval processing]
The subroutine (big hit end interval processing) executed in S61 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S211, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval processing, the processing shifts to S212. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval processing, the present subroutine is ended.

  In S212, when the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval processing, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the hit end interval is “0”. I do. That is, it is determined whether the big hit end interval time has been consumed and the value of the waiting time timer has become “0”. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S213, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, ends the present subroutine.

  In S213, the main CPU 71 sets a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 73 in the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S214.

  In S214, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time reduction has been won. If it is a time-saving prize, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S215. If not, the process proceeds to S219.

  In S215, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving continuous counter is 0. When the time reduction continuous counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S216. If the time saving continuous counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S217. The time reduction continuation counter is provided to count the number of times of the “time reduction game state” during the set game. If the time-saving continuous counter is 0, for example, it indicates that it is a "big hit" from the "normal gaming state", that is, a so-called "initial hit", and the "time-saving game" has not yet been performed in the set game. , Indicating that the first "time saving game" will be performed.

  In S216, the main CPU 71 sets the "time saving game state" and sets the time saving continuous counter to one. Further, 0 is set in the time reduction counter. The time-saving counter is for counting the number of “time-saving games”, and a maximum of 100 “time-saving games” is possible in the “time-saving game state”. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S217, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving continuous counter is four. That is, the "big hit" including the "initial hit" is performed four times, and it is determined whether or not the time is the third "time saving game state" during the set game. When the time reduction continuous counter is 4, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S219. If the time saving continuous counter is not 4, the process proceeds to S218.

  In S218, the main CPU 71 sets the "time saving game state" and adds 1 to the time saving continuous counter. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S219, the main CPU 71 sets the "normal gaming state". When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Special symbol game end processing]
The subroutine (special symbol game end processing) executed in S62 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S221, the main CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end processing. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the process proceeds to S222. When it is not determined that the control state flag is not the value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the present subroutine is ended.

  In S222, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S223. If there is no V winning flag, the process proceeds to S224.

  In S223, the V winning flag is turned off. When this process ends, the process moves to S224.

  In S224, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving counter is 1 or more. When the time reduction counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S225. If the time reduction counter is not 1 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S228. After "big hit" from the "normal game state", 0 is set in the time reduction counter in S216, and in S224, the time reduction counter counts 0 in "time reduction game". Transfer processing to

  In S225, the main CPU 71 adds 1 to the time reduction counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S226.

  In S226, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving counter is 100 or more. If the main CPU 71 determines that the time reduction counter is 100 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S227. When it is determined that the time reduction counter is not 100 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S228. In S226, for example, it is determined that the number of times of saving time counter is 100 or more, and if the “time per game” has not become “per V” during the 100 times of “time saving game”, the process proceeds to S227.

  In step S227, the time saving number counter and the time saving continuous counter are cleared, and the time saving flag is turned off (cleared). If this process ends, the process moves to S228.

  In S228, the main CPU 71 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 73 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[System timer interrupt processing]
The main CPU 71 may interrupt the main processing and execute the system timer interrupt processing even when the main processing is being executed. The system timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

  In S231, register save processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process to save the register. When this process ends, the process moves to S232.

  In S232, a timer update process is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S233.

  In S233, a process of setting clear data to the watchdog output data is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets clear data in the watchdog output data. Further, the main CPU 71 transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 75 (see FIG. 33). The initial reset circuit 75 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. Note that when a predetermined time (for example, 3100 msec) determined by the capacity of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 75 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 75 is cleared, the main CPU 71 To output a system reset signal. When a system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 75, the main CPU 71 enters a system reset state. When this process ends, the process moves to S234.

  In S234, a random number update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating a random number. For example, the main CPU 71 updates random numbers such as a random number counter for jackpot determination, a random number counter for reach determination, a random number counter for ordinary symbol determination, and a random number counter for effect selection. In addition, the random number counter for the jackpot determination and the random number counter for the reach determination are unfair when the update timing of the counter value is indefinite, so that in order to ensure this, at a fixed timing every 2 msec. I try to update. When this process ends, the process moves to S235.

  In S235, switch input processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not an input has been made to the switch. For example, the main CPU 71 includes a count switch 54c and a count switch 53c provided in the first winning device 54 and the second winning device 53, a general winning ball switches 51a and 52a provided in the general winning openings 51 and 52, and A passing ball switch 43a provided in the ball passing detector 43, a first starting port winning ball switch 44a and a second starting port winning ball switch 45a provided in the first starting port 44 and the second starting port 45, By receiving a detection signal from the V winning opening winning ball switch 57c provided in the V winning opening 57, it is determined whether or not each switch has detected a game ball. When the main CPU 71 determines that the detection has been performed, the main CPU 71 updates a special winning opening prize ball counter, a general winning opening prize ball counter, a starting opening prize ball counter, a V prize ball counter, and the like according to the detection. Details of the switch input processing will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S236.

  In S236, a movable member control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 controls the movable member 57a. Details of this control will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S237.

  In S237, a register return process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Switch input processing]
The switch input processing in S235 shown in FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S241, a prize ball related switch check process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the count switches 54c and 53c, the general winning ball switches 51a and 52a, the first starting port winning ball switch 44a and the second starting port winning ball switch 45a have been input, in other words, the game balls. It is determined whether or not is detected. When the main CPU 71 determines that the count switches 54c and 53c have been input, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening prize ball counter, and determines that the general winning ball switches 51a and 52a have been input. If it is determined, the process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter is performed, and if it is determined that there is an input of the first starting opening winning ball switch 44a and the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a, A process of adding 1 to the value of the starting mouth prize ball counter is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S242.

  In S242, a special symbol related switch check process is performed. The special symbol related switch check processing will be described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S243.

  In S243, a normal symbol related switch check process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the passing ball switch 43a has been input, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected. 4), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit, the present subroutine is terminated. If it is not determined to be the upper limit, a random number value for hit determination is extracted from the random number counter for hit determination of the normal symbol game, and a random number value for hit symbol determination is further extracted from the random number counter for hit symbol determination. A process for storing in the normal symbol storage area is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S244, if this process ends.

  In S244, V switch check processing is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the V winning opening winning ball switch 57c has been input, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected. If it is determined that the input has been performed, the V winning flag is set. Perform the process of turning on. When this processing is completed, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON only at the time of “small hit”. At other times, even if the V winning flag is ON, Is cleared in the special symbol game end process 00H (see FIG. 46). When this process ends, the process moves to S245.

  In S245, an abnormality-related switch check process is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the abnormality-related switch has an abnormality, for example, whether or not the opening / closing switch of the glass door 11 has been opened and it has been detected that the glass door 11 has been opened. Further, for example, in a state where the signal that the first big winning device 54 is operating is not transmitted, it is determined whether or not a signal from the count switch 54c is detected. If an abnormality is detected, a process for notifying the abnormality is performed, and if no abnormality is detected, the present subroutine is terminated.

[Special design related switch check processing]
The special symbol-related switch check processing in S242 shown in FIG. 60 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S251, a process is performed to determine whether or not a winning start to the first starting port 44 has been detected. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the first starting port winning ball switch 44a has been input. If it is determined that the first starting port winning ball switch 44a has been input, the process proceeds to S252. If it is not determined that the first starting port winning ball switch 44a has been input, the process proceeds to S257.

  In S252, a process of determining whether or not the start memory of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the first special symbol start storage, that is, whether the number of retained symbols is four or more. If it is determined that the number to be held is four or more, this subroutine is terminated. If it is determined that the number to be held is not four or more, the process proceeds to S253.

  In S253, a process of adding 1 to the start memory of the first special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the reserved number of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S254.

  In S254, various random value acquisition processes are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts a random number value for a special jackpot determination of a special symbol game from the random number counter for a large jackpot determination (so-called special symbol lottery), and further extracts a random number value for a reach determination from the random number counter for a reach determination. Then, a process of extracting the effect selection random number value from the effect selection random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 73 is performed. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is a first special symbol start storage area (0) to a first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first special symbol start storage area (0). The determination result based on the random number for hit determination stored in the special symbol is derived and displayed by the special symbol, and various random numbers obtained by winning the start during the change of the special symbol are stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1). To the first special symbol start storage area (4). When this process ends, the process moves to S255.

  In S255, a winning effect determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect based on a random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S256.

  In S256, the main CPU 71 sets a first starting port winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The first start-up winning command is supplied to the sub-control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 so that the sub-control circuit 200 determines whether there is a first start-up win or whether the winning lottery result is correct. Become aware of The data of the first starting opening winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect of changing a display mode of a reserved ball displayed in the effect when it is determined in the process of S255 that a winning effect is to be performed. . As a result, a so-called "look-ahead effect", which is a well-known technique, in which an effect is executed based on the start storage information before the execution of the change, becomes possible. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S257, a process is performed to determine whether or not a start winning in the second starting port 45 has been detected. In this processing, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the input of the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a has been performed. If it is determined that the input of the second opening prize ball switch 45a has been made, the process proceeds to S258. If it is not determined that the input of the second startup prize ball switch 45a has been made, this subroutine is ended.

  In S258, a process of determining whether or not the starting memory of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this processing, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the start storage of the second special symbol, that is, whether or not the number of held symbols is four or more. If it is determined that the number of reservations is four or more, the present subroutine is ended. If it is determined that the number of reservations is not four or more, the process proceeds to S259.

  In S259, a process of adding 1 to the start memory of the second special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the reserved number of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S260.

  In S260, various random value acquisition processes are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts a big hit determination random number of the special symbol game from the big hit determination random number counter (so-called special symbol lottery), and further extracts a reach determination random number value from the reach determination random number counter. Then, a process of extracting the effect selection random number value from the effect selection random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 73 is performed. In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the second special symbol start storage area (0). The judgment result based on the random number for jackpot judgment stored in the special symbol is derived and displayed by the special symbol, and various random numbers obtained by winning the start while the special symbol is changing are stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to It is sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (4). When this process ends, the process moves to S261.

  In S261, a winning effect determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect. When it is determined that a winning effect is to be made, a winning effect command data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect of changing a display mode of a reserved ball to be displayed is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The winning effect command data is supplied as a winning effect command to the sub-control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, whereby the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the contents of the winning effect. This enables a so-called “look-ahead effect” in which an effect is executed based on the start storage information before the execution of the fluctuation. If this process ends, the process moves to S262.

  In S 262, the main CPU 71 sets a second starting port winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The second start-up winning command is supplied to the sub-control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. Become aware of The data of the second starting opening winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect of changing a display mode of a reserved ball displayed in an effect when it is determined in the process of S261 that a winning effect is to be performed. . This enables a so-called “look-ahead effect” in which an effect is executed based on the start storage information before the execution of the fluctuation. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In the present embodiment, although not shown, various commands set in the main RAM 73 of the main control circuit 70 are supplied to the sub control circuit 200 in each process of the main control circuit 70.

[Movable member control processing]
The movable member control processing in S236 shown in FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S271, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the small hitting process. If it is determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hitting process, the process proceeds to S272. When it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the small hitting process, the process proceeds to S274.

  In S272, a process is performed to determine whether or not there is a moving flag indicating that the movable member 57a is operating. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that there is a movable flag, the main CPU 71 ends the present subroutine, and if it determines that there is no movable flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S273.

  In S273, a process of starting the operation of the movable member 57a and turning on the moving flag is performed. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S274, the main CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the processing after the end of the small hit. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the processing after the end of the small hit, the processing shifts to S275. If the control state flag is not determined to be the value (05H) indicating the processing after the end of the small hit, the process proceeds to S277.

  In S275, the main CPU 71 determines whether the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 0 or not. When the main CPU 71 determines that the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 0, the process proceeds to S276. When it is determined that the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is not 0, the present subroutine ends. In the first embodiment, the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 5000 msec, and the "V winning" is effective until 5000 msec elapses, so that the movable member is also movable.

  In S276, the main CPU 71 stops the operation of the movable member 57a and turns off the movable flag. When this process ends, the subroutine ends. In the first embodiment, when the small hit end residual ball monitoring time 5000 msec has elapsed, the moving flag is turned off, and the "small hitting game state" ends.

  In S277, the main CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening processing. If the control state flag is determined to be the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the process proceeds to S278. If the control state flag is not determined to be the value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S278, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a moving flag. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that there is no moving flag, the main CPU 71 ends this subroutine, and if it determines that there is a moving flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S279. When "V winning" is achieved for "small hit", the moving flag is on, so the process proceeds to S279, and when it is merely "big hit", this subroutine ends.

  In S279, the main CPU 71 performs a process of stopping the operation of the movable member 57a and turning off the movable flag. That is, in the “big hit game”, the movable member 57a does not need to operate. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Description of operation of sub-control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Sub-control main processing]
The sub-control main process will be described with reference to FIG. The sub-control circuit 200 receives various commands from the main control circuit 70 and performs various processes such as a display process. Among these processes, the control process according to the present invention will be described below.

  In S1011, an initialization process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of performing initialization settings according to power-on. For example, the power ON flag is turned on. If this process ends, the process moves to S1012. This initialization process can be performed according to the power on / off operation.

  In S1012, a random number update process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating a random number stored in the work RAM 203. If this process ends, the process moves to S1013.

  In S1013, a command analysis process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 70 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 210. This processing will be described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S1014.

  In S1014, an effect control process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect control of the mini game using the effect button 23 and the like. Further, a look-ahead reservation effect control or the like for the reserve ball may be executed by the above-mentioned so-called look-ahead effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S1014.

  In S1015, a display control process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying on the liquid crystal display device 13 to the display control circuit 205. In the display control circuit 205, a VDP (not shown) performs various image data such as identification design data, background image data, and effect image data based on data for displaying an effect image under the control of the sub CPU 201. Are read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. If this process ends, the process moves to S1016.

  In S1016, a sound / lamp control process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 executes a sound control process for controlling sound generated from the speaker 11 and a lamp control process for controlling light emission of various lamps (not shown). When this process ends, the process moves to the random number update process (S1012) again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main processing shown in FIG. 63 is being executed, the sub-control main processing may be interrupted and the timer interrupt processing may be executed. The timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

  In S1021, a process of saving the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S1022.

  In S1022, a timer update process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the timer stored in the work RAM 210. Specifically, processing for updating a timer for a round effect or the like is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S1023.

  In S1023, an effect button switch input detection process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of detecting whether or not the effect button switch 23a has been input by operating the effect button 23. For example, the operation of the effect button 23 for selecting a character during the big hit game is detected. If this process ends, the process moves to S1024. Although the effect button switch input detection processing is executed in the timer interruption processing, other interruptions may be performed. Note that the lottery pattern of the navigation may be changed according to the selected character. For example, the average number of provided navigations may be changed depending on the selected character.

  In S1024, a process for restoring the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of returning the value saved in S1021 to each register. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main processing shown in FIG. 63 is being executed, the sub-control main processing may be interrupted and the command interrupt processing may be executed. The command interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

  In S1031, a process of saving the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S1032.

  In S1032, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for storing the received command in the buffer. If this process ends, the process moves to S1033.

  In S1033, a process for restoring the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the value saved in S1031 to each register. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Command analysis processing]
The subroutine (command analysis processing) executed in S1013 of FIG. 63 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67.

  In S1041, a process of determining whether or not a command has been received is performed. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is stored in a predetermined buffer. If it is determined that there is a received command, the process proceeds to S1042, where the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a received command. If not, this subroutine ends.

  In S1042, a process is performed to determine whether or not the received command is a special symbol effect start command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the command is a special symbol effect start command, the process proceeds to S1043. If it is not determined that the command is a special symbol effect start command, the process proceeds to S1044.

  In S1043, the sub CPU 201 performs a special symbol effect start command reception process. The special symbol effect start command includes data related to a game state, a fluctuation pattern, a special symbol, a short time remaining, so-called navigation lottery, and the like. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1044, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a symbol stop command. If it is determined that the command is the symbol stop command, the process proceeds to S1045. If it is not determined that the command is the special symbol effect stop command, the process proceeds to S1046.

  In S1045, the sub CPU 201 performs a symbol stop command receiving process. For example, processing such as stopping the decorative symbol in synchronization with the stop of the special symbol under the control of the main control circuit 70 is performed. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1046, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a jackpot start command. If it is determined that the command is a jackpot start command, the process proceeds to S1047. If it is not determined that the command is a jackpot start command, the process proceeds to S1048.

  In S1047, the sub CPU 201 performs the process at the time of receiving the big hit start command. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1047, for example, upon receiving a big hit start command, a mini game or the like involving the operation of the effect button 23 by the player is executed before the "big hit game" is started. Details will be described later.

  In S1048, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a small hit start command. If it is determined that the command is a small hit start command, the process proceeds to S1049. If it is not determined that the command is a small hit start command, the process proceeds to S1050.

  In S1049, the sub CPU 201 performs a small hit start command reception process. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1050, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a V hit start command. If it is determined that the command is a V hit start command, the process proceeds to S1051, and if it is not determined that the command is a V hit start command, the process proceeds to S1052.

  In S1051, the sub CPU 201 performs a process at the time of receiving a start command per V. In S1051, for example, a navigation subtraction process by executing the navigation is performed. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1052, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a small hit end command. If it is determined that the command is a small hit end command, the process proceeds to S1053. If it is not determined that the command is a small hit end command, the process proceeds to S1054.

  In S1053, the sub CPU 201 performs a small hit end command reception process. In S1053, for example, an effect is performed according to whether or not the result of the execution of the navigation effect is “per V”. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1054, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a display command for opening a special winning opening. If it is determined that the command is a special winning opening display command, the process proceeds to S1055. If it is not determined that the command is a special winning opening display command, the process proceeds to S1056.

  In S1055, the sub CPU 201 performs a process at the time of receiving the special winning opening opening display command. In S1055, for example, a process of displaying the result of the mini game displayed in S1047 is performed. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1056, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the received command is a display command between rounds. If it is determined that the command is an inter-round display command, the process proceeds to S1057. If it is not determined that the command is an inter-round display command, the process proceeds to S1058.

  In S1057, the sub CPU 201 performs a process at the time of receiving the display command between rounds. The display command between rounds includes data on effects between rounds and the like. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1058, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a special symbol hit interval end display command. If it is determined that the command is the special symbol interval end display command, the process proceeds to S1059. If it is not determined that the command is the special symbol interval display command, the process proceeds to S1060.

  In S1059, the sub CPU 201 performs a process at the time of receiving a special symbol hit interval end display command. In S1059, processing such as performing a so-called navigation lottery is performed when the "time-saving gaming state" in the set game reaches a predetermined number. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1060, the sub CPU 201 performs a process at the time of receiving another command. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Processing when receiving special design effect start command]
A subroutine (special symbol effect start command reception processing) executed in S1043 of FIG. 66 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1061, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the gaming state is the “normal gaming state” or the “time reduction gaming state”. The “normal game state” is a “normal game state (sub-state) other than the“ first high probability state ”, the“ second high probability state ”, the“ third high probability state ”, and the“ fourth high probability state ”. ) ". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the “normal gaming state” or the “time saving gaming state”, the processing is shifted to S1062. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the “normal gaming state” or the “time saving gaming state”, the process moves to S1063.

  In S1062, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect in the “normal gaming state” or the “time saving gaming state”. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1063, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is the “first high probability state”. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the “first high probability state”, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1064. That is, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the first high probability state flag is on, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1064. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the “first high probability state”, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1065.

  In S1064, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect in the first high probability state. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1065, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the gaming state is the “second high probability state”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the “second high probability state”, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1066. When the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the “second high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1067.

  In S1066, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect in the second high probability state. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1067, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the gaming state is the “third high probability state”. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the “third high probability state”, the processing is shifted to S1068. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the “third high probability state”, the processing is shifted to S1069.

  In S1068, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect in the third high probability state. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1069, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect in the fourth high probability state. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Normal game state (sub) medium / time saving effect decision processing]
The subroutine (normal game state (sub) medium / time saving effect determination processing) executed in S1062 of FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG. The “normal game state” is a “normal game state (sub-state) other than the“ first high probability state ”, the“ second high probability state ”, the“ third high probability state ”, and the“ fourth high probability state ”. ) ".

  In S1071, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is a loss. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, when the variation pattern command is “83H00H” to “83H06H”, it is a loss. Note that, among them, the variation pattern commands “83H02H” to “83H04H” indicate a loss-reach. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process moves to S1072. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process moves to S1084.

  In S1072, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol and effect contents based on the fluctuation pattern command. If this process ends, the process moves to S1073.

  In S1073, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the above-described point addition effect is executed as described above with reference to FIG. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the point addition effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to S1074. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine to execute the point addition effect, the process proceeds to S1077.

  In S1074, the sub CPU 201 adds a point to a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. If this process ends, the process moves to S1075.

  In S1075, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the accumulated points are 100 points or more. The sub CPU 201 checks and determines the points accumulated in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the points are 100 points or more, the process moves to S1076. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the points are 100 points or more, the process proceeds to S1077.

  In S1076, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability flag and clears the accumulated points. Therefore, when the next game is performed, the state is shifted to the “first high probability state”. If this process ends, the process moves to S1077.

  In S1077, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the navigation acquisition effect. If the sub CPU 201 determines to execute the navigation acquisition effect, the process moves to S1078. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine to execute the navigation acquisition effect, the process proceeds to S1079. Here, as described above, when the lost super reach B of the navigation acquisition effect content shown in FIG. 37 is selected, in the “first high probability state”, a lottery in which navigation is provided with a probability of 1/10 is performed. Therefore, when it is determined that the loss super reach B is selected and the navigation is provided, in step S1077, the sub CPU 201 determines to execute the navigation acquisition effect.

  In S1078, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of navigation times (number) stored in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203, and sets a navigation acquisition effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S1079.

  In S1079, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the game number counter. The number-of-games counter counts the number of times the special symbol change display is executed (the number of special symbol games). If this process ends, the process moves to S1080.

  In S1080, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of special symbol games counted as the reference for executing the ceiling lottery is a predetermined number of games for performing the ceiling lottery as shown in FIG. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of special symbol games is the number of times of performing the ceiling lottery, the process moves to S1081. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of special symbol games is the number of times of performing the ceiling lottery, this subroutine ends.

  In S1081, the sub CPU 201 executes a ceiling lottery process. Specifically, the ceiling lottery is executed based on the ceiling lottery table shown in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S1082.

  In S1082, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling lottery executed in S1081 has been won. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery has been won, the process moves to S1083. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery has been won, the subroutine ends.

  In S1083, the sub CPU 201 sets the third high probability state flag, and clears the number of special symbol games that has been counted as the reference for executing the ceiling lottery. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1084, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is “small hit”. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, when the variation pattern command is “83H07H” to “83H14H”, “small hit” is set. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is “small hit”, the process moves to S1085. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1094.

  In S1085, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the employee is in the time reduction (“time reduction gaming state”). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is in the “time reduction gaming state”, the process proceeds to S1087. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the game is in the "time reduction gaming state", the process proceeds to S1086.

  In S1086, the sub CPU 201 sets a special effect. Note that in this case, the player has won the "small hit" despite not being in the "time saving game state", so that the above-mentioned so-called resurrection effect may be performed. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1087, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the navigation suppression flag is off and the stored number of navigations is one or more. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the navigation suppression flag is off and the stored number of navigations is one or more, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1089. On the other hand, if the navigation suppression flag is OFF and the stored navigation frequency is not determined to be 1 or more, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1088.

  Here, the navigation suppression flag is a flag that is set when there is a possibility that the player is performing a so-called “capture hit”. Specifically, as described above, the probability of entering the V winning opening 57 when entering the second large winning device 53 is about 2/3. In the first embodiment, the nails are arranged so that the winning rate to the second big prize winning device 53 is about 1/3 if the player makes a normal right-handed shot. 1 / 4.5. Therefore, it can be said that the expectation degree of "per V" during 50 times of the "time reduction game" is 99.9%. Some skilled players perform "capture hits" in which the firing handle 25 is operated such that the second large winning device 53 does not win a game ball and the second starting port 45 wins a game ball. I have. By this “capture hit”, a prize ball for winning a prize to the ball passage detector 43 is obtained, and the number of game balls on hand can be increased. In order to suppress such a capture hit, the navigation suppression flag is set when the "time saving game" is performed 50 times or more. When the navigation suppression flag is set, the navigation may be suppressed such that the navigation is not executed or the number of times of the navigation is subtracted even when the navigation is provided. In addition, instead of performing the navigation, it is also possible to perform an effect that prompts to stop the “capture hit”.

  In S1088, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect corresponding to a case where there is no navigation. As an effect corresponding to the case where there is no navigation, for example, a common effect different from navigation may be stored in the program ROM 202. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

In S1089, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of time saving games is 50. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of time-saving games is 50, the process proceeds to S1090. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of time saving games is 50, the process proceeds to S1091. Here, since the possibility that “time-saving game” has elapsed 50 times without performing the “capture hit” as described above is extremely low, the above-described determination is made in S1089.
In addition, even if the user is not an expert, the special figure type is successively won to the small hit (2) -3 or the small hit (2) -4 in the state where the navigation is provided, so that "V hit" is performed 50 times or more. In this case, the navigation may be suppressed if the "time-saving game state" has not been performed more than 50 times in order to avoid ending the "time saving game state" without performing the "v-motion". I have. At this time, it is determined whether or not the navigation is provided, and the number of wins of the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2 in the meantime is checked. For example, the number of wins is 10 or less. In such a case, it may be determined that the "hit per V" has not been achieved even though the vehicle was fired according to the navigation instead of the capture hit, so that a penalty at the time of the capture hit determination is not given. Here, as the penalty, for example, all accumulated navigation times may be deleted. Note that this criterion may be arbitrarily designed. Conversely, if the number of wins of the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2 is more than 10, it may be determined that a capture is being performed and a penalty may be given. Good.

  In S1090, the sub CPU 201 sets a navigation suppression flag, and sets an effect corresponding to a case where there is no navigation. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1091, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special map type is the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special map type is the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1092. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special map type is the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1093.

  In S1092, the sub CPU 201 sets the launch navigation effect. The launch navigation effect is an effect that prompts a player to launch a game ball. The effect contents will be described later (see FIG. 81). In addition, when the launch navigation effect is performed, if it is “per V”, the counted number of navigations is subtracted. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1093, the sub CPU 201 sets the launch suppression navigation effect. The launch suppression navigation effect is an effect that causes a player to suppress the emission of a game ball. The effect contents will also be described later (see FIG. 82). When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1094, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special figure type is special figure (2) -1. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (2) -1, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1095. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the drawing is the special drawing (2) -1, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1096.

  In S1095, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect depending on whether or not the game is in the "time reduction game state". For example, if it is not the "time reduction game state", a so-called resurrection effect may be set. In addition, in the case of the "time reduction game state", a special effect other than the resurrection effect may be set. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1096, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the employee is in the time reduction (“time reduction gaming state”). Specifically, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is in the “time reduction game state”, the process proceeds to S1097. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the game is in the “time reduction game state”, the process moves to S1098.

  In S1097, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect whose special figure type corresponds to special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -12. In this effect, as shown in FIG. 38, the variation pattern commands correspond to “83H29H” to “83H40H”. Since this effect is related to a jackpot during the working hours, it may be an effect that indicates that it is irregular. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1098, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -1. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern command is “83H15H”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1, the processing moves to S1099. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1100.

  In S1099, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative symbol is “777”, adds 3 to the number of navigation times, and sets a premium reach effect. In the first embodiment, the number of times of navigation is added by 3. However, for example, all the navigation flags may be set. In the set game, the navigation flag may be turned off until the "time saving game" reaches a predetermined number of times, so that the number of times of navigation is not increased more than necessary. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1100, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special figure type is special figure (1) -2. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern commands are “83H16H” to “83H18H”. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a “big hit with payout” jackpot. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1101. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1102.

  In S1101, the sub CPU 201 determines reach contents and decorative symbols by lottery according to the fluctuation pattern command, and sets an effect. With reference to the big hit navigation lottery table shown in FIG. 42, a big hit navigation lottery is performed according to the character selected by the player. The timing of this navigation lottery will be described later. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In step S1102, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special figure types are special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern commands are “83H19H” to “83H23H”. That is, it is determined whether or not a big hit of “timeout without payout” is achieved. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1103. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1104.

  In S1103, the sub CPU 201 determines reach contents and decorative symbols by lottery in accordance with the fluctuation pattern command, and sets an effect. For example, at any timing, an effect to notify that the game is in the “time reduction game state” is set. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In step S1104, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special figure type is special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -11. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern commands are “83H24H” to “83H27H”. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a “normal without payout” big hit. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -11, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1105. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -11, that is, if it determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -12, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to S1106. Transfer.

  In S1105, the sub CPU 201 determines reach contents and decorative symbols by lottery in accordance with the fluctuation pattern command, and sets an effect. Further, a first high probability state flag is set. For example, it is set so as to display the effect contents for notifying the transition from the “normal game state” to the “first high probability state”. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

In S1106, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a RAM clear flag. If the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a RAM clear flag, the process moves to S1109. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the RAM clear flag is present, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1107. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the RAM clear flag is present, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery with a probability of 1/2, and shifts the process to S1109 only when the winning is achieved, and shifts the process to S1107 when the winning is not achieved. It may be that. This makes the transition to the “fourth high probability state” more difficult. When the process of S1106 is performed, the RAM clear flag may be turned off.
When the power ON flag is used as the condition for shifting to the “fourth high probability state” instead of the RAM clear flag as described above, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the power ON flag is present in S1106. It should be fine.

  In S1107, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery process (fourth high probability state shift lottery) for shifting to the above-described “fourth high probability state”. For example, the winning probability may be 1/10. If this process ends, the process moves to S1108.

  In S1108, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery for shifting to the “fourth high probability state” has been won. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning has been achieved, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1109. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the winning has been achieved, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1110.

  In S1109, the sub CPU 201 sets the fourth high probability state flag, and sets an effect indicating that the lottery for shifting to the “fourth high probability state” has been won. For example, an image that gives an “all day navigation ticket” may be displayed. Note that the fourth high-probability state transition lottery may not be performed. In other words, the state may shift to the “fourth high probability state” only when the special drawing (1) -12 is won while the RAM clear flag is set. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1110, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect indicating that the lottery for shifting to the “fourth high probability state” has not been won. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[First high probability state effect determination process]
The subroutine (effect determination processing in the first high-probability state) executed in S1064 of FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1121, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is a loss. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process moves to S1122. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process moves to S1126.

  In S1122, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol and effect contents based on the fluctuation pattern command. Unlike the “normal game state” and the “second high probability state” in the “first high probability state”, there is no point addition. If this process ends, the process moves to S1123.

  In S1123, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the first high-probability medium game count. The number of games during the first high probability, which is the number of games in the “first high probability state”, is stored in the work RAM 203. When this process ends, the process moves to S1124.

  In S1124, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the first high-probability medium number of games is 20. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the first high-probability game count is 20, the processing is shifted to S1125. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of games during the first high-probability game is 20, the subroutine is terminated. In the first embodiment, when the number of games in the “first high-probability state” reaches 20 times, the transition to the “second high-probability state” is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the number of games in the “first high-probability state” reaches 20 times, a drop lottery in which the “first high-probability state” falls to the “normal game state” may be performed.

  In S1125, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high-probability state end effect, and sets the second high-probability state flag. Thus, after the “first high probability state” ends, the state becomes the “second high probability state”. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1126, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a “big hit with payout” jackpot. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1127. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1128. Here, the special figure (2) does not change. Also, when it is determined that the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2, the game is in the "big hit game state", and then the state shifts to the "time saving game state". If the game has been performed a predetermined number of times (100 times), the game shifts to the “normal game state”.

  In S1127, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative symbol is “777” corresponding to the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2, adds 3 to the number of navigation times, and performs 3 times in the set game. Set the direction as a whole navigation where both directions are performed. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1128, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure types are special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of “time saving without payout”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1129. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1130.

  In S1129, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets a special effect as all the above-mentioned navigations. At this time, since there is no big hit, an effect that does not indicate that it is a "big hit" is performed. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1130, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high-probability state continuation effect, and clears the number of games during the first high-probability state. In other words, if the special figure type is special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -12, that is, if it is a big hit of "normal without payout", the state again becomes the "first high probability state". Further, as the effect in this case, a content indicating that the “first high probability state” is continued is displayed. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Production decision processing in the second high probability state]
The subroutine executed in S1066 in FIG. 68 (the effect determination processing in the second high-probability state) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1141, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process moves to S1142. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process moves to S1149.

  In S1142, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the stop symbol and the effect contents based on the fluctuation pattern command. If this process ends, the process moves to S1143.

  In S1143, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding points. In this point addition, the points according to the selected variation pattern are added with reference to the point addition table shown in FIG. In the “second high probability state”, if the lottery result in S1141 is a loss, points are always added. If this process ends, the process moves to S1144.

  In S1144, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the accumulated points are 100 points or more. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the points are 100 points or more, the process moves to S1145. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the points are 100 points or more, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1146.

  In S1145, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability state flag and turns off the second high probability state flag. In addition, clear points. When this process ends, the subroutine ends. Here, in the first embodiment, the points are cleared. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to add “−100” without clearing the points and leave the points “0” or more. It is possible.

  In S1146, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the second high-probability medium game count. The number of games during the second high probability, which is the number of games in the “second high probability state”, is stored in the work RAM 203. If this process ends, the process moves to S1147.

  In S1147, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the second high-probability medium number of games is 10. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the second high-probability medium game count is 10, the processing is shifted to S1148. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the second high-probability medium number of games is 10, the subroutine ends.

  In S1148, the sub CPU 201 sets the second high probability state end effect, and turns off the second high probability state flag. When this process ends, the subroutine ends. Thus, after the “second high probability state” ends, the state shifts to the “first high probability state”.

  In S1149, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not a big hit with a time reduction. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1150. This subroutine ends. Further, the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -7, that is, the special figure (1) -8 to the special figure (1) -12. Then, the process is moved to S1151. In the case of the special figure (1) -12, the process may proceed to S1107.

  In S1150, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol and effect contents based on the variation pattern command. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1151, the sub CPU 201 sets a first high probability state entry effect and sets a first high probability state flag. Specifically, the effect may be such that it is possible to recognize that the state transitions to the first high probability state. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Third high probability state effect determination process]
The subroutine (effect determination processing in the third high-probability state) executed in S1068 of FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1161, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is a loss. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process moves to S1162. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process moves to S1163.

  In S1162, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol and effect contents based on the fluctuation pattern command. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1163, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a “big hit with payout” jackpot. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1164. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1166. Note that the special figure (2) does not change.

  In S1164, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative symbol is “777”, adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets an effect. When this process ends, the process moves to S1165.

  In S1165, the sub CPU 201 turns off the third high probability state flag. This subroutine ends. In this way, when a big hit with "time reduction" is reached, all the times in the set game are set to the all-navi state where the navigation is performed in the game. On the other hand, the ceiling state ends.

  In S1166, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not a big hit of “timeout without payout” is achieved. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1167. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the special figure type is special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1). It is determined to be −12, and the process moves to S1169.

  In S1167, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets a special effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S1168.

  In S1168, the sub CPU 201 turns off the third high probability state flag. This subroutine ends. Also here, when a big hit with "time saving" is reached, the navigation system is in an all navigation state in which navigation is performed in all the time saving games in the set game, while the ceiling state is ended. The ceiling state may be ended only when the special figure type is the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2.

  In S1169, the sub CPU 201 sets the third high-probability state continuation effect. Here, the state is determined to be a big hit without “time saving”, and the ceiling state does not end. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Fourth high probability state effect determination process]
The subroutine executed in S1069 in FIG. 68 (the effect determination processing in the fourth high-probability state) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1171, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is a loss. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process moves to S1172. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process moves to S1173.

  In S1172, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol and effect contents based on the fluctuation pattern command. When this process ends, the subroutine ends. The “fourth high probability state” is cleared by performing initialization processing such as RAM clearing and power-off. Otherwise, it will not be cleared.

  In S1173, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a “big hit with payout” jackpot. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1174. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1175. Here, the special figure (2) does not change.

  In S1174, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative symbol is “777”, adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets an effect. That is, a so-called all-navigation is performed at a jackpot with "time saving", and this state does not end. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1175, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not a big hit of “timeout without payout” is achieved. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1176. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1177.

  In S1176, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets a special effect. Here, the entire navigation state does not end. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1177, the sub CPU 201 sets the fourth high probability state continuation effect. As described above, in the case of the big hit without the “time saving”, the “fourth high probability state” does not end. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Process at receiving big hit start command]
The subroutine (processing at the time of receiving the big hit command) executed in S1047 of FIG. 66 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1181, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is a hit in the “normal gaming state” or the “second high probability state”. Here, it is determined whether it is a big hit of all navigations. Here, the “normal gaming state” is, as described above, “a first high-probability state”, a “second high-probability state”, a “third high-probability state”, and “a fourth high-probability state”. Normal game state (sub) ". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is a hit in the “normal gaming state” or the “second high probability state”, the processing is shifted to S1182. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is a hit in the “normal gaming state” or the “second high-probability state”, the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a hit in all navigations and shifts the processing to S1190.

  In step S <b> 1182, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hit is a hit given after a reduction in working hours. If the sub CPU 201 determines that it is time to give a time saving, the process moves to S1183. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the time saving has been given, the process proceeds to S1189.

  In S1183, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of obtaining a random number value for the navigation lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S1184.

  In S1184, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hit is a hit with "a payout". That is, it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred in the special map (1) -1 or the special map (1) -2. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hit is a hit of “with a payout”, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1185. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the hit is a hit of “a payout”, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1186.

  In S1185, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect corresponding to the character selected by the player using the effect button 23. If a character is not selected, an effect corresponding to the initially set character is set. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1186, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of executing a navigation lottery for obtaining a random number value by using a payout-less time-saving navigation lottery table as shown in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S1187.

  In S1187, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding the number of times of navigation based on the result of the navigation lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S1188.

  In S1188, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect based on the remaining number of navigations. For example, it may be an effect that draws a fortune for which the remaining number of navigations is written. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1189, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect indicating that it is a hit without time saving. For example, it is sufficient if the notification effect is such that a fortune is drawn in which the content suggesting the transition to the “first high probability state” is written. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1190, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit during the working hours. Here, the big hit during the working hours is a 5-round big hit according to the special map (1) and the special map (2) or a small hit according to the special map (2). Since the V hit start command described later is transmitted, the big hit start command is not transmitted. In addition, even in the case of V hit, a big hit start command may be transmitted instead of the V hit start command. In this case, it is desirable to include the data indicating the process of the jackpot in the jackpot start command so that the process of the jackpot on the sub-board can be specified. Therefore, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the five rounds of the special figure (1) and the special figure (2) have been hit, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1191. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is a big hit in the “normal game state” and a big hit during the time reduction, the process moves to S1192.

  In S1191, the sub CPU 201 sets a time reduction middle and big hit effect. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1192, the sub CPU 201 sets a jackpot effect indicating that all navigations have been confirmed. Here, as described above, the all navigation means that the navigation is executed in all the "time saving gaming states" during the set game. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Process at the time of receiving a start command per V]
A subroutine (processing at the time of receiving a V-start command) executed in S1051 of FIG. 66 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1201, the sub CPU 201 sets the V-hit effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect to be performed when the game ball wins the V winning opening 57 and "wins". For example, an image of a fanfare may be displayed.

  In S1202, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the navigation has been performed. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the navigation has been performed, the process moves to S1203. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the navigation has been executed, the process moves to S1207.

  In S1203, the sub CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the number of times of navigation. If this process ends, the process moves to S1204.

  In S1204, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type wins the V prize with the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2 as a trigger. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type has won the V prize triggered by the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2, that is, if it is determined to be "V hit", the process proceeds to S1205. Transfer. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type has won the V prize triggered by the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2, that is, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is “V hit”, S1206 Transfer processing to

  In S1205, the sub CPU 201 sets a winning success effect. The successful effect is, specifically, an effect performed when a “big hit” of 16R is won by performing a firing operation according to the navigation. For example, an effect as shown in FIG. 81 described later may be performed. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1206, the sub CPU 201 sets an avoidance failure effect. The avoidance failure effect is, specifically, an effect performed when a “big hit” of 2R is won by performing a firing operation that does not follow the navigation. For example, an effect as shown in FIG. 82 described later may be performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S1207.

  In S1207, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type has won the V prize with the small hit (2) -3 or the small hit (2) -4 as a trigger. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type has won the V prize with the small hit (2) -3 or the small hit (2) -4 as an opportunity, that is, determines that the winning is "V hit", the process proceeds to S1208. Transfer. If the sub CPU 201 does not judge that the special figure type has won the V-prize with the small hit (2) -3 or the small hit (2) -4 as an opportunity, that is, does not judge that it is “V hit”, End the subroutine.

  In S1208, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of times per 2R. The number of times per 2R is the number of times that two rounds of “big hit games” are won. If this process ends, the process moves to S1209.

  In S1209, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times per 2R is three out of three times in the set game except the so-called first hit. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of times per 2R is 3, the process moves to S1210. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of times per 2R is three, the present subroutine ends.

  In S1210, the sub CPU 201 clears the number of times per 2R by adding 1 to the number of times of navigation. When this process ends, the subroutine ends. In the first embodiment, it is possible to set a winning failure effect in S1205 and to set an avoidance success effect in S1206. Of course, it is also possible to set these effects additionally.

[Small hit end command reception processing]
The subroutine (processing at the time of receiving the small hit end command) executed in S1053 of FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1221, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the launch navigation effect has been executed. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the launch navigation effect has been executed, the process moves to S1222. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the launch navigation effect has been executed, the process moves to S1223.

  In S1222, the sub CPU 201 sets a winning failure effect. The prize-winning effect is an effect that is executed when the launch navigation effect has been executed but the “V hit” has not been performed. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1223, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the firing suppression navigation effect has been executed. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the launch suppression navigation effect has been executed, the process moves to S1224. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the firing suppression navigation effect has been executed, the process moves to S1225.

  In S1224, the sub CPU 201 sets the avoidance success effect. The avoidance success effect is an effect that is executed when the “fire hit” does not occur when the launch suppression navigation effect is executed. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1225, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of notifying the result of the case where the player has won the V winning opening 57. For example, if the player has won the V-prize mouth 57 and has won two rounds of "big hit game", a notification indicating that the game is good for the player may be made. Also, for example, if the player has won the V winning opening 57 and has won the "big hit game" of 16 rounds, a notification indicating that it was disappointing for the player will be given. I just need. When this process ends, the subroutine ends. It is also possible to set a winning success effect in S1222 and set an avoidance failure effect in S1224, and it is also possible to additionally set these effects.

  Therefore, when the launch navigation effect or the fire suppression effect set as the advantageous information for the player is displayed, depending on whether or not “hit V”, as a result display, “winning success effect”, “winning failure” The corresponding effect among the "effect", the "successful avoidance effect", and the "effect avoidance effect" is displayed.

[Processing at the time of receiving the display command during opening of the special winning opening]
The subroutine (processing at the time of receiving the special winning opening display command) executed in S1055 of FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1231, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -2. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1232. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is the special figure (1) -2, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1239.

  In S1232, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the big hit is in the “normal game state” or the “second high probability state”. Here, the “normal gaming state” is a “normal gaming state (sub) other than the“ first high probability state ”, the“ second high probability state ”, the“ third high probability state ”, and the“ fourth high probability state ”. ) ". If the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a big hit in the “normal gaming state” or the “second high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1233. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is a big hit in the “normal gaming state” or the “second high probability state”, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1239.

  In S1233, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the first round of “big hit game” is being executed. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the first round of “big hit game” is being executed, the process moves to S1234. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the first round of “big hit game” is being executed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1236.

  In S1234, the sub CPU 201 performs the jackpot-based navigation lottery based on the selected character and the navigation lottery random number using the jackpot-based navigation lottery table shown in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S1235.

  In S1235, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect based on the lottery result. When this process ends, the subroutine ends. Here, for example, when the navigation is to be added in the navigation lottery, an effect is set such that the selected character wins in a battle game or the like. Such an effect is not necessarily required to be performed in the first round, and can be set to be performed in an arbitrary round.

  In S1236, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the round is to notify the lottery result. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the round is to notify the lottery result, the process moves to S1237. In the first embodiment, the number of rounds for informing the lottery result is five, but the number is not limited to five, and another round may be used. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the round is to notify the lottery result, the process moves to S1238.

  In S1237, the sub CPU 201 sets a lottery result notification effect. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1238, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect according to the set effect. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1239, as in S1238, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect according to the set effect. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Processing at the time of receiving special symbol end interval command]
The subroutine (processing at the time of receiving a special symbol-period end command) executed in S1059 of FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1241, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the “big hit” has been won during the time reduction. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the "big hit" has been won during the time reduction, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1242. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the "big hit" has been won during the working hours, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1249.

  In S1242, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the last “time saving game state” during the set game. If the sub CPU 201 determines that it is the last “time saving game state” during the set game, the process is shifted to S1243. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the game is the last “time saving game state” during the set game, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1246.

  In S1243, the sub CPU 201 performs the navigation lottery according to the number of “big hits” in the special symbol game during the set game, using the set game end-time navigation lottery table shown in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S1244.

In S1244, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect based on the lottery result. If this process ends, the process moves to S1245.
In S1245, the sub CPU 201 sets a game state to be shifted to after the set game ends. Specifically, if the game state before shifting to the set game is “first high probability state” to “third high probability state” and “normal game state (sub)”, “first high probability state” "State" is set. If the game state before the transition to the set game is the “fourth high probability state”, the “fourth high probability state” is set.
In addition, even after shifting to the “third high probability state” which is the ceiling state, a state in which a predetermined number of games have not been won in the “big hit” of the special map (1) -1 to the special map (1) -7 In each case, if a ceiling lottery is performed, and if this ceiling lottery is won, the “third high probability state” can be stored and stored in the configuration in which the “third high probability state” is stored. After the end of the set game, the state is shifted to the “third high probability state” again (the “third high probability state” is set).

  In step S1246, the sub CPU 201 checks the number of navigations stored in the work RAM 203 and determines whether there is a remaining number. When determining that there is a remaining number, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1247. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that there is a remaining number, the process moves to S1248.

  In S1247, the sub CPU 201 sets the next navigation effect. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1248, the sub CPU 201 sets the next navi-less effect. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S1249, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect according to the destination of the gaming state and the presence or absence of the navigation in response to the determination that the winning is not the big hit during the "time saving gaming state". When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Direction display example]
An example of the navigation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. 81 is a view showing an effect per 16R of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment (see S1221 in FIG. 78). FIG. 82 is a view showing an effect per 2R of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment (see S1223 in FIG. 78).

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs navigation when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a set game. As described above, the navigation means the "big hit" when the "small hit" is won in the "time saving game state" and the "big hit" is obtained in the open state of the second big winning device 53 due to the small hit. This is a notification that indicates the number of rounds of "games".

  In the "time saving game state", after the game ball wins in the second starting port 45 and "small hit" is determined, the navigation is executed during the variable time. That is, the navigation is executed several seconds before the stop of the fluctuation. The navigation may be displayed as an image in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. First, referring to FIG. 81, an example of a navigation in a case where it has been determined at the time of winning a “small hit” that a “big hit game” of 16 rounds is performed when “win” is achieved. Will be described. The special map type at this time is small hit (2) -1 or small hit (2) -2.

  When the "small hit" is won, the launch navigation effect is executed before the blade member 53a of the second big winning device 53 operates. For example, an image is displayed in the display area 13a as shown in FIG. Specifically, a sight of the rifle and a bird are seen through the sight, and an image is displayed as if the rifle was aimed at the bird. Then, the character "hit!" Is also displayed in the display area 13a. Thereby, the player can recognize that the "big hit game" of 16 rounds will be performed when "V hit" is achieved.

  The player recognizes this image and continues firing without stopping firing of the game ball. At this time, when a game ball wins in the V winning opening 57, a successful effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), an image is displayed as if a rifle bullet hit a bird. Then, the character "hit!" Is also displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the “big hit game” of 16 rounds is started.

  In addition, if the launching navigation effect is executed and the player continues to launch the game ball, but the game ball does not win the V winning opening 57 in the “small hit game”, a failure effect is generated. Be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (c), an image is displayed in which a bird comes off the sight and escapes. Then, the character "losing" is also displayed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 82, when "V hit" is reached, two rounds of "big hit game" are performed, and when the "small hit" is won, the navigation An example will be described. The special map type at this time is small hit (2) -3 or small hit (2) -4.

  When the "small hit" is won, the firing suppression navigation effect is executed before the blade member 53a of the second big winning device 53 operates. For example, an image is displayed in the display area 13a as shown in FIG. Specifically, an image is displayed in which the sight of the rifle and the bomb are visible through the sight, and the rifle is aimed at the bomb. Then, the character "Do not hit!" Is also displayed in the display area 13a. Thus, the player can recognize that two rounds of the "big hit game" will be performed when the "V hit" is achieved.

  The player recognizes this image and stops firing the game ball. However, when the game ball cannot be stopped properly, there is a possibility that the game ball wins at the V winning opening 57. If a game ball wins in the V winning opening 57, an avoidance failure effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), a bomb is hit by a rifle bullet, and an image of a blasting explosion is displayed. Then, the character "Fail!" Is also displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that two rounds of "big hit game" are started.

  In addition, when the firing suppression navigation effect is executed and the player stops firing of the game ball to prevent the game ball from winning in the V winning opening 57, a successful avoidance effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), an image is displayed in which the bomb comes off the sight and disappears. Then, the character "danger avoidance" is also displayed.

  In addition, during the set game, there is a case where the ball is hit into the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 to win the "big hit" of five rounds. In such a case, it is sufficient that the effect by the image is executed in the display area 13a. In such a case, although not shown, for example, in the display area 13a, a sight of a rifle and a bird can be seen through the sight, and an image in which the bird hits a tree and falls is displayed. It should just be displayed. Thereby, the player can recognize that the “big hit game” of five rounds is performed instead of the “hit per V”.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a configuration in which the player becomes advantageous or disadvantageous according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and by satisfying a predetermined condition, the number of rounds is reduced. Information (navigating) that suggests can be performed. Thereby, the player can play the game in an advantageous situation by recognizing the notification.
When the navigation is not provided, for example, it is preferable that “?” Is displayed over the sight, so that it is not possible to know which round “big hit game” by “V hit”. In addition, when "?" Is displayed through the sight and "V hit" is reached, when a "big hit game" of 16 rounds is started, a bird is displayed and 2 rounds are displayed. If the “big hit game” is to be started, the result may be left to the player by displaying an explosion.

[Various notification processing by payout control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the payout CPU 301 of the payout control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Power on process]
First, the power-on process by the payout CPU 301 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the power-on process in the first embodiment. The power-on process is a process that is started when the power is turned on. When this power-on processing is started, the payout CPU 301 first sets a stack pointer, an interrupt mode, and an interrupt vector.

  First, the payout CPU 301 performs an input / output port setting process (S301). Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the power interruption is detected (S302). In this process, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the power interruption detection signal is at H level (high level).

  In S302, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power interruption detection signal is at the H level (YES in S302), the payout CPU 301 determines that the power interruption detection state is present, and performs the process of S302.

  On the other hand, in S302, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power-off detection signal is not at the H level (NO in S302), the payout CPU 301 determines that the power-off detection state is not present, and executes the write permission process of the RAM 303. Perform (S303).

  In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs various initial setting processes such as a process of initializing a work area of the RAM 303, in addition to the process of permitting writing in the RAM 303.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, that is, whether the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 33) is on (S304).

  In S304, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is ON (in the case of YES determination in S304), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S310 described later.

  On the other hand, in S304, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not turned on (NO in S304), the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not there is a power cutoff flag (S305). In this process, the payout CPU 301 checks the power interruption detection flag.

  In S305, when the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no power interruption detection flag (NO in S305), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S310 described later. On the other hand, in S305, when the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a power interruption detection flag (when S305 is YES), the payout CPU 301 calculates a work damage check value (S306). In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a damage check on the work area in the RAM 303 and calculates a work damage check value.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 executes an error detection process such as a parity check or a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check), and sets a checksum obtained as an execution result as a work damage check value.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the work damage check value is normal (S307). In S307, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the work damage check value is not normal (NO in S305), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S310 described later.

  On the other hand, in S307, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the work damage check value is normal (YES in S307), the payout CPU 301 performs an initial process at the time of power restoration (S308).

  That is, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not turned on, the power cutoff detection flag is present, and the work damage check value is normal, the payout CPU 301 sets the state before the power is turned off. It is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be returned to the user at a later time, and based on data stored in the RAM 303, an initialization process at the time of power recovery is performed.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs a security ball monitoring initial setting process (S309). In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs an initial setting for determining whether 15 game balls are secured in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B, respectively.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 sets initial values in the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B, respectively. In the first embodiment, assuming that one game ball has a fall time of 130 ms, 1950 times corresponding to the fall time of 15 game balls of 1950 ms (= 130 ms × 15) is performed by the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B. The initial value of.

  Further, the payout CPU 301 sets initial values in the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B, respectively. In the first embodiment, based on the fall time 1950 ms (1950 times) of the 15 game balls, 2000 ms is set as the time assumed to complete the security of the 15 game balls by the first and second security ball timers 306 </ b> A and 306 </ b> A. The initial value of 306B is used.

  After the processing of S309, the payout CPU 301 returns the value of the program counter to the address before the power interruption. More specifically, the payout CPU 301 ends the power-on process, and continues to execute the program that was being executed when the power-on process was executed.

  If S304 is YES, S305 is NO, or S307 is NO, the payout CPU 301 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be returned to the state before the power was turned off. Executes the processing when is input.

  More specifically, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303 (S310), and performs an initial process when the power is turned on (S311). In this process, the payout CPU 301 resets the cause of the overpayment and the stoppage of the payout motor abnormality. At this time, the overpayment prescribed number (10) retry count described later is also initialized.

  In addition, in a state where a stop factor due to a ball shortage occurs, a display by a payout state notification display device 178 described later is turned off for two seconds so as not to be influenced by the accumulation state of the secured balls in the ball supply passage 171.

  More specifically, when a predetermined initialization operation is performed when the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped due to the above-described stop factor, the payout state notification display device 178 performs two steps until the determination of the out of ball is completed. During the second, the result of the determination is not displayed.

  Thus, for example, it is determined that the ball has run out after a predetermined initialization operation, and when it is determined that the ball is normal, the notification by the payout state notification display device 178 can be prevented from being performed. As a result, unnecessary notification can be eliminated. Here, the predetermined initialization operation means, for example, that the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed.

  In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpays, or the work area of the error information portion can be performed without turning on the power again. One work area including three work areas, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs the above-described secured ball monitoring initial setting process (S312), and executes the main process (S313).

  When the power is turned off as compared with the above-described power-on, the use register, the interrupt state, and the stack pointer are saved, the excitation data of the payout motor 174 is forcibly set to 0, and the current is switched to a low current.

  If the power is cut during the payout operation, it is possible to assume that the game data may not be at the origin (the number of steps is a multiple of 4). To prevent Alternatively, the game ball is forcibly dropped at the time of power interruption.

  When the game ball is forcibly dropped at the time of a power failure, the power failure process may be waited or interrupted for a time necessary for the game ball to fall, and the execution period may be extended.

  Further, instead of forcibly dropping the game ball, control may be performed so that the game ball falls freely. In this case, in order to take a sufficient time required to detect a free-falling game ball, the power interruption process may be waited or interrupted, and the execution period may be extended.

[Main processing]
Next, the main processing performed in S313 during the power-on processing (see FIG. 83) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main processing in the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the system timer of the payout CPU 301 is 4 or less (S321). In S321, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the system timer is not 4 or less (when S321 is NO), the payout CPU 301 returns the process to S321.

  On the other hand, in S321, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the system timer is 4 or less (when S321 is YES), the payout CPU 301 subtracts “4” from the system timer (S322). In this process, the payout CPU 301 initializes a system timer.

  That is, if the system timer is a timer that counts every 1 ms, the payout CPU 301 executes the processing of S323 and later described every 4 ms by executing S321 and S322.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 updates the values of all timers used in the main processing (S323). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a ball lending control process (S324). In this process, when the lending operation unit 151 is operated, the payout CPU 301 manages game balls and creates a command to be transmitted to the card unit 150, and receives a ball lending command transmitted from the card unit 150. When it does, it manages the number of game balls to rent.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a prize ball control process (S325). In this process, the payout CPU 301 pays the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, the general winning ports 51, 52, the first big winning device 54, and the second big winning device 53 when the game ball wins. Manage outgoing game balls.

  Next, on condition that an error has occurred in the payout control circuit 300, the payout CPU 301 controls the payout state notification display device 178 so as to display that the error has occurred in the payout control circuit 300 (S326).

[System timer interrupt processing (1 ms)]
Next, a system timer interrupt process by the payout CPU 301 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 interrupts the main process at a predetermined cycle and executes the system timer interrupt process even during the execution of the main process shown in FIG. 84 described above.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 executes a system timer interrupt process in response to a clock pulse generated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 millisecond) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) in the payout control circuit 300. Execute.

  First, the payout CPU 301 receives a detection command (signal) of the main control circuit 70 and various sensors, and executes a command reception process of analyzing the received command at the same time (S331).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 updates the values of all the timers (for example, the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B) used in the system timer interrupt processing (S332). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes the later-described secured ball detection process (see FIG. 86) (S333).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a below-described secured ball absence detection process (see FIG. 87) (S334). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 executes a count switch detection process (see FIG. 88) described later (S335). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a motor start waiting process (see FIG. 89) described later (S336).

  Then, finally, the payout CPU 301 executes a command transmission process of transmitting a command indicating payout error information of the payout control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 70 (S337). For example, when a signal indicating that the lower plate is full is input from the lower plate full switch 179, the payout CPU 301 sends a payout error information command indicating that the lower plate is full to the main control circuit. 70.

  However, for the specified time (for example, 6 seconds) immediately after the power is turned on, the main control circuit 70 holds the activation waiting time of the sub-control circuit 200. Do not send commands.

  Here, when the power is turned on, the history information regarding the payout error information is cleared. Even if the lower plate is full before the power interruption and the lower plate full state is released by discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 during the power interruption, etc. Information indicating that the full state has been released is not transmitted. However, the dispensing motor abnormality or the excessive dispensing abnormality that is released when the power is turned on again is initialized when the power is restored.

[Detection processing with security ball]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the security ball presence detection process performed in S333 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the security ball presence detection process in the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (S341). In S341, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (if S341 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sends the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that replenishment is not necessary, and the process proceeds to S347.

  On the other hand, in S341, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is not 0 (NO in S341), the payout CPU 301 sets the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that replenishment is necessary, and it is determined whether or not the first 15-ball security switch 172A is in the ON state (S342).

  In S342, if the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball security switch 172A is not in the ON state (if S342 is NO), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number of balls in the first ball supply passage 171A (the embodiment). In (1), it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no secured ball, and the process proceeds to S347.

  On the other hand, in S342, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball security switch 172A is in the ON state (if S342 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number of balls in the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that (in the first embodiment) 15 game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a secured ball, and the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is decremented by "1" (S343).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (S344). In S344, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is not 0 (NO in S344), the payout CPU 301 supplies the game balls to the first ball supply passage 171A. Is determined to be necessary, and the process proceeds to S347.

  On the other hand, in S344, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (when S344 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays the game to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that replenishment of the ball is not necessary, and 1 is set to the first falling ball confirmation flag (S345).

  Here, the first falling ball confirmation flag is set to “1” when it is not necessary to supply game balls to the first ball supply passage 171A, that is, when there is a collateral ball, the first ball supply passage This flag is set to “0” when it is necessary to supply game balls to 171A, that is, when there is no secured ball.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 0 to the first stop factor flag (S346). Here, the first stop factor flag is a flag in which “0” or “1” is set according to whether or not there is a factor (stop factor) for stopping the payout of game balls by the prize ball case unit 170. Yes, particularly, regarding the payout of game balls accumulated (secured) in the first ball supply passage 171A, a flag that is set to “1” when there is a stop factor and is set to “0” when there is no stop factor. It is.

  In the process of S346, it is determined in S344 that replenishment of the game balls to the first ball supply passage 171A has been completed and a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of game balls has been accumulated. Therefore, 0 is set to the first stop cause flag in the sense of releasing the stoppage of the ball which is the stop cause. Note that, as will be described later, there are various stop factors other than the out of ball. Here, a broken ball is cited as an example.

Next, when S341 is determined as YES, when S342 is determined as NO, or when S344 is determined as NO, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (S347). ).

  In S347, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (if S347 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sends the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that replenishment is not necessary, and the security ball presence detection process ends.

  On the other hand, in S347, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is not 0 (NO in S347), the payout CPU 301 sets the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. Is determined to be necessary, and it is determined whether or not the second 15-ball security switch 172B is ON (S348).

  In S348, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball security switch 172B is not in the ON state (when S348 is NO), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number of balls in the second ball supply passage 171B (the embodiment). In (1), it is determined that 15) game balls have not been accumulated, that is, there is no secured ball, and the secured ball presence detection process ends.

  On the other hand, in S348, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball security switch 172B is in the ON state (when S348 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number of balls in the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that 15 (in the first embodiment) game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a secured ball, and the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is decremented by "1" (S349).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (S350). In S350, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is not 0 (NO in S350), the payout CPU 301 supplies the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. Is determined to be necessary, and the security ball presence detection process ends.

  On the other hand, in S350, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (when S350 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays the game to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that it is not necessary to supply a ball, and 1 is set to the second falling ball confirmation flag (S351).

  Here, the second falling ball confirmation flag is set to “1” when it is not necessary to supply game balls to the second ball supply passage 171B, that is, when there is a collateral ball, the second ball supply passage This flag is set to "0" when it is necessary to supply game balls to 171B, that is, when there is no secured ball.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the second stop factor flag to 0 (S352), and ends the secured ball presence detection process. Here, the second stop factor flag is a flag in which “0” or “1” is set according to whether or not there is a factor (stop factor) for stopping the payout of gaming balls by the prize ball case unit 170. Yes, particularly, regarding the payout of game balls accumulated (secured) in the second ball supply passage 171B, a flag that is set to “1” when there is a stop factor and set to “0” when there is no stop factor. It is.

  In the processing of S352, it is determined in S350 that the supply of the game balls to the second ball supply passage 171B has been completed and a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of game balls has been accumulated. From this, 0 is set to the second stop factor flag in the sense that the out of ball which is the stop factor is released.

  In this manner, in the security ball presence detection process, the security ball counter and the 15-ball security switch are used to determine the presence or absence of a security ball, determine whether to supply game balls, and determine the stop factor (for the payout motor, sprocket, or payout). Since it is possible to determine whether or not to release the security ball, it is possible to more accurately manage the secured ball in the payout.

[Detection processing without security ball]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the security ball absence detection process performed in S334 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a security ball absence detection process according to the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is 0 (S361). In S361, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is not 0 (if S361 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is refilling the first ball supply passage 171A with game balls. Is determined, and the process proceeds to S371.

  On the other hand, in S361, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is 0 (when S361 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays the game to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the replenishment of the ball has been completed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (S362).

  In S362, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 (in the case of YES determination in S362), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number of balls in the first ball supply passage 171A (the In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are stored, that is, there is a secured ball, and it is determined whether or not the first 15-ball secured switch 172A is in the OFF state (S363).

  Here, in S361 and S362, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” each time the system timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 85 is performed every 1 ms, that is, the updated value of the first secured ball timer 306A and the secured value. In S343 of the ball presence detection process (see FIG. 86), "1" is subtracted, that is, the value of the updated first secured ball counter 305A is compared, and based on the comparison result, the game ball of the first sprocket 173A is used. It is determined whether or not the payout is prohibited.

  For example, when S361 is a YES determination and S362 is a YES determination, both the value of the first secured ball timer 306A and the value of the first secured ball counter 305A are 0 as the predetermined values. Therefore, when 2000 ms, which is the initial value of the first secured ball timer 306A set as a time sufficient to pay out 15 game balls from the ball tank 161, has elapsed, the first secured ball counter is set. This means that 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of 305A, has elapsed.

  Since 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of the first secured ball counter 305A, is a value that is not subtracted unless the first 15-ball secured switch 172A detects a game ball, when 2000 ms has elapsed (0 ), The initial value of the first secured ball counter 305A becomes 1950 times (1950 ms), and the first ball supply passage 171A is supplied with 15 game balls. Is guaranteed.

  On the other hand, when S361 is YES and S362 is NO, when the value of the first secured ball timer 306A becomes 0, the value of the first secured ball counter 305A becomes 0. Not that.

  That is, when 2000 ms as the initial value of the first secured ball timer 306A has elapsed, 1950 times (1950 ms) as the initial value of the first secured ball counter 305A has not elapsed. Accordingly, it can be estimated that there is a time during which the first 15-ball security switch 172A does not detect a game ball before 2000 ms elapses, that is, a time when the supply of the game ball is interrupted. Therefore, when S361 is the determination of YES and S362 is the determination of NO, it is determined that 15 game balls have not been supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A.

  The payout CPU 301 that performs a process of comparing the value of the first secured ball timer 306A with the value of the first secured ball counter 305A constitutes a determination unit.

  Next, in S363, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball security switch 172A is not in the OFF state (in the case of NO determination in S363), the payout CPU 301 places the fifteen balls in the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that game balls are being replenished, and the process proceeds to S371.

  On the other hand, in S363, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball security switch 172A is in the OFF state (in the case of YES determination in S363), the payout CPU 301 performs the first process in S361 and S362. Although it is guaranteed that 15 game balls are supplied to one ball supply passage 171A, 15 game balls are not supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A for some reason. It is determined that there is no security ball, and 0 is set to the first falling ball confirmation flag (S364).

  Here, the factor that is determined to be YES in S363 includes, for example, a case where a game ball is excessively paid out due to a failure of the first sprocket 173A or the payout motor 174 or the like. At this time, the payout of game balls by the first sprocket 173A is prohibited.

  Here, the case where the game balls are excessively paid out means that, for example, as a result of excessive rotation of the first sprocket 173A, the number of game balls supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A is reduced from 15 to 14. The first 15-ball security switch 172A detects that the game ball that has been reduced and replenished to the first ball supply passage 171A following the paid-out game ball moves in the direction of the first sprocket 173A. This is the case where the first 15-ball security switch 172A is turned off because the game ball that has moved also moves in the direction of the first sprocket 173A.

  That is, the payout CPU 301 pays out the game ball by the first sprocket 173A even when the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is 0 when the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is 0. If the game ball has not been detected by the first 15-ball security switch 172A before, the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A through the drive of the payout motor 174 is prohibited.

  As described above, the payout CPU 301 can determine whether or not there is a game ball supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A, so that the payout management can be performed more accurately.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 2 seconds (2000 ms) as the monitoring time of the idling state of the payout motor 174 in the first secured ball timer 306A (S365). When the set time of 2000 ms has elapsed, it is determined that there is a stop factor, and a notification is made by the payout state notification display device 178.

  After that, the payout CPU 301 sets 1950 times (1950 ms) as the number of times of monitoring the idling state of the payout motor 174 in the first secured ball counter 305A (S366), and moves the process to S371.

  On the other hand, in S362, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is not 0 (in the case of NO determination in S362), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number of balls in the first ball supply passage 171A ( In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no security ball, and 1 is set to the first stop factor flag (S367).

  In this process, as described above, it is determined that 15 game balls have not been supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A in S361 and S362, so that the payout of game balls by the first sprocket 173A is prohibited. Is set to the first stop factor flag.

  In other words, when the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is not 0 when the value of the first secured ball timer 306A is 0, the payout CPU 301 uses the first sprocket 173A through the drive of the payout motor 174. Prohibition of payout of game balls.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 1 (S368), and moves the processing to S371. In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a process of requesting the origin adjustment control of the first sprocket 173A.

  Here, the origin of the first sprocket 173A is a rotation position (drive position) at which a game ball can be paid out to the first payout passage 180A when the first sprocket 173A is rotated. In the first embodiment, the number of steps of the payout motor 174 is controlled based on the origin.

  Note that when the first sprocket 173A stops based on some stopping factor (such as an “error related to payout” described later), the first sprocket 173A detects a position detection sensor (for example, an index that allows the first sprocket 173A to know the rotational position of the first sprocket 173A). ) Is not provided, the current rotational position (drive position) is unknown, that is, it is unknown how many steps the dispensing motor 174 has been driven based on the origin, so that the first sprocket 173A The origin may be unknown.

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the first sprocket 173A stops based on the stop factor, that is, when the origin adjustment flag is set to 1, the origin adjustment control for grasping the origin of the first sprocket 173A is performed. Is performed. That is, when it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited as described above, the payout CPU 301 performs the origin adjustment control. The same applies to retry control described later.

  In this way, by performing the origin adjustment control, the origin position of the sprocket 173 can be adjusted. Therefore, for example, even if the dispensing device uses the sprocket 173 that does not include the position detection sensor, the dispensing can be accurately performed. Can be performed.

  In the first embodiment, the dispensing device in which the sprocket 173 is not provided with the position detection sensor has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the dispensing device in which the sprocket is provided with the position detection sensor may be used. By performing the origin adjustment control, it is possible to more accurately manage the position of the sprocket and the dispensing, so that the dispensing can be performed more accurately.

  The origin adjustment flag is a flag that is set in accordance with the presence / absence of a request for origin adjustment control, and is set to “1” when there is a request for origin adjustment control, and is set when there is no request for origin adjustment control. This flag is set to “0”.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 drives the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (four steps in the first embodiment) until a game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A. Here, the unit drive amount (four steps in the first embodiment) is smaller than the payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment) described later.

  Further, the unit drive amount (four steps in the first embodiment) is a drive amount obtained by dividing a payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment) described later by four times (origin request retry times described later) as a specific number. It is.

  The origin adjustment control is common to retry control described later. Therefore, also in the retry control, the payout CPU 301 drives the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (four steps in the first embodiment) until a game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A. Details will be described later. The payout CPU 301 that controls the driving of the payout motor 174 constitutes control means and drive control means.

  Here, in the above-mentioned S367, the first stop factor flag is set to 1 in order to prohibit the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A, but when the origin adjustment control is required as described above, If the payout of game balls by the first sprocket 173A is not permitted, the origin cannot be adjusted.

  The same applies to retry control. Therefore, in the first embodiment, even if it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited, the payout CPU 301 permits the payout of the game ball on condition that the origin adjustment control (retry control) is being executed. This can prevent the origin adjustment control (retry control) from being disabled due to the prohibition of the payout of the game balls.

  Next, when S361 is NO, when S363 is NO, or after the end of S366 or after the end of S368, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is 0. It is determined (S371).

  In S371, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is not 0 (if S371 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is refilling the game ball into the second ball supply passage 171B. Is determined, the security ball absence detection process ends.

  On the other hand, in S371, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is 0 (in the case of YES determination in S371), the payout CPU 301 performs a game to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the replenishment of the ball has been completed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (S372).

  In S372, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 (in the case of YES determination in S372), the payout CPU 301 sets the predetermined number of balls in the second ball supply passage 171B (executed). In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a secured ball, and it is determined whether or not the second 15-ball secured switch 172B is in the OFF state (S373).

  Here, the determination whether to prohibit the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B is the same as the determination whether to prohibit the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A described above. Description is omitted. Note that the payout CPU 301 that performs a process of comparing the value of the second secured ball timer 306B with the value of the second secured ball counter 305B constitutes a determination unit.

  Next, in S373, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball security switch 172B is not in the OFF state (in the case of NO determination in S373), the payout CPU 301 places the fifteen balls in the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that game balls are being replenished, and the security ball absence detection processing ends.

  On the other hand, in S373, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball security switch 172B is in the OFF state (in the case of YES determination in S373), the payout CPU 301 performs the first process in S371 and S372. Although it is guaranteed that 15 game balls are supplied to the second ball supply path 171B, 15 game balls are not supplied to the second ball supply path 171B due to some factor, that is, It is determined that there is no security ball, and the second falling ball confirmation flag is set to 0 (S374).

  Here, the factor that is determined as YES in S373 is, for example, a case where a game ball is excessively paid out due to a failure of the second sprocket 173B or the payout motor 174 or the like. At this time, payout of game balls by the second sprocket 173B is prohibited.

  In other words, even if the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is 0 when the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is 0, the payout CPU 301 pays out the game ball by the second sprocket 173B. If the game ball has not been detected by the second 15-ball security switch 172B before the game is performed, the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B through the driving of the payout motor 174 is prohibited.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 2 seconds (2000 ms) in the second secured ball timer 306B as the monitoring time of the idle state of the payout motor 174 (S375). When the set time of 2000 ms has elapsed, it is determined that there is a stop factor, and a notification is made by the payout state notification display device 178.

  Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 sets 1950 times (1950 ms) as the number of times of monitoring the idling state of the payout motor 174 in the second secured ball counter 305B (S376), and ends the secured ball absence detection processing.

  On the other hand, in S372, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is not 0 (in the case of NO determination in S372), the payout CPU 301 stores the predetermined number (in the second ball supply passage 171B) in the second ball supply passage 171B. In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15) game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no secured ball, and 1 is set to the second stop factor flag (S377).

  In this process, as described above, since it is determined in S371 and S372 that 15 game balls have not been supplied to the second ball supply passage 171B, the payout of game balls by the second sprocket 173B is prohibited. Is set to the second stop factor flag.

  In other words, when the value of the second secured ball counter 305B is not 0 when the value of the second secured ball timer 306B is 0, the payout CPU 301 uses the second sprocket 173B through the drive of the payout motor 174. Prohibition of payout of game balls.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 1 (S378), and ends the security ball absence detection process. In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a process of requesting the origin adjustment control of the second sprocket 173B. Here, the origin adjustment control of the second sprocket 173B is the same as the origin adjustment control of the first sprocket 173A, and a description thereof will be omitted.

[Count switch detection processing]
Next, the count switch detection processing performed in S335 during the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 85) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the count switch detection process according to the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of a game ball (S381). In S381, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B has not detected the passage of the game ball (in the case of NO determination in S381), the payout CPU 301 sets the count switch. The detection processing ends.

  Here, when the origin adjustment control is being performed, the game ball is not yet detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B, and thus the determination at S381 is NO.

  On the other hand, in S381, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of the game ball (when S381 is determined to be YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the first payout CPU 301 to the first payout CPU 301. It is determined that the game ball has been paid out by the sprocket 173A or the second sprocket 173B, and the required payout number is subtracted by "1" (S382).

  At this time, the payout CPU 301 can count the number of game balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B. Therefore, the payout CPU 301 forms a counting unit.

  Here, the required number of payouts refers to a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 based on winning of a gaming machine or lending of a game ball to various starting ports or various winning ports, and received by the payout control circuit 300 or a lending ball control command. This is a value obtained by sequentially adding the number of prize balls or the number of loaned balls based on the ball control signal, and is the total number of game balls to be paid out by the prize ball case unit 170 (total payout amount).

  The required number of payouts is stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. The number of award balls and the number of loaned balls correspond to the payout amount. The RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300 constitutes a payout storage unit. The required payout number is decremented by payout of the game balls.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the requested number of drops (S383). Here, the required number of drops is determined as the number of game balls to be paid out by one drive of the payout motor 174 based on the required number of payouts (total amount of payouts) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. , And the maximum is 15.

  For example, if the required number of payouts (total amount of payout) is 15 or more, the requested number of drops is 15; if the required number of payouts (total amount of payout) is 14 or less, the number of requested drop is: The number is equal to the stored number of payout requests.

  The requested number of drops is determined by the payout CPU 301 according to the requested number of payouts (total payout amount). Note that the required number of drops corresponds to the divided payout amount. Further, the payout CPU 301 corresponds to a divided payout amount determination unit.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S384). In S384, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (if S384 is NO), the payout CPU 301 shifts the processing to S387.

  On the other hand, in S384, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (if S384 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S385).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S386). Here, the origin adjustment completion flag is a flag for determining whether the origin adjustment control is being performed or the origin adjustment control is completed. When the origin adjustment control is being performed, the flag is set to “0”, and the origin adjustment control is completed. Is a flag set to "1".

  Next, in the case of NO determination in S364, or after the end of S386, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of requested drops is less than 0 (S387). In S387, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of requested drops is not less than 0 (NO in S387), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

  On the other hand, in S387, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the requested number of drops is less than 0 (if S387 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of game balls actually paid out is larger than the requested number of drops. Is determined, the number of overpays is incremented by "1" (S388).

  Here, the number of overpay is the number of game balls that have exceeded the required number of dropped balls when the number of game balls actually paid out is larger than the required number of dropped balls, that is, when overpayment occurs. For example, if the requested number of falling balls is 15, but the number of actually paid game balls is 16, if one game ball is overpaid, the number of overpaid “1” is added.

  The payout CPU 301 adds the above-mentioned number of overpays to the total number of game balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B (total number of game balls actually paid out). ) And the required number of payouts can be stored in the RAM 303.

  Therefore, the RAM 303 constitutes a difference accumulation unit. The number of overpays is stored in the RAM 303 until a predetermined initialization operation is performed. The predetermined initialization operation mentioned here includes, for example, turning on the power again.

  In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpays, or the work area of the error information portion without turning on the power again. , Ie, three work areas, or may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of overpay has become 10 or more (S389). In other words, the payout CPU 301 compares the total number of game balls detected by the first count switch 181A and the second count switch 181B (the total number of game balls actually paid out) with the required number of payouts. Then, it is determined whether or not the difference (total number of overpay) is 10 or more.

  In S389, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of overpays is not equal to or more than 10 (NO in S389), the payout CPU 301 sets the number of game balls related to overpayment to an allowable range (allowable value). The count switch detection process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in S389, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of overpays has become 10 or more (if S389 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of game balls related to the overpayout is not within the allowable range (allowable). Is determined, the overpay flag is set to 1 (S390), and the counting switch detection processing ends.

  Here, the overpay flag is a flag for determining whether or not the number of game balls related to overpayout is within an allowable range (allowable value), and the number of game balls related to overpayout is within the allowable range. , The flag is set to 0, and is set to 1 when the number of game balls related to overpayout is not within the allowable range (more than the allowable value).

  When the overpay flag is set to 1, the payout CPU 301 controls the payout motor 174 so as to stop the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B until the above-mentioned predetermined initialization operation is performed. .

[Motor start waiting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the motor start waiting process performed in S336 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the motor start waiting process in the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (S401). In S401, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is not 1 (NO in S401), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control is being performed, and shifts the processing to S406.

  On the other hand, in S401, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (in the case of YES determination in S401), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been completed, and Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second stop factor flag is 1 (S402).

  In S402, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (if S402 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and starts the motor. The waiting process ends.

  On the other hand, in S402, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first nor the second stop factor flag is 1 (NO in S402), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Then, it is determined whether the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S403).

  In S403, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (NO in S403), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no security ball, and End the boot waiting process.

  On the other hand, in S403, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (if S403 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a security ball, and pays out. It is determined whether the requested number is greater than 0 (S404).

  In S404, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is not greater than 0 (NO in S404), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request, and ends the motor start waiting process.

  On the other hand, in S404, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is greater than 0 (YES in S404), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a payout request, and performs a motor start-up initialization process (see FIG. 90) (S405).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S406). In S406, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (NO in S406), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no request for the origin adjustment control, and moves the process to S407. Therefore, when the determination in S406 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed.

  On the other hand, in S406, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (in the case of YES determination in S406), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a request for the origin adjustment control, and the number of retries is reduced from twelve. It is determined whether the value is larger, that is, whether the origin adjustment control has been performed 12 times (S408). Therefore, if the determination in S406 is YES, the origin adjustment control is performed.

  Here, the number of retries is the number of times the origin adjustment control is performed, and more specifically, a value that is added each time the number of motor operations described later is updated. In the origin adjustment control, a drive amount required to cause the sprocket 173 to pay out one game ball and then pay out the next game ball, that is, a drive amount required to pay out one game ball (payout drive amount). Since only the payout motor 174 is driven, the payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball (in the first embodiment, 16 steps = unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 times (origin request retry times) ) Is the number of motor operations = 1. Here, the unit drive amount as the excitation data is 4 steps × 5 ms.

  Therefore, each time one motor operation number is set (updated) in S410 described later, it is determined that the origin adjustment control is completed once, and the number of retries is added. As described above, since the origin adjustment control is common to the retry control, the number of retries can be said to be the number of times the retry control is performed.

  As described above, the payout CPU 301 updates the number of motor operations as a retry value on condition that the drive amount of the payout motor 174 reaches the payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment).

  The payout CPU 301 that updates the number of operating motors constitutes a retry value updating unit. Further, the payout CPU 301 manages the number of times the number of motor operations has been updated or the number of times excitation data has been set, that is, the number of retries as the number of times origin adjustment control (retry control) has been performed.

  In the first embodiment, each sprocket is formed with three grooves for receiving game balls so that three game balls are paid out each time the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B make one rotation. I have.

  Therefore, when the number of motor operations is updated six times, the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are each driven by one rotation (in the first embodiment, 96 steps = 16 steps (unit drive amount (4 Step) × 4 (origin request retry count)) × 6 (half of 12 retry counts) means that the payout motor 174 has been driven.

  Therefore, the number of retries being greater than 12 means that the drive amount for two rotations of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B (192 steps = 96 steps (drive amount for one rotation) in the first embodiment) × This means that the payout motor 174 has been driven with a drive amount exceeding (two times). The number of retries of 12 times is the upper limit of the number of retries in which 16 steps (unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 times) are set as one set.

  In S408, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is greater than 12, (if S408 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of origin adjustment controls has reached the upper limit number (12 times). Then, the process proceeds to S407.

  At this time, the payout CPU 301 determines that the drive amount of the payout motor 174 has exceeded 192 steps (upper limit drive amount) or that the number of retries has been reached without detecting the game ball by the first and second count switches 181A and 181B. The drive of the payout motor 174 is controlled so that the payout of the game balls is stopped until a predetermined initialization operation is performed on condition that the number of times has exceeded 12 times (upper limit number). Thereby, the origin adjustment control (retry control) ends. The predetermined initialization operation mentioned here includes, for example, turning on the power again.

  In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpays, or the work area of the error information portion can be performed without turning on the power again. One work area including three work areas, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or the work areas may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

  In S407, the payout CPU 301 sets the activation state of the payout motor 174 (S407), and moves the processing to S414. In this process, if the determination in S406 is NO, since the origin adjustment control is not performed, the acceleration state or the like of the payout motor 174 according to the requested number of drops is set so that the normal game balls are paid out. If the determination in S408 is YES, the payout motor 174 is set to the idle state to stop paying out the game balls.

  On the other hand, in S408, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is not larger than 12 (if S408 is NO), the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 4 steps in preparation for the next origin adjustment control. (S409). In this process, four steps are set as the unit drive amount of the payout motor 174 when executing the origin adjustment control.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of motor operations to one (S410), and sets the origin request retry count to four (S411). In this processing, the four steps set as the step counter mask value in S409 described above are multiplied by four times set as the origin request retry count, thereby obtaining the payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball. Sixteen steps are set.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S412). Here, the falling ball monitoring timer determines whether there is a falling ball and whether or not a stop factor has occurred after driving the payout motor 174 with the excitation data for the unit driving amount (4 steps) in the origin adjustment control. Is a timer for measuring a falling ball monitoring time (130 ms in the origin adjustment control) for monitoring the falling ball.

  The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) is the excitation data holding period (in the first embodiment, the holding period for holding the attitude of the first and second sprockets 171A and 171B after driving the payout motor 174 for four steps). 30 ms) and a cooling period for cooling the payout motor 174 (100 ms in the origin adjustment control).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to “0” (S413). Next, after the end of S407 or S413, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S414), and ends the motor activation waiting process.

  In this process, for example, in the case of performing the origin adjustment control, the payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball is 16 steps (unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 times (origin request retry times)). Set the excitation data. Further, when paying out normal game balls, excitation data for a predetermined step is set as a drive amount necessary to pay out the required number of game balls. When the payout motor 174 is set in the idle state so that the payout of the game balls is stopped, the excitation data is set to 0.

[Motor startup initial processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the motor startup initial process performed in S405 during the motor startup waiting process (see FIG. 89) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the motor startup initial process according to the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of requested drops from the requested number of payouts (S421). In this process, a maximum of 15 drop request numbers is set according to the payout request number (total payout amount). For example, if the number of requested payouts (total amount of payouts) is 20, the requested number of drops is set to 15. On the other hand, when the number of required payouts (total amount of payouts) is 10, the number of requested drops is set to 10, which is the same as the number of requested payouts.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs a security ball monitoring setting process (S422). In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of times of ON detection monitoring in the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B according to the number of requested fall.

  For example, if the number of required drops is 9 to 10, 650 times (650 ms) are set as the ON detection monitoring times. Further, the payout CPU 301 sets the monitoring time in the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B according to the number of requested fall. For example, if the number of requested drops is 9 to 10, 850 ms is set as the monitoring time.

  Here, the above-described ON detection monitoring count and monitoring time are the initial values of the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B set in the secured ball monitoring initial setting process of S312 during the power-on process of FIG. , Different from the initial values of the first and second secured ball timers 306A, 306B.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets “0” to each of the first and second falling ball confirmation flags (S423). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 initializes the number of retries (S424), and sets "1" to an origin adjustment completion flag (S425).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S426). The clearing ball monitoring timer, which is cleared here, drives the payout motor 174 with the excitation data of the drive amount necessary to pay out the required number of drops in the normal payout control in which the origin adjustment control and the retry control are not executed. After that, the timer measures a falling ball monitoring time (500 ms in normal payout control) for monitoring whether there are falling balls of the required number of falling and whether or not a stop factor has occurred.

  The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) here includes an excitation data holding period (30 ms in the first embodiment) and a cooling period of the payout motor 174 (470 ms in normal payout control). This falling ball monitoring time corresponds to a certain period.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the step counter to 0 (S427). Here, the step counter is a counter that counts the number of steps of the payout motor 174.

  For example, when the requested number of drops is 15, when the drop operation of 15 game balls, that is, the payout operation, is completed, the value of the step counter becomes a value for 240 steps. In this processing, the payout CPU 301 clears, for example, the value of 240 steps counted as described above.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 16 steps (S428), and ends the motor activation initial processing. Thus, 16 steps are set as the number of steps of the payout motor 174 necessary to pay out one game ball.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 102, a characteristic portion related to the payout control in the first embodiment will be described in detail.

  FIG. 91 is a time chart illustrating an excitation method of the payout motor 174 according to the first embodiment. The payout motor 174 employs a two-phase excitation method and a method capable of switching between a high current and a low current.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the payout CPU 301 rotates the payout motor 174 forward by changing the excitation data in the order of t1, t2, t3, and t4. However, in the first embodiment, the payout motor 174 is structurally incapable of reverse rotation.

  Here, the origin is the position where both “A−” and “B−” of the payout motor 174 are on. Note that “A + and B + (indicated by“ S ”in the figure)” of the payout motor 174 represent on / off by software control, and “A− and B− (indicated by“ H ”in the figure)” It indicates ON / OFF by logical inversion of the output.

  However, in the first embodiment, since there is no conventional detecting means such as an index sensor, it is necessary to perform phase matching between the apparent origin (excitation data 0) and the structural origin. This phase adjustment of the origin is the origin adjustment, and controlling the payout motor 174 to perform the phase adjustment is called origin adjustment control.

  The origin adjustment control is performed using the first payout operation when the first payout request is made when the origin adjustment is required (when there is an origin adjustment target factor). For example, the origin adjustment control is performed using the payout operation of the first game ball of the requested number of drops at the time of the first payout request after the power is turned on.

  Here, the payout request is made from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300. Specifically, the payout request is transmitted to the payout control circuit 300 as prize ball control data including information such as the number of payout requests. . As shown in FIG. 92, the payout control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control data from the main control circuit 70 by a reception interrupt.

  On the other hand, the payout control circuit 300 transmits payout error information data to the main control circuit 70 as shown in FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 perform unilateral communication as shown in FIG. 33. However, as shown in FIG. 94, the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300. 300 may communicate with each other.

  Here, when the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 communicate with each other, the serial communication method is used as the most desirable mode, but the present invention is not limited to the serial communication method. Various communication schemes can be used.

  As shown in FIG. 95, after the payout control circuit 300 detects an error by self-diagnosis, the payout control circuit 300 transmits error information including payout control error information to be described later to the main control circuit 70 using a serial communication method.

  At this time, the minimum transmission interval of error transmission from the payout control circuit 300 is set to a predetermined time (12 ms in the first embodiment), and when error information continuously changes, as shown in S337. Instead of transmitting the error information to the main control circuit 70 every time the error information changes using a command transmission process that can be executed every 1 ms, as shown in FIG. And the error information is transmitted at the minimum transmission interval or after the minimum transmission interval has elapsed.

  As a method of synthesizing error information, as shown in FIG. 96, each bit numerical value of parameter 1 and parameter 2 composed of 8 bits is updated or changed, and error information is transmitted.

  At this time, when the parameter 1 and the parameter 2 are received as error information, the main control circuit 70 performs masking on each parameter and obtains error information (payout control error information).

  The management of the error information in the payout control circuit 300, the management of the error information in the main control circuit 70, and the management of the error information in the sub control circuit 200 are as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 97 illustrates a mode of reporting error information in the payout control circuit 300, a mode of reporting error information in the main control circuit 70, and a mode of reporting error information in the sub-control circuit 200.

  Specifically, the lower tray full state in the payout control circuit 300 is recognized as lower tray full detection by the main control circuit 70, and based on the error information transmitted from the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200 The user is notified via the liquid crystal display device 13 that "Please remove the ball."

  In the payout control circuit 300, the out-of-ball 1 state, the out-of-ball 2 state, the motor abnormality state, the VL unconnected state, the CR side communication abnormality, the overpayment abnormality, the dispensed ball clogging, the reception command abnormality, the reception abnormality, and the communication error. Is recognized by the main control circuit 70 as a payout abnormality detection, and based on the payout error information transmitted from the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit notifies the user via the liquid crystal display device 13 of "Please call a clerk."

  As described above, the main control circuit 70 manages a plurality of pieces of error information relating to the payout control to be transmitted, divided into two types, “lower-dish-full-state error information” and “other information”.

  By transmitting and receiving such error information, the error ellipse is continuously transmitted at the minimum transmission interval of the payout control circuit 300 in an environment where the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 are performing serial communication with each other. (Error information, it can be expressed that a plurality of errors have occurred), it is possible to combine the error information.

  For this reason, the payout control circuit 300 does not transmit error information after the transmission of error information is requested from the main control circuit 70 (or after any transmission request is made), but the minimum transmission of the payout control circuit 300 is not performed. It is possible to transmit the error information at intervals or at predetermined time intervals.

  In the above description, error information (payout control error information) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various commands can be combined.

  Next, a prize ball control process in the first embodiment will be described. In the prize ball control processing, at least the above-described origin adjustment control, normal payout control, and retry control are performed. First, the origin adjustment control in the prize ball control processing will be described.

  As described above, the origin adjustment control is executed when a target factor of the origin adjustment occurs. Here, the target factors when performing the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control processing include, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped, when the power is turned on, when the power is restored, when an underpayment occurs after the completion of the origin adjustment control, When the cause of the suspension is canceled, when the cause of the abnormal payment is canceled, and when the overpay occurs.

  When the underpayout occurs after the completion of the origin adjustment control, for example, when the payout motor 174 has lost synchronism, or a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of the game balls is not secured in the ball supply passage 171. Nevertheless, there is a case where the 15-ball security switch 172 detects a game ball due to a short circuit and an intermittent state occurs.

  The origin adjustment control at the time of canceling the stop factor is performed, for example, in response to the backflow of the game ball when the lower plate full switch 179 is short-circuited. Also, the origin adjustment control at the time of canceling the cause of the abnormal payment is performed in response to a physical shift of the origin due to, for example, disconnection, short circuit, or radio wave irradiation. Further, the origin adjustment control at the time of occurrence of overpay is performed in consideration of the subsequent step-out of the payout motor 174.

  In the origin adjustment control, as described above, when the payout motor 174 is driven by 16 steps, one game ball can be dropped (paid), so that a drive of 4 steps × 5 ms as a unit drive amount is performed. The point at which the confirmation of the falling ball is completed within the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms = excitation data holding period 30 ms + cooling period 100 ms) is regarded as the physical origin (origin adjustment completed). If the falling ball cannot be confirmed within the falling ball monitoring time, the above-described driving of the payout motor 174 is performed in units of 4 steps for 16 steps.

  However, if a falling ball cannot be detected even when the payout motor 174 is driven for 16 steps, it is determined that normal payout is not performed (or it may be determined that there is a stop factor). The drive of the payout motor 174 in units of four steps is repeated for two rotations.

  Further, “repeat the drive of the payout motor 174 for two rotations” means that the state of the payout motor 174 or the position of the sprocket 173 at the time when it is determined that the falling ball cannot be detected even when the payout motor 174 is driven. As the (or rotation start position), for example, when 48 steps are required for one rotation of the motor, it indicates that driving for 96 steps is performed.

  This can also be expressed as a drive that can drop 12 balls, and drives the payout motor 174 or the sprocket 173 that can drop a predetermined number of game balls (or rotates or rotates the rotation angle or the rotation angle). Driving) is performed.

  Note that the origin adjustment control is completed when a falling ball is detected, but if the falling ball is not counted as a paid game ball, the ball will be overpaid. Therefore, it is necessary to count the falling balls at the time of completion of the origin adjustment control as the paid game balls.

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 subtracts one drop request number to 14 pieces on condition that a falling ball is detected by the count switch 181 during the origin adjustment control. As a result, upon completion of the origin adjustment control, the remaining requested drop number (14) excluding one drop-out number is paid out for the requested drop number. Thereafter, a normal payout operation is performed.

  FIG. 98 is a timing chart of the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control processing. For example, as shown in FIG. 98, when the stop factor is released after the power is turned on again and then a payout request is issued, the origin adjustment control is executed, and the excitation data for 4 steps × 5 ms is first supplied. 174 drives the payout motor 174 for four steps. At this time, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched from a low current to a high current when the origin adjustment control is started.

  Thereafter, when the driving of the payout motor 174 for four steps is completed, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period). Then, when the excitation data holding period has elapsed, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a low current, and thereafter, is maintained at a low current for 100 ms (cooling period).

  The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) is constituted by 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 100 ms (cooling period). The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) can be calculated based on a free fall theoretical formula.

  Thereafter, when a falling ball is detected by the second counting switch 181B within the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms), the number of required falling balls, which was three at the start of the origin adjustment, is updated to two. Further, the origin adjustment control is completed by detecting the falling ball, and the phase shift from the structural origin is eliminated.

  FIG. 99 is a timing chart of the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment is not completed using the award ball control processing. For example, as shown in FIG. 99, the operation of driving the payout motor 174 for four steps based on the above-described excitation data for 4 steps × 5 ms (this operation is referred to as an origin adjustment cycle) is performed only once. If not detected, the same origin adjustment cycle is repeated up to 16 steps. That is, after starting the origin adjustment control, a total of four origin adjustment cycles are repeated.

  However, if the falling ball cannot be detected even after the four origin adjustment cycles have been performed, the four origin adjustment cycles are performed again. Here, a period during which the first four origin adjustment cycles are performed is referred to as a basic retry operation period. Note that the origin adjustment cycle is a unit drive amount (4 steps) × 5 ms, and the basic retry operation period is a unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 (origin request retry times). In FIG. 99, the operation started when the counting switch 181 does not detect the falling ball during the basic retry operation period is defined as the origin adjustment retry. However, the operation is not limited to this. The mode of repeating the process up to the upper limit may be set as the origin adjustment retry.

  FIG. 74 is a timing chart of a basic payout operation of the prize ball control process, that is, a normal payout operation. FIG. 100 is a timing chart exemplifying a payout operation when paying out 15 game balls.

  As shown in FIG. 100, when 15 pieces are determined as the required number of drops, the drive amount of the payout motor 174 is determined by the payout CPU 301 based on the determined required number of drops (15 pieces). Specifically, excitation data necessary for paying out 15 game balls is determined. The payout CPU 301 that determines the drive amount of the payout motor 174 constitutes a drive amount determining unit.

  Next, when the excitation data required to pay out 15 game balls is set, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a high current, and the payout motor 174 is driven based on the set excitation data. The excitation data at this time is set so that the payout motor 174 gradually accelerates to a steady state, and then decelerates and stops.

  Thereafter, when the driving of the payout motor 174 based on the set excitation data ends, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period as a holding period). Then, when the excitation data holding period elapses, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a low current, and thereafter, is maintained at a low current for 470 ms (cooling period).

  The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is constituted by 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 470 ms (cooling period). During the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped. The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) at this time is different from the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) during the origin adjustment control.

  During the above-described falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the payout CPU 301 monitors whether or not the falling of the requested number of game balls (15) has been confirmed. That is, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not game balls corresponding to the required number of drops (15) are detected through the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B during the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms). The payout CPU 301 that makes such a determination constitutes a payout determination unit.

  The payout CPU 301 determines that, during the above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), it is not possible to confirm that the required number of falling balls (15) has fallen, that is, the first number of playing balls corresponding to the required number of falling balls (15) If it is determined that the stop is not detected through the second counting switches 181A and 181B, it is determined that a stop factor has occurred, and a transition is made to an idle state in order to stop the driving of the payout motor 174 thereafter. As a result, the payout operation cannot be performed continuously.

  On the other hand, even if it is confirmed that the required number of dropped balls (15) has been dropped during the above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the game device shifts to the idle state in preparation for the subsequent payout operation.

  Here, the excitation data according to the required number of drops in the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing is as shown in FIG. For example, when the required number of drops is 5 to 15, as shown in FIG. 101A, the excitation data is data for performing the acceleration state and the deceleration state for two game balls.

  FIG. 101 (b) shows the case where the number of drop requests is four, FIG. 101 (c) shows the case where the number of drop requests is three, FIG. 101 (d) shows the case where the number of drop requests is two, and FIG. (E) represents the excitation data when the number of required drops is one. Note that the above-mentioned falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is provided for any of the requested falling numbers.

  FIG. 102 is a timing chart of the payout operation when a retry operation is required during the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process. FIG. 102 is a timing chart exemplifying a payout operation when paying out five game balls.

  As shown in FIG. 102, when the payout operation of the requested number of drops (five) is executed, if the game ball related to the fourth payout is not detected by the second counting switch 181B, the player may fall. When the ball monitoring time (500 ms) has elapsed, the number of dropped balls is one short of the required number (5). As a result, the payout CPU 301 determines that falling of the requested number of game balls (5) cannot be confirmed within the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms).

  In this way, when the number of game balls paid out for the requested number of drops (five) is insufficient, the underpayment occurs, and the origin adjustment retry operation similar to the origin adjustment retry operation after the completion of the origin adjustment shown in FIG. 99 is performed. The operation is performed. The details of the origin adjustment retry operation are the same as those shown in FIG. 99, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the error processing in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Errors relating to the payout of game balls in the first embodiment include (1) overpayment, (2) clogged out payout balls, (3) full bottom plate, (4) out of ball, (5) abnormality in payout motor, and the like. . When at least one of these errors occurs, the error is notified via the payout state notification display device 178 (see FIG. 33). Hereinafter, each of these errors will be described in detail.

  FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating the payout state notification display device 178. As shown in FIG. 103, the payout state notification display device 178 includes seven segments a to g and an eighth segment DP. Any one of these segments a to g and DP is lit according to the type of error or the like.

  For example, (1) the segment b is lit when reporting an overpayout error, (2) the d segment is lit when reporting a clogged ball error, and (3) the lower plate. When reporting a full error, the segment f is lit, (4) when reporting a missing ball error, the segment e is lit, and (5) when dispensing motor abnormality is reported. Illuminates the segment c.

  The DP segment is lit when informing that the ball is being lent. Therefore, the manager of the hall can easily determine what kind of error has occurred by visually checking the lighting state of the segment of the payout state notification display device 178.

  First, (1) Overpayment is an error that does not constitute a stop factor even if it occurs and allows the payout operation to be continued. As shown in FIG. 104, the notification of the error of the overpayout is, as shown in FIG. 104, when the number of overpaid game balls after the completion of the payout of the requested number of drops is equal to or more than the overpayment prescribed number (10 in the first embodiment). It is time to become.

  In FIG. 104, the payout detection signal A is a signal indicating whether or not the first counting switch 181A has detected a game ball, and is turned on when the game ball is detected. Similarly, the payout detection signal B is a signal indicating whether or not the second counting switch 181B has detected a game ball.

  The error of the overpayment is released when the power is turned on again. That is, the over-payment error is released when the power is turned on again. At this time, the notification of the overpayment error is also released.

  Next, (2) payout ball clogging is an error based on a stop factor generated due to, for example, ball clogging due to backflow of a game ball, adhesion of dust or entry of foreign matter, or disconnection or short circuit of the counting switch 181. As shown in FIG. 105, for example, when the payout detection signal A of the first counting switch 181A does not turn off even after 100 ms elapses from the time when the payout detection signal A is turned on, clogging of the payout ball occurs, that is, the stop factor occurs. Is determined. When it is determined that the stop factor has occurred, it is a trigger for notifying an error of the dispensed ball clogging.

  When the counting switch 181 is short-circuited, the dispensing control circuit 300 cannot directly determine the presence or absence of the short-circuit. Therefore, it cannot be used as a stop factor until the retry operation of the 12 times of origin adjustment control described above is completed. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined that the stop factor has occurred when the falling ball monitoring time elapses after the completion of the retry operation of the origin adjustment control for 12 times.

  In addition, when the payout control circuit 300 can always recognize or judge a short circuit of the count switch 181 by constantly monitoring a change in voltage that can occur between the payout control circuit 300 and the count switch 181, an error occurs without performing a try operation. The notification may be performed, or the retry operation may be started simultaneously with the notification of the error.

  In addition, the notification of the error of the dispensed ball clogging is canceled by removing each of the factors such as the clogged ball due to the backflow, the adhesion of dust and the inclusion of foreign matter, and the disconnection and short circuit of the counting switch 181.

  Next, (3) lower plate full is an error based on a stop factor generated when the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 are full. As shown in FIG. 106, for example, when the lower plate full switch 179 is not turned off even after one second has passed since the lower plate full switch 179 is turned on, it is determined that a stop factor based on the lower plate full is generated. The time when it is determined that the stop factor has occurred is a trigger for notifying the error of the lower plate full.

  In addition, the notification of the error of the lower plate being full is released by discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 in a full state.

  Next, (4) the ball has run out, for example, when it is detected by the 15-ball security switch 172 that the number of security balls is insufficient, when the ball tank 161 is in a state of waiting for replenishment of game balls, the ball supply passage 171. This is an error based on a stop factor that occurs when the ball is clogged, or when the 15-ball security switch 172 is disconnected.

  Such a ball-out error is determined based on a comparison result between the above-described first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B and the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B. Occurs when the stop factor flag is set to 1.

  The trigger for notifying the error of the out of ball is when the above-mentioned stop factor occurs. In addition, this error of running out of balls can be caused by refilling the ball tank 161 with the ball or removing the game ball causing the clogging of the ball by removing a predetermined number (15) of the ball in the ball supply passage 171. Is released by being secured. At this time, the notification of the ball out error is also released.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107, for (5) payout motor abnormality, for example, 12 retry operations are executed based on the home position adjustment cycle, and the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) in the twelfth retry operation elapses. This is also an error based on a stop factor that occurs when the falling ball cannot be confirmed.

  Causes of such stop factors include, for example, a case where a sticky game ball sticks to and does not separate from the sprocket 173, a case where a ball bites between the sprocket 173 and the storage ball (poor motor rotation), and a case where foreign matter is present. There is a case where a step-out occurs due to the motor non-rotation state (only the excitation data is updated) due to mixing or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 107, the notification of the delivery motor abnormality is triggered when the above-described stop factor occurs. Further, the dispensing motor abnormality is released by turning on the power again. That is, the trigger for releasing the dispensing motor abnormality is when the power is turned on again. At this time, the notification of the delivery motor abnormality is also released.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, a reception process of the payout control circuit 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment is turned off will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 108, when an XINT interrupt (power interruption) at the time of power interruption occurs as a non-maskable interrupt prior to the reception interrupt on the side of the payout control circuit 300, the received data is polled in the XINT interrupt and 1 byte is transmitted. To rescue.

  Also, assuming that a power interruption occurs immediately after writing to the transmission buffer by the main control circuit 70, the dispensing control circuit 300 can receive data after a delay of the baud rate time even during XINT interrupt processing. It is preferable to consider the time elapsed for receiving within the XINT interrupt. However, the condition is that XINT of the power cutoff processing of the payout control circuit 300 does not occur earlier than the main control circuit 70 electrically.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the values (first values) of the first and second secured ball timers 306A and 306B are provided on condition that the payout of the game balls is started. And the value (second value) of the first and second secured ball counters 305A and 305B is updated.

  Therefore, if the first and second 15-ball security switches 172A and 172B continuously detect the game ball after the payout of the game ball is started, when the first value becomes 0, A second value smaller than the first value has already been set to 0. In this case, it is guaranteed that the supply of the game balls has been performed in accordance with the payout of the game balls.

  On the other hand, if the second value is not 0 when the first value becomes 0, it means that the supply of the game balls according to the payout of the game balls has not been performed for some reason.

  Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment compares the updated first value and the second value to determine whether or not the replenishment of the game balls has been correctly performed according to the payout of the game balls. Can be determined.

  As a result, for example, the first and second 15-ball security switches 172A and 172B are compared with a case where it is determined whether or not the replenishment of the game ball is performed based on the detection of the game ball by the presence or absence of the first and second 15-ball security switches 172B. It is possible to accurately manage and guarantee the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passages 171A and 171B.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment prohibits payout of game balls when the first value is 0 and the second value is not 0, so that the first and second ball supply passages 171A are provided. , 171B of the game ball can be checked. Thereby, security regarding supply and payout of the game balls can be further improved.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the second value of 0 when the first value is 0, even if it is once guaranteed that the replenishment of the game balls has been performed. Thereafter, until the game balls are paid out, for example, the first and second sprockets 173A, 173B are excessively paid out due to a malfunction of the sprockets 173A, 173B and the like, and the first and second ball supply passages 171A, 171B are discharged. If the number of game balls decreases, the payout of game balls can be prohibited.

  As a result, the management of the game balls in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B can be performed more accurately, and the security regarding supply and payout of the game balls can be further improved.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment executes retry control for driving the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (4 steps) until a game ball is detected by the first and second count switches 181A and 181B. Since it is possible, for example, a retry operation for eliminating ball engagement can be performed without providing a slit sensor or the like for detecting a driving position of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B.

  When such a retry operation is performed, the driving positions of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B when the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B detect a game ball are adjusted as the origin. Therefore, the origins of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B can be adjusted without using a slit sensor or the like.

  As described above, since the retry operation can be used not only at the time of ball biting or the like but also at the time of adjusting the origin, versatility can be given to the retry control, and as a result, the processing by the payout CPU 301 can be simplified. .

  Further, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment does not include a slit sensor or the like, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine can be simplified and reduced in cost.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the unit drive amount (four steps) of the payout motor 174 during execution of the retry control causes the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B to pay out one game ball. Since the payout driving amount (16 steps) required to pay out the next game ball is less than that, the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B are divided into a plurality of times to pay out one game ball. Can be driven. Thus, for example, when a ball bite or the like has occurred, this can be resolved, and when the origin is adjusted, it can be adjusted to an accurate origin.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the unit drive amount (4 steps) is a drive amount obtained by dividing the payout drive amount (16 steps) into four times. Can be divided into a plurality of times.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the driving amount of the payout motor 174 exceeds the upper limit driving amount (192 steps) without detecting a game ball by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B. The dispensing means can be stopped until the initialization operation is performed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the award ball case unit 170 due to excessive repetition of the retry operation.

  Further, since the payout motor 174 is stopped until the initialization operation is performed, the stop of the payout motor 174 causes, for example, such a case that there is no game ball accumulated in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B. It is possible to urge that the prize ball case unit 170 and thus the pachinko gaming machine 1 need to be returned from the abnormal state.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs the origin adjustment control (retry control) when it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited, that is, when the stop factor flag is set to 1, so that some abnormalities occur. Thus, the retry operation can always be performed after the driving of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B is stopped.

  As described above, by performing the retry operation in conjunction with the stop of the driving of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, the processing can be smoothly performed as compared with the case where the retry operation is performed alone.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment executes a retry operation in the origin adjustment control (retry control) until a gaming ball is detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B. Is managed as the number of retry operations, so it is possible to reliably determine how many times the retry operation has been performed irrespective of the presence or absence of a game ball by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B. , And can be easily grasped. Further, the number of retry operations can be reliably and easily grasped without providing a slit sensor or the like. This makes it possible to smoothly manage the retry operation.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has an origin adjustment control (retry) when the number of retries exceeds an upper limit (12 times) without detecting a game ball by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B. Since the control is terminated, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the winning ball case unit 170 due to excessive retry operations.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment compares the total number of game balls actually paid out with the required number of payouts, and as a result of the comparison, the total number of game balls actually paid out and the required number of payouts If there is a difference between the game ball and the game ball, it can be recognized as an overpayout of the game ball.

  Further, when the above-described difference of the overpayment is equal to or more than the allowable value (10), the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are stopped until the initialization operation is performed. When an unnatural overpayment occurs, it is possible to prevent further overpayment from being performed.

  Further, when the overpayment occurs, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has an overpayout which is a difference between the total number of game balls actually paid out and the required payout amount until an initialization operation is performed. The number of such game balls can be accumulated.

  As a result, it is possible to reliably detect, for example, the fact of an unnatural overpayment caused by wrongdoing and the like and the amount of unnecessary game balls paid out (the number of award balls and the number of loaned balls) caused by the overpayment.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, during the falling ball monitoring time after driving the payout motor 174, the gaming balls corresponding to the required number of falling balls are operated by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B. Since it is determined whether or not the detection is detected, the payout motor 174 can be cooled during the falling ball monitoring time, and at the same time, it is checked whether or not the payout of the game balls corresponding to the required number of drops has been performed. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently manage the payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of loaned balls) while securing a sufficient cooling period of the payout motor 174.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a holding period for holding the attitude of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B and a payout motor 174 for monitoring a falling ball after driving the payout motor 174. After the payout motor 174 stops, the postures of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B can be maintained, and the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are moved by the inertia force. Excessive rotation can be prevented. Further, the dispensing motor 174 can be cooled by providing the cooling period.

  Further, when the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B does not detect the game balls corresponding to the requested number of drops during the holding period and the cooling period, the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped. The drive of the payout motor 174 can be efficiently managed using the cooling period.

(Embodiment 2)
Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Note that the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the second embodiment has a real-time clock 80, but other configurations are substantially the same. Therefore, in the following, description of the same configuration as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the differences from the first embodiment will be particularly described.

  FIG. 109 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 2. As shown in FIG. 109, in the second embodiment, the sub-control circuit 200 includes a real-time clock 80. The real-time clock 80 is connected to the sub CPU 201.

  Here, the real-time clock 80 is a device capable of specifying the current “year (AD)”, “month”, “day”, “day of the week”, “hour”, “minute”, and “second”. It is. The real-time clock 80 is realized as a serial interface type real-time clock module having a built-in crystal oscillator. Since the sub CPU 201 is connected to the real time clock 80, the time information specified by the real time clock 80 can be acquired by the sub CPU 201. The real-time clock 80 is operated by the power supply when the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and when the power supply is turned off, an independent power supply such as a backup power supply or a button battery which is supplied even in the event of a power failure. Work by. Therefore, the real time clock 80 can specify the current time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, since the real-time clock 80 is provided, various effects corresponding to the current time can be performed.

[Point addition table]
In the first embodiment, it is possible to add points according to the lottery using the point addition table stored in the program ROM 202 and to shift to the “first high probability state” according to the accumulated points. Was.

  In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a point addition table is stored in the program ROM 202. In the point addition table, different times correspond to different characters displayed for each determined effect content. The points to be added differ depending on the time. As a result, the points to be added in the event of a loss differ depending on the character displayed according to the time at which the game is played and the effect. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game with change, and the interest of the game is improved.

  A point addition table according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a view illustrating an example of a point addition table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, there are a plurality of characters (characters A to C) in accordance with the production contents of the losing reach production. That is, there are a plurality of losing reach effects corresponding to a plurality of characters. In addition, the time corresponding to each character is determined, and if the loss-reach effect by the character corresponding to the time during the game is performed, it is added more than the case where the loss-reach effect of other characters is performed. Points increase easily. Therefore, it can be said that the probability of transition to the “first high probability state” is high. Therefore, if the character corresponding to the time at which the game is played is displayed in the effect, it can be said that it is more advantageous for the player than when other characters are displayed.

  For example, the character A may correspond to 8:00 to 12:59, the character B may correspond to 13:00 to 17:59, and the character C may correspond to 18:00 to 23:59. Here, the effects with the variation pattern commands of “83H02H” and “83H03H” are losing reach effects. The sub-control circuit 200 receiving this variation pattern command determines by lottery the detailed contents of the reach effect, that is, which of the characters A to C is displayed. The probability that each of the characters A to C is displayed may be the same as each other (all three times). As shown in FIG. 110, in the random number value “9” in “83H02H” and all random number values in “83H03H”, points to be added are different depending on the relationship between the character displayed by the effect and the game time. For example, when the fluctuation pattern command is “83H02H” and the obtained random number value is “9”, when the character A is displayed in the “second high probability state”, the time is from 8:00 to 12:59. If, the points to be added are 50, but at other times, the points to be added are 20. Similarly, when the character B is displayed in the “second high probability state”, the point to be added is 50 if the time is from 13:00 to 17:59, but is added at other times. The points are 20. Similarly, when the character C is displayed in the “second high probability state”, the point to be added is 50 if the time is from 18:00 to 23:59, but is added at other times. The points are 20. The same applies to the case where the variation pattern command is “83H03H”. The “normal game state” is the same as the “second high probability state”, but the points are more easily accumulated in the “second high probability state” as in the first embodiment.

  Further, similarly to the first embodiment, the stop symbol and the effect content determination processing may be performed according to the points determined using the point addition table (see S1072 in FIG. 69).

As described above, the point addition is different by associating the time with the displayed character, but the time and the displayed character are associated with each other, and not the point, but the number of navigations given is different. It may be. In other words, the time corresponding to the character is determined in advance, for example, if a character corresponding to the time of playing a game is selected, a big hit navigation lottery table different from that used at other times It is assumed that the number of navigations that can be given is larger in the big hit navigation lottery table than in tables used at other times. As a result, the number of navigations provided is increased, and the probability of providing the navigations can inevitably be increased. It should be noted that, besides determining the number of navigations by lottery, it is also conceivable to determine the navigation grant probability of whether or not to navigate by lottery.
Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery in which the navigation is provided with the probability of 1/10 in the losing super reach B is performed, but such a lottery may be performed in the second embodiment. Further, a lottery in which a navigation is provided in the losing super reach A may be performed. Further, as described above, the winning probability may change according to the time and the displayed character. This case will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a view illustrating an example of a lottery table during a loss super reach of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 111, when the displayed character corresponds to the time, the probability of winning the navigation is higher than when the character does not correspond. Also, the number of navigations provided is increasing. As described above, since the advantage and disadvantage for the player differ depending on the time, the player plays in expectation of an advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved. Note that FIG. 111 shows the case of the loss super reach A. Similarly, in the case of the loss super reach B, the probability of winning the navigation and the number of navigations to be given are determined by the combination of the displayed character and the time. May be changed.
The probabilities of displaying the characters A to C are the same as each other, but may be different. For example, the probability that the character corresponding to that time is displayed may be lower than 1/3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, particularly, only the processes including steps different from the first embodiment will be described.

[Timer interrupt processing]
First, a timer interrupt process by the sub CPU 201 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 112, the point that the processing of S1301 is added between the processing of S1023 and the processing of S1024 is different from the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 64). The other points are the same as in the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

  When the processing in S1023 is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1301. In S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs a time management process. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of acquiring and updating data on the standard time serving as a reference from the real-time clock 80. If this process ends, the process moves to S1024.

  Thus, in the second embodiment, various effects using the standard time can be performed. For example, a predetermined process can be executed at a specific time. Thereby, a privilege can be given to the player at a specific time or a special effect can be executed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[First high probability state effect determination process]
With reference to FIG. 113, the first high-probability state effect determination processing by the sub CPU 201 of the second embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 113, the point that the process of S1302 is added after the process of S1129 is different from the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 72). The other points are the same as in the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

  When the processing in S1129 ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1302. In S1302, the sub CPU 201 performs all-day navigation lottery based on the time. Specifically, if the character displayed by the effect based on the standard time acquired from the real-time clock 80 is the character corresponding to the current time, the sub CPU 201 sets the “fourth high probability state” with a probability of 1/20. , And if the winning is achieved, the fourth high probability state flag is set. If the displayed character is not the character corresponding to the current time, the shift lottery may not be performed. Further, when the displayed character is not the character corresponding to the current time, the transfer lottery may be performed with a lower probability than the winning probability when the displayed character is the character corresponding to the current time. . When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

Further, the set time flag may be set when the time set in advance by the real-time clock 80 is reached regardless of the displayed character. If the first hit after the set time flag is set is the "big hit" in Toku-zu (1) -12, the winning is made to the "fourth high probability state" with a probability of 1/1 and the "fourth high probability state". The state may be shifted to the “high probability state”. In addition, regardless of the first hit after the set time flag is set, the set time flag is set to OFF, and the subsequent hit becomes "big hit" in Toku-zu (1) -12. May win the “fourth high probability state” with a probability of 1/10 and transition to the “fourth high probability state”.
Thus, there is a possibility that so-called all-day navigation can be obtained even when the RAM is not cleared or the power is not turned on. Therefore, even if it is not immediately after the store is opened, the player enjoys the game all day, expecting the navigation. Further, since navigation can be acquired all day without RAM clearing work or power-on work, it is possible to reduce the amount of work on the hall side and increase the number of customers.

  In addition, for example, by setting the real-time clock 80 so that navigation can be obtained once a day, it is possible to realize 24-hour navigation in which all navigation states are continued for 24 hours. In other words, after the store closes, the navigation continues all day on the next day. This makes it difficult for the player to feel unfair and increases the number of customers.

For example, a high-probability game state other than the above may be provided in the “normal game state”, and at least a part of the high-probability state may be easily provided with a navigation at a specific time using the real-time clock 80. In other words, it is sufficient to have a high-probability game state in which the ease of navigation is changed according to the time.
For example, in the effect in the “first high probability state”, the characters A to C are each displayed with a probability of 1/3, and the hits of the special maps (1) -8 to (1) -11 are not performed. However, if the displayed character is the character corresponding to the current time, it may be determined that there is a possibility of shifting to the “fourth high probability state”.
Also, for example, in the “first high probability state”, if the displayed character is not the character corresponding to the current time even in the special map (1) -1 to the special map (1) -7 big hit, If the displayed character is the character corresponding to the current time, the probability that the displayed character is not the character corresponding to the current time is higher than when the displayed character is the character corresponding to the current time. The navigation may be provided by. The character displayed in the effect in the “first high probability state” may be different from the characters (characters A to C) in the loss-reach effect.

(Embodiment 3)
Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the payout destination (movement destination) of the game ball by the sprocket 173 is switchable, but other configurations are substantially the same. ing. Therefore, in the following, description of the same configuration as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the differences from the first embodiment will be particularly described.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the prize ball case unit 170 according to the third embodiment has a first payout passage 180A and a second payout passage 180B as in the first embodiment, and each of these passages has a two-row structure. Therefore, the configuration is the same. Therefore, the configuration of the first payout passage 180A will be described as an example.

  The first payout passage 180A according to the third embodiment is a first ball passage 401A for paying out (or guiding, supplying, and circulating) game balls into the pachinko gaming machine (for example, the upper plate 21 or the like). And a second ball passage 402A for guiding (moving) (or dispensing, supplying, and circulating) the game ball to the outside of the pachinko game machine (for example, a ball circulation route of the island management facility). .

  Here, the island management facility is a device that can be connected to a plurality of or a single gaming machine and a gaming device (for example, a sand, a counter for each unit, a data display, etc.) provided for the gaming machine. And a management device for managing the state of gaming balls and gaming machines, which is connected to equipment (eg, a computer or data management device) for managing a game arcade usually called a hall computer, and It collects information about gaming machines and sends data.

  Here, the ball circulation path is a facility provided in the island management apparatus that enables sharing of game balls between a plurality of or single game machines, and the ball circulation path can be independently driven as a ball circulation apparatus It is not essential that the device is provided in the island management device, and the device may be provided in a game machine or a device for circulating game balls in the game machine.

  The second payout passage 180B also has a first spherical passage 401B and a second spherical passage 402B. Hereinafter, the first ball passage 401A and the first ball passage 401B are collectively referred to as “first ball passage 401”, and the second ball passage 402A and the second ball passage 402B are collectively referred to as “first ball passage 402B”. 2 ball path 402 ".

  Further, the first ball passage 401A is provided with a first counting switch 481A as first detecting means for detecting a game ball passing through the first ball passage 401A, and the second ball passage 402A is provided with a first counting switch 481A. , A first ball removal switch 482A as second detection means passing through the second ball passage 402A.

  Similarly, a second counting switch 481B and a second ball removing switch 482B are provided for the first ball passage 401B and the second ball passage 402B. The first counting switch 481A and the second counting switch 481B are collectively referred to as a “counting switch 481”, and the first ball removing switch 482A and the second ball removing switch 482B are collectively referred to as a “ball removing switch 482”. "

  Further, between the payout passage 180, more specifically, between the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage 402, the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 is the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage. First and second flappers 400 </ b> A and 400 </ b> B are provided as passage switching means controlled by the payout CPU 301 so as to switch to either one of 402. These first and second flappers 400A and 400B may be collectively referred to as "flapper 400".

  The flapper 400 has a flapper driving device 410 (see FIG. 115), and the driving of the flapper driving device 410 is controlled by the payout CPU 301, so that the flapper 400 is rotatable in the arrow direction in the figure.

  Specifically, the flapper 400 sets the payout destination of the game ball to the second ball passage 402 side (the position indicated by the broken line in the drawing) and the payout destination of the game ball to the first ball passage 401 side. (The position shown by the solid line in the figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115, the payout control circuit 300 according to the third embodiment includes the first counting switch 481A, the second counting switch 481B, the first ball removing switch 482A, and the second ball removing switch 481A. The switch 482B and the flapper driving device 410 are connected. Although the flapper driving device 410 is common to the first flapper 400A and the second flapper 400B, they may be provided separately.

  Further, when the payout CPU 301 of the third embodiment executes the above-described retry operation in a state where the number of prize balls and the number of loaned balls (payout amount) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300 are not present, the payout CPU 301 of the game ball is used. The flapper 400 is switched via the flapper driving device 410 so that the payout destination is the second ball passage 402.

  Further, when the payout CPU 301 of the third embodiment performs the retry operation in a state where the flapper 400 is switched so that the payout destination of the game ball is the second ball path 402, the game ball is released by the ball removal switch 482. The retry operation is terminated on the condition that it is detected.

  Next, the contents of various processes executed by the payout CPU 301 of the payout control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[System timer interrupt processing (1 ms)]
First, a system timer interrupt process by the payout CPU 301 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 116, in the system timer interrupt processing according to the third embodiment, steps S431 to S435 are the same as S331 to S335 of the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 85) according to the first embodiment. Is omitted.

  After completing the process of S435, the payout CPU 301 executes a motor drive process described later (S436), and executes an origin adjustment excitation data setting process (S437). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 executes a command transmission process (S438), and ends the system timer interrupt process. The command transmission process (S438) of the third embodiment is the same as the command transmission process (S337) of the first embodiment.

[Count switch detection processing]
First, the counting switch detection processing performed in S435 in the system timer interruption processing (see FIG. 116) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 117, in the count switch detection processing in the third embodiment, the steps S481 to S490 are the same as S381 to S390 in the count switch detection processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 88). Is omitted.

  If S481 is NO, if S487 is NO, if S489 is NO, or after the end of S490, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the first ball removal switch 482A or the second ball removal switch 482B is a game ball. It is determined whether or not the passage has been detected (S491).

  In S491, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first ball removal switch 482A or the second ball removal switch 482B has not detected the passage of a game ball (in the case of S491 being NO), the payout CPU 301 The counting switch detection processing ends.

  On the other hand, in S491, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first ball removal switch 482A or the second ball removal switch 482B has detected the passage of a game ball (in the case of YES determination in S491), the payout CPU 301 It is determined whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S492).

  In S492, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (NO in S492), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

  On the other hand, in S492, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (if S492 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S493).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S494). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 controls the flapper driving device 410 to automatically switch the first and second flappers 400A, 400B to the first ball passages 401A, 401B side (payout side) (S495), and the counting switch. The detection processing ends.

[Motor drive processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 118, the motor driving process performed in S436 in the system timer interrupt process of the third embodiment (see FIG. 116) will be described.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (S501).

  In S501, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (in the case of YES determination in S501), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and drives the motor. The process ends.

  On the other hand, in S501, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first nor the second stop factor flag is 1 (NO in S501), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Then, it is determined whether the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S502).

  In S502, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (NO in S502), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no security ball, and The driving process ends.

  On the other hand, in S502, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (in the case of YES determination in S502), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a secured ball and pays out. It is determined whether the requested number is greater than 0 (S503).

  In S503, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is not larger than 0 (NO in S503), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request, and ends the motor driving process.

  On the other hand, in S503, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is larger than 0 (YES in S503), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a payout request, and executes the motor activation initial process ( S504). The motor startup initial process is the same as in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs an activation state setting process of the payout motor 174 (S505). In this processing, since the payout CPU 301 does not perform the origin adjustment control, the payout motor 174 sets the acceleration state of the payout motor 174 in accordance with the requested number of drops so that the normal game balls are paid out.

  Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S506). In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data for a predetermined step as a drive amount required to pay out the required number of game balls assuming that normal game balls are paid out.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the payout control flag to “1” (S507), and ends the motor drive processing. Here, the payout control flag is a flag in which “0” or “1” is set depending on whether or not the flapper 400 is switched, and is set to “1” when the flapper 400 is switched. This flag is set to “0” when the flapper 400 is not switched.

[Origin adjustment excitation data setting processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 119, the origin adjustment excitation data setting processing performed in S437 during the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 116) of the third embodiment will be described.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S511). In S511, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (when S511 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no request for the origin adjustment control, and ends the origin adjustment excitation data setting processing. I do. Therefore, when the determination in S511 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed.

  On the other hand, in S511, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (if S511 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a request for the origin adjustment control, and the number of retries is smaller than 12. It is determined whether the value is larger, that is, whether the origin adjustment control has been performed 12 times (S512). Therefore, if the determination in S511 is YES, the origin adjustment control is performed.

  In S512, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is greater than 12, (if S512 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of origin adjustment controls has reached the upper limit number (12 times). Then, the process proceeds to S513.

  In S513, the payout CPU 301 sets the activation state of the payout motor 174 (S513), and moves the processing to S523. In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the payout motor 174 to an idle state in order to stop paying out game balls.

  On the other hand, in S512, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of retries is not larger than 12 (NO in S512), the payout CPU 301 resets the activation state of the payout motor 174 (S514).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 resets the excitation data (S515), and determines whether or not the payout control flag is 1 (S516). In S516, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout control flag is not 1 (NO in S516), the payout CPU 301 determines that the switching between the first and second flappers 400A and 400B is unnecessary. Then, the process proceeds to S518. In this case, the switching of the first and second flappers 400A and 400B is not performed, and the payout destination of the game ball is maintained on the first ball passage 401A and 401B side (payout side).

  On the other hand, in S516, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout control flag is 1 (if S516 is YES), the payout CPU 301 needs to switch the first and second flappers 400A, 400B. Then, the flapper driving device 410 is controlled, and the first and second flappers 400A and 400B are automatically switched to the second ball passages 402A and 402B side (ball removal side) (S517).

  Next, in the case where S516 is NO, or after the end of S517, the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 4 steps in preparation for the origin adjustment control (S518). In this process, four steps are set as the unit drive amount of the payout motor 174 when executing the origin adjustment control.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of motor operations to one (S519), and sets the origin request retry count to four (S520). In this processing, the four steps set as the step counter mask value in S518 described above are multiplied by four times set as the origin request retry count, thereby obtaining the payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball. Sixteen steps are set.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S521). The falling ball monitoring timer is the same as in the first embodiment. Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to “0” (S522).

  Next, after the end of S513 or after the end of S522, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S523), and ends the origin adjustment excitation data setting processing. In this process, for example, when performing the origin adjustment control, the excitation data for 16 steps is set as the payout drive amount necessary to pay out one game ball.

  Further, when paying out normal game balls, excitation data for a predetermined step is set as a drive amount necessary to pay out the required number of game balls. When the payout motor 174 is set in the idle state so that the payout of the game balls is stopped, the excitation data is set to 0.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following functions and effects in addition to the functions and effects of the first embodiment.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the payout destination of the game ball is set to one of the first ball path 401 and the second ball path 402 in each of the first and second payout paths 180A and 180B. Since the flapper 400 is provided for switching to one side, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed when the payout of the game ball to the outside of the game machine is performed, for example, at the time of lending the game ball or prize ball. At times, the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 can be switched to the first ball passage 401 by the flapper 400.

On the other hand, when the origin adjustment control (retry control) is performed without paying out the game balls to the outside of the gaming machine, the payout destination of the game balls by the sprocket 173 is switched to the second ball passage 402 by the flapper 400. Can be. This prevents the game balls from being overpaid by the origin adjustment control (retry control).

  Therefore, by switching to one of the first ball path 401 and the second ball path 402 by the flapper 400, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed regardless of whether or not the game ball is paid out of the gaming machine. be able to.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment performs the origin adjustment control (retry control) in a state where there is no payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of loaned balls) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. Switches the flapper 400 so that the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 is the second ball passage 402, so that the origin adjustment control (retry control) is performed without performing the payout of the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being overpaid by the sprocket 173.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment ends the origin adjustment control (retry control) on condition that the ball removal switch 482 detects a game ball, so that the payout amount (the number of award balls and the Even if the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed in a state where there is no lending ball, the counting switch 481 does not detect a game ball.

  For this reason, the game ball paid out from the sprocket 173 is paid out of the gaming machine by the origin adjustment control (retry control) executed without the payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of lent balls) stored in the RAM 303. It can be prevented from being detected as a game ball. Thereby, the range of operation of the origin adjustment control (retry control) can be expanded.

(Embodiment 4)
Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to Embodiment 4 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the fourth embodiment, the first embodiment refers to the remaining number of drop requests obtained by subtracting one ball from the number of drop requests after completion of the origin adjustment control. Is different in that payout of 14) game balls is performed, but other configurations are substantially the same.

  Therefore, in the following, description of the same configuration as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the differences from the first embodiment will be particularly described. Specifically, only processing different from the first embodiment will be described. Processing other than the processing described below (for example, system timer interrupt processing) is the same as the processing in the first embodiment.

[Count switch detection processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 120, the count switch detection processing performed in S335 in the same system timer interrupt processing as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 85) will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the count switch detection processing according to the fourth embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of a game ball (S581). In S581, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has not detected the passage of the game ball (when S581 is NO), the payout CPU 301 sets the counting switch. The detection processing ends. Here, when the origin adjustment control is being performed, the game ball is not yet detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B, and thus the determination at S581 is NO.

  On the other hand, in S581, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B has detected the passage of the game ball (in the case of YES determination in S581), the payout CPU 301 issues the drop request. The number is subtracted by "1" (S582).

  That is, the payout CPU 301 updates the number of requested drops on condition that the game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B. The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a divided payout amount updating unit.

  Here, in the fourth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the number of payout requests is not subtracted in the counting switch detection process. When the number of requested drops is determined (set) in S627 in the motor activation initial process (see FIG. 122) described later, the number of required payouts is equal to the number of game balls corresponding to the determined (set) number of required drops. Has been subtracted.

  In other words, the payout CPU 301 subtracts the number of game balls for the determined (set) number of drop requests when the number of requested drops is determined (set) from the required number of payouts. I have. The payout CPU 301 that performs the subtraction of the game balls constitutes a subtraction unit.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S583). In S583, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (when S583 is NO), the payout CPU 301 ends the count switch detection process.

  On the other hand, in S583, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (if S583 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S584).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S585). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 sets the post-origin adjustment execution flag to 1 (S586), and ends the count switch detection processing.

  Here, the post-origin adjustment execution flag is a flag in which “0” or “1” is set depending on whether the origin adjustment control has been executed or before (not executed). Is set to "1" after the execution of "?", And set to "0" before the execution of the origin adjustment control.

[Motor start waiting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a description will be given of the motor start waiting process performed in S336 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) similar to the first embodiment. FIG. 121 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the motor start waiting process according to the fourth embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (S601). In S601, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is not 1 (when S601 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control is being performed, and moves the process to S605.

  On the other hand, in S601, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (if S601 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been completed, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second stop cause flag is 1 (S602).

  In S602, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (if S602 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and starts the motor. The waiting process ends.

  On the other hand, in S602, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first nor the second stop factor flag is 1 (if S602 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Then, it is determined whether the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S603).

  In S603, when the payout CPU 301 determines that none of the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (NO in S603), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no security ball, and End the boot waiting process.

  On the other hand, in S603, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (in the case of YES determination in S603), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a security ball, and will be described later. A motor start initial process (see FIG. 122) is executed (S604). In the fourth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, it is not determined whether or not the number of payout requests is greater than zero.

  Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, a payout request flag described later is set, and whether or not there is a payout request from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300 is determined by the payout request flag. The payout request flag is transmitted at the same time that information on the number of payout requests is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300, for example. The payout request flag is set to “1” when there is a payout request, and is set to “0” when there is no payout request.

  Here, the processing of S605 to S613 is the same as the processing of S406 to S414 in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

[Motor startup initial processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the motor start initial process performed in S604 during the motor start waiting process (see FIG. 121) of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the motor startup initial process according to the fourth embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the post-origin adjustment execution flag is 1 (S621). In S621, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the post-origin adjustment execution flag is not 1 (if S621 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has not been executed (or not yet executed). , And then moves the process to S623.

  On the other hand, in S621, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the post-origin adjustment execution flag is 1 (in the case of YES determination in S621), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been performed and falls. It is determined whether the requested number is 0 or less (S622).

  In S622, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the requested number of drops is not equal to or less than 0 (NO in S622), the payout CPU 301 leaves the requested number of drops as it is, that is, in the counting switch detection process (see FIG. 120). The process proceeds to S628 with the number of requested drops after subtracting “1” in S582.

  On the other hand, in S622, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the requested number of drops is 0 or less (when S622 is YES), the payout CPU 301 resets (or initializes) the requested number of drops. Then, the value of the required number of drops is reduced to the required number of payouts (S623).

For example, when the value of the required number of drops becomes “−1” due to the overpayout of the game balls, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the required number of payouts already subtracted by the required number of drops.

  That is, the payout CPU 301 reflects the number of drop requests (“−1” in the case of overpayment) after subtracting “1” in S582 of the above-described counting switch detection process (see FIG. 120) in the number of payout requests. The payout CPU 301 that performs such reflection constitutes reflection means. When the process of S623 is performed for the first time (first time), both the number of requested payouts and the number of requested drops are “0”.

  Here, when the payout CPU 301 has paid out all the game balls of the required number of payouts, the payout request number after dropping “1” in S582 of the above-described counting switch detection process (see FIG. 120) is “ If it is not "0", it is determined that a payout error has occurred. The payout CPU 301 that makes such a determination constitutes a payout error determination unit.

  For example, if the required number of dropped balls after the subtraction is greater than “0” when the required number of game balls have been paid out, it can be determined that a payout error due to underpayment has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the required number of dropped balls after the subtraction is smaller than "0" when the required number of game balls are paid out, it can be determined that a payout error due to overpayment has occurred.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the number of payout requests is smaller than “−10” (S624). That is, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of overpay has become 10 or more.

  In S624, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the number of requested payouts is smaller than “−10” (if S624 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of game balls related to overpayout is not within the allowable range. Then, the overpay flag is set to 1 (S625), and the motor activation initial process ends.

  On the other hand, in S624, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the required number of payouts is not smaller than “−10” (in the case of NO determination in S624), the payout CPU 301 allows the number of game balls related to the overpayout. It is determined that it is within the range, and it is determined whether or not the payout request flag is 1 (S626).

  In S626, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout request flag is not 1 (in the case of NO determination in S626), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no game ball payout request from the main control circuit 70, The motor startup initial processing ends.

  On the other hand, in S626, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the payout request flag is 1 (if S626 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the number of drop requests from the number of payout requests (S627).

  In this process, a maximum of 15 drop request numbers is set according to the payout request number (total payout amount). At this time, at the same time as the setting of the required number of drops, the required number of payouts is subtracted by the set required number of drops.

  Here, the processing of S628 to S634 is the same as the processing of S422 to S428 in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following functions and effects in addition to the functions and effects of the first embodiment.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the number of required drops is updated on the condition that a gaming ball is detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B. That is, the required number of drops is updated each time a gaming ball is detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B.

  Thus, for example, when the payout motor 174 is driven to pay out the game balls in accordance with the required number of drops, if there is a payout exceeding the required number of drops (overpayment), the number of the game balls corresponding to the overpaid amount is reduced. The number of required drops can be updated in consideration of the number.

  On the other hand, the required number of payouts is reduced by the number of game balls corresponding to the number of required drops at the time the number of required drops is determined, and the updated number of required drops is reflected. Thus, even if the above-described over-payout is caused by one drive of the pay-out motor 174, the number of game balls subtracted from the required number of payouts and the number of game balls actually paid out are determined. Can be matched.

  As a result, it is not necessary to stop the payout motor 174 each time an overpayment occurs due to one drive of the payout motor 174, so that the payout of the game balls can be continued. Therefore, smooth payout can be performed.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is an enclosed type gaming machine, in which a launching means for launching a game ball is installed at the top of the game machine, and the fired game ball passes through a game area provided on the game board. (The game board itself may be a game area), and the present invention is also applied to an enclosed game machine collected in a ball polishing device or a lifting device provided in the game machine.

  In the case where the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to such a gaming machine, a sprocket is provided in the lifting device for lifting a game ball (for example, a screw) or a payout motor. Even if the driving means for driving the means for pumping (for example, a pumping motor) and the counting switch are means for detecting discharge from the pumping apparatus (for example, a sensor for managing the circulation of game balls). Good.

  According to the above embodiment of the present invention, since the game balls pass through the payout passage 180, are paid out to the upper plate 21 provided on the front of the gaming machine, and move from the upper plate 21 to the launching device 15, The gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to a device that lifts the launch device 15 as described above.

  In the above embodiment of the present invention, the ball tank lower passage 162, the ball supply passage 171, the ball passage near the sprocket 173, and the payout passage 180 may be integrally formed. The expression “integrally” as used herein includes a state where they are integrally formed by welding, die cutting, screwing, caulking, or the like.

  In addition, when the ball tank lower passage 162 and the ball supply passage 171 are integrally formed, and when the ball supply passage 171 and the ball passage near the sub-rocket 173 are integrally formed, four configurations are exemplified. Two configurations may be extracted and formed integrally by a configuration divided into cases.

Similarly, a case where the ball passage near the sprocket 173 and the discharge passage 180 are integrally formed, a case where the ball tank lower passage 162, the ball supply passage 171 and the ball passage near the sprocket 173 are integrally formed are exemplified. The three components may be extracted from the four components to be formed, and the components may be formed according to the divided configurations.

  Further, the ball supply passage 171 may be provided in a game member (for example, a decoration unit or a ball polishing device of a sealed-type game machine, etc.) configuring the game machine. This means that the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied even when a device provided with a member corresponding to the sprocket 173 is connected to a gaming member acting as the ball supply passage 171.

  Further, the ball supply passage 171 may be provided with a configuration capable of moving a game ball like a sub-rocket 173. Generally, a game ball existing in the ball supply passage 171 in conjunction with and synchronized with the sprocket 173. The game machine according to the present invention can be applied if is movable.

  Further, in the above embodiment of the present invention, the current of the payout motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period), and after the excitation data holding period has elapsed, the current of the payout motor 174 becomes a low current. It is switched on and then kept at low current for 470 ms (cooling period). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is constituted by 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 470 ms (cooling period). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Period), 470 ms (cooling period), and 0 to 100 ms (sprocket adjustment period) may constitute a falling ball monitoring time (500 ms + 0 to 100 ms).

  With such a configuration, the position of the sprocket 173 can be finely adjusted during the sprocket adjustment period, and normal rotation and reverse rotation assuming ball engagement may be repeated. In addition, a heat detection unit capable of detecting the heat generation of the payout motor 174 is provided, and when the heat generation of the payout motor 174 is equal to or more than a predetermined value and a predetermined area, the payout control circuit 300 can determine the abnormality of the payout motor 174. May use the sprocket adjustment period as the cooling period continuously.

  Furthermore, even if the heat detecting means is not provided, the payout of a predetermined value or more (for example, the payout of 10 balls or more when paying up to 16 balls) continues continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times or more). , The sprocket adjustment period may be set to a specific value (for example, 50 ms). At this time, the set sprocket adjustment period may be a predetermined value or a constant value. Normally, there is no need to set the sprocket adjustment period to perform cooling because a sufficient cooling period is provided, but since the environment differs for each amusement arcade where gaming machines are installed, the payout motor during the original cooling period The cooling of 174 may be insufficient. Therefore, by assuming such a case and adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to take care of the cooling period of the payout motor 174 when the payout is continuous. As a result, it is possible to pay out more safely.

  As described above, if the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms + 0 to 100 ms) is configured by 30 ms (excitation data holding period), 470 ms (cooling period), and 0 to 100 ms (sprocket adjustment period), It can also be expressed that the cooling period of the payout motor 174 has been extended based on the extended ball monitoring time, and that the falling ball monitoring time has been extended based on the extended cooling period. Is possible.

  In the above embodiment of the present invention, if the flapper 400 is controlled by the payout CPU 301 so as to switch to one of the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage 402, the shape, the material, and the driving method are particularly limited. It is not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 114, the ball may be in the shape of a plate, or may be moved horizontally by curing a game ball falling from the upper portion of the ball passage so that the game ball cannot pass through one ball passage. Thus, a mechanism that can eventually distribute the game balls may be used, or a mechanism similar to the sprocket 173 may be provided, and the game balls may be received once and then guided in an arbitrary direction. There may be.

  Further, in the above embodiment of the present invention, 5 ms × 4 steps are defined as the excitation data corresponding to the unit drive amount. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The dispensing motor 174 of 5 ms × 16 steps is driven as excitation data at the number of retries, and the excitation data holding period after stopping the driving of the dispensing motor 174 of 5 ms × 16 steps is set to 30 ms + cooling period 470 ms = 500 ms. Is set to 5000 ms (basic retry operation period), and the time obtained by subtracting the excitation data holding period, the cooling period, and the time required for one retry (5 ms × 16 = 80 ms) from the basic retry operation period It is set as the falling ball monitoring time, and the stop factor occurs within the falling ball monitoring time, or the specified number of times (2 If the retry of 0 times) is finished, it is also possible to transition to the idle state. At this time, the maximum number of retries is 240, and the time required for one retry is set as the basic retry operation period. As a result, a sufficient monitoring time is set as the falling ball monitoring time, so that the falling ball monitoring time can be used as a time for storing the 15-ball security switch 172 for intermittent prevention when the switch is disconnected. It becomes possible to pay out more safely.

  Further, in the above embodiment of the present invention, the number of dropped balls is reduced by subtracting the number of game balls to be moved by one drive of the payout motor 174 based on the number of detected game balls by the count switch 181 in the retry control. Although the (divided payout amount) is set, the term "set the required number of drops (divided payout amount)" here can include contents such as determination, update, and change.

  Further, the payout in the above embodiment of the present invention is based on the premise that game balls are paid out as game media. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Game media include medals, credits, and electronically managed game media. It is considered to pay out various media such as pseudo media handled in terms of the number and the amount of money.

  Note that the term "movement" described in the claims of the present application includes a case where the position of a game ball is moved by game ball control means, such as payout, lending, retry control, and shipping. Therefore, the present invention can be applied to any case where the position of the game ball is moved by the above-mentioned game ball control means.

  Further, "the game ball moves" means that the game ball is directly pressed or towed by the game ball control means, or the game ball is released by unlocking the game ball. As a result of initiating a fall or moving one game ball by the game ball control means, one or more game balls are indirectly moved. Including the case.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, the execution of the navigation is performed in accordance with the number of the provided navigations, but the continuation rate lottery may be performed and the navigation continuation rate may be provided. That is, for example, it is assumed that a plurality of navigations having a continuation rate of 0%, 50%, 80%, or the like can be stocked. It may be determined. If the winner is won, the next time the draw will be continued with the same continuation rate.If the winner is not won, this navigation will be gone, but if the navigation is stocked, use the next navigation to continue the navigation A continuous lottery may be performed at a rate. In addition, the continuation rate of 0% is a state in which the navigation is completed only once without continuing. In addition, when all the navigations are given, the navigation is guaranteed to execute the navigation three times, and then the continuation rate lottery may be performed. Further, in the case of all navigations, a navigation having a continuation rate of 100% limited to three times may be provided.

  Also, for example, as a production during the "big hit game", it was shown that the number of navigations was determined in advance and the result was shown by the production, but in order to have the player's technical intervention, the player succeeded in a mini game etc. In such a case, a navigation may be provided. For example, it is assumed that a push game having a plurality of difficulty levels is executed during a jackpot game. If a low difficulty game is successfully performed, 0% continuous navigation is provided. If a high difficulty game is successfully performed, All navigations may be provided. The mini-game may be other than the eye-catching game, such as a quiz.

  In the “second high probability state”, if the hit content is “normal without payout” (special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -12), the set game is not performed after the “big hit game state” Then, the state shifts to the “first high probability state” of the “normal game state”. Therefore, an effect is performed so that it is possible to recognize that the state has shifted to the “first high probability state”. However, with this effect, the player may recognize that the gaming state is shifted, and may misunderstand that the degree of expectation of the “big hit” is increased. Therefore, an effect that suggests shifting to the “normal gaming state (sub)” may be performed before an effect that can be recognized as shifting to the “first high probability state”. As a result, the player recognizes that the "big hit game state" has shifted to the "normal game state (sub)" after the "big hit game state", despite the fact that the "big hit game state" actually shifts to the "first high probability state". Therefore, the misunderstanding can be suppressed.

In addition, in the "time saving game" after 50 times, navigation suppression such as not performing navigation is performed from the viewpoint of preventing "capture hit", but a player performing the "time saving game" more than 50 times is performed. However, it is not necessarily the case that they are taking “captures”. Therefore, for example, a right-handed sensor for detecting a game ball is installed in an area on the right side of the game area 12a so as to be able to detect that a right-handed shot is made. On the basis of the detection signal of the right-handed sensor or the like, it is only necessary to determine the normal timing due to the normal continuous firing and the abnormal timing caused by operating the firing handle 25.
For example, as shown in FIG. 123, a right strike sensor 58 and a rail 59 for guiding a game ball to the right strike sensor 58 may be provided on the game board 12. FIG. 123 is a front view showing a configuration of a game board of a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 123, the same members as those of the game board 12 shown in FIG. 3 are denoted by the same reference numerals. The gaming board 12 shown in FIG. 123 is substantially the same as the gaming board 12 shown in FIG. 3 except that it has a right strike sensor 58 and a rail 59.
In FIG. 123, the right strike sensor 58 is installed at the upper right of the game board 12. In addition, the rail 59 is also installed at the upper right of the game board 12, and the rail 59 is arranged at a position where the game ball is guided to the rail 59 when the player is performing a right strike. The arrangement is such that the game ball guided to the rail 59 always passes through the right strike sensor 58. Accordingly, when the player is making a right-handed hit, the game ball always passes through the right-handing sensor 58, and it is determined whether or not the player is firing the game ball toward the right side of the game board 12. You can judge.
As described above, the normal timing and the abnormal timing can be determined based on the detection signal of the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a and the detection signal of the right strike sensor 58. As a result, if the navigation is performed to perform the “big hit game” for 16 rounds but the timing is abnormal, it is estimated that the “capture hit” is performed. If the output timing of the detection signal by "capture hit" is detected (abnormality detection), it can be inferred that "capture hit" is performed regardless of the number of "time-saving games", and in that case, navigation is suppressed. A flag may be set.

  Further, when the time from the output of the detection signal from the second starting opening winning ball switch 45a to the output of the detection signal from the right strike sensor 58 is too long, it may be inferred that "capture hit". . Since the output timing of the detection signal by the normal hitting method and the output timing of the detection signal by the “capture hit” are different, it can be inferred that the “capture hit” is performed.

  If the first abnormality is detected, a warning is given, the second warning is given, the navigation is canceled for the third time, etc. It may be taken.

  In addition, the ordinary symbols are known, but the ordinary symbols and the special symbols may have a relationship. For example, it is assumed that there are a plurality of normal symbols, and when "V" is reached, the normal symbol and the first big prize which triggered the opening of the second starting port 45 which triggered the "V". The next navigation lottery may be performed based on the special symbol when the device 54 is opened.

  For example, it is assumed that there are two types of ordinary symbols, ordinary symbol (1) and ordinary symbol (2), and if the combination of ordinary symbol (1) small hit (2) -1 is high probability in the next navigation lottery. The lottery is to be selected, and if the combination is the normal symbol (2) small hit (2) -4, the lottery may be selected with a low probability in the next navigation lottery. As a result, the player can play the game with amusement even at the timing of reaching "V hit".

  Further, in the case of "per V", the navigation lottery probability may be changed according to the winning number at the time of winning in the second starting port 45, which is the trigger. Further, a notification about the winning number may be given. For example, it is possible to display a content such as “If three or more balls enter the second starting port 45 and hit V, the next navigation is determined”. As a result, the player can play the game with amusement even at the timing of reaching "V hit".

  In the above-described embodiment, the execution of the navigation is performed according to the number of assigned navigations. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the number of navigations is one or more, the navigation is used. Whether or not to win may be determined by a lottery when a time saving big hit is won. Thereby, since such a release effect is performed during the big hit, it becomes possible for the player to desire the game with more interest during the big hit.

  The present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. The number of game balls in the enclosed game machine is constant in the game machine, and the number of game balls is managed from the viewpoint of fraud prevention. Therefore, the detection of the launched game balls is also performed, and the number of launched balls is managed. Therefore, when the present invention is applied to an enclosed game machine, for example, a ceiling lottery may be performed based on the number of game balls fired. For example, each time 1500 game balls are fired, it is determined whether or not a "big hit" has been won, and if not, a ceiling lottery may be performed. In addition, in the case where even if 15,000 shots are fired and the “big hit” is not won, 100% may be won in the ceiling lottery. By using the number of shots of the gaming machine as a reference in this manner, the ceiling state is uniformly provided without being affected by the easiness of winning at the starting port.

  In the above embodiment, when the winning is performed after the ceiling lottery is performed, the state immediately shifts to the “third high probability state”. For example, even if the winning is performed, the state is not immediately shifted. May be performed after 20 times are performed. Then, during the 20 times, an effect (so-called precursor effect) may be performed to notify that the player will win the ceiling lottery. As a result, the player can know the game state to be shifted and the like, and can play the game with a sense of expectation. In general, such an indication effect could be performed only for a few minutes of holding the game ball, but the indication effect can be performed over a longer period of the game, and the player can expect for a relatively long time. It becomes possible to have.

  Although the all day navigation lottery has a high probability due to the RAM clearing, as described above, the all day navigation lottery may have a high probability by turning on the power of the gaming machine.

  The content of the navigation effect, the timing of giving the number of navigation times, and the like are not limited to the above-described embodiment. In the above embodiment, in the “first high probability state”, when the special map type is special map (1) -1 to special map (1) -7, all navigations, that is, three navigation times are given. Is not limited to three, and for example, only two may be provided. However, it is preferable that the “first high-probability state” be more easily provided with the navigation than the gaming states other than the “first high-probability state”.

  In the above-described embodiment, the advantageous first special game has a larger number of rounds. However, the number of set times in the time-saving game state is eliminated, and the case of a big hit that shifts to the time-saving game is defined as the first special game. A case in which a normal jackpot that does not shift may be used as a second special game. If the navigation is provided, the first special game and the second special game are not limited as long as there is an advantage or disadvantage for the player, such as launching the navigation at the time of winning the small hit as the first special game.

[Application example]
In the above embodiments and the various modifications, the pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The various technologies of the present invention described above can be applied to other gaming machines, and for example, are applied to various gaming machines such as slot gaming machines, spinning game machines, ball and ball gaming machines, gaming machines, and enclosed gaming machines. You can also. Further, for example, the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine, an arrangement ball, a rocking ball, or the like, which is a kind of a ball and ball game machine.

  The background art and problems (Nos. 1 to 8) regarding the configuration described in the above-described embodiment will be described.

[Background Art and Issues (Part 1)]
Among players who enjoy playing games with pachinko and pachislot gaming machines, there are players who select gaming machines in hopes of being in an advantageous state for the players. However, it is generally difficult to find a gaming machine that is in an advantageous state for the player without playing the game. In general, the hall side wants to reduce the number of gaming machines that are in an advantageous state for the player if possible, while the gaming machine is used for attracting customers during times when the number of players is small. There are halls that want to make the game more advantageous for the player, and there is a need for a gaming machine that can set the game machine in an advantageous state for the player.

  For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-22248, a game state when the power of the gaming machine is turned off is stored as a backup, and when the power is turned on again, the game can be started in the game state. A gaming machine is disclosed. In such a gaming machine, when the hall is closed in a gaming state advantageous to the player, the power of the gaming machine is turned off in a gaming state advantageous to the player. If the power of the gaming machine is turned on immediately before the opening of the store on the next day, the gaming machine will be in a gaming state advantageous to the player who is in the closed state on the previous day. When such a gaming machine is installed, the player whose store closing time is in the advantageous gaming state enjoys the game in the advantageous gaming state by playing with the gaming machine from the opening of the next day. be able to. In this way, the player may be able to find a gaming machine that is in an advantageous state.

  However, in this gaming machine, unless the power is turned off in a gaming state that is advantageous for the player, the gaming state is not advantageous to the player at the next power-on. The gaming machine is not always in an advantageous gaming state for the player after the power of the gaming machine is turned off, that is, after the store is closed. Therefore, with this gaming machine, it has been difficult to realize a gaming state advantageous to the player at a desired timing on the hall side.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of executing an advantageous state for a player at a desired timing.

[Background Art and Issues (Part 2)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area by a launching device, and a game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined number of times. In the big hit game, a number of game balls corresponding to the game balls that have won the special winning opening are paid out. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening executes the big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state.

  For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hitting game, the blade member changes its posture to an open position in which the opening / closing area is opened, and the game ball can enter the opening / closing area. There is a pachinko machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the open / close area, and when a gaming ball wins in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the big hit gaming state. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a gaming ball wins in a V winning opening during a small hitting game and is controlled to a big hitting game state, a small hitting pattern showing a result of a special symbol judgment which triggered the current big hitting gaming state. The game state after the big hit game ends is determined according to the type of the game. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state changes. For this reason, as a result, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player changes, and it may change whether the player is advantageous or disadvantageous.

  By the way, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2013-233375, it is easy to win the small hitting game during the time reduction game, and the opening and closing area is easy to open, so that the gaming ball wins the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot game state. In addition, even if it is not during the time reduction game, the game may shift to the big hit game state, and the game state may be changed. As described above, the change in the game state results in a change in the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, as the gaming state changes, the number of gaming balls that can be obtained by the player as a result changes instead of a fixed ratio. Therefore, the game is prevented from becoming monotonous.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2013-233375, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. However, it is only in terms of the number of game balls that the player can obtain. Even when the player continues the game for a long time, it is preferable that the gaming machine has a configuration capable of further suppressing the game from becoming monotonous in order to concentrate and play the game without getting bored. Without such a configuration, there is a problem that if the game is continued for a long time, the player will eventually get tired of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enables a player to concentrate on a game without getting bored and improve the interest of the game. And

[Background Art and Issues (Part 3)]
Among the pachinko gaming machines, for example, there is a so-called one-type and two-type mixed type disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-273786. In this pachinko gaming machine, a special symbol lottery is executed when a game ball wins at a predetermined starting port. Then, after the symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display, the symbol indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. Here, when a predetermined big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display, it becomes one kind of big hit and the first special game is executed. On the other hand, when the predetermined small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display, the blade member closing the variable specific winning opening is activated, and during this time, the game ball enters the variable specific winning opening and passes through the V zone. Then, two kinds of big hits are performed and the second special game is executed.

  This pachinko gaming machine is provided with a variable starting port that is opened only while the normal electric accessory is operating, separately from the predetermined starting port, and is executed when a game ball wins in the variable starting port. In the special symbol lottery that is performed, a small hit is made with a relatively high probability. In this pachinko gaming machine, the winning probability of the variable start-up opening / closing lottery executed by a game ball passing through a predetermined passing area is relatively increased, and the variable start-up opening when the opening / closing lottery is won is selected. There is a case where the game is controlled in a time-saving game state in which the opening time is extended. In the time-saving gaming state, there is a relatively high possibility that a game ball will enter the variable specific winning opening, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will pass through the V zone and be a big hit. Also, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out even if the game balls only enter the variable specific winning opening without passing through the V zone. Thus, the time-saving gaming state can be said to be an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  As described above, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-273786, not only the one-type jackpot and the two-type jackpot but also the time-saving gaming state is advantageous to the player. It can be said that continuing is preferable for the player. Therefore, some players perform a shooting operation of the game ball at a timing such that the game ball does not pass through the V zone even when the game ball enters the variable specific winning opening. With such an irregular hit, by preventing the game balls from passing through the V zone until just before the end of the duration of the time-saving game state, the number of game balls to be paid out can be further increased.

  However, such an irregular hit by the player is not preferable for the hole side. For this reason, some halls prohibit the irregular beating, and take measures such as caution when a player performing the irregular beating is seen. However, it is necessary to keep watching the game for a while in order to find out that the player is playing this irregular beating, and it is not easy to find out.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problem, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a player from performing an irregular beating.

[Background Art and Issues (Part 4)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area by a launching device, and a game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Since the game balls can be exchanged for money, the player plays the game in expectation of more game balls being paid out.

  Further, some pachinko gaming machines add points by satisfying predetermined conditions in the game. Then, by accumulating the points, some privilege is given. For example, in the gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2014-42574, points are added when a game specified as a point-up condition is performed, and when the number of points becomes equal to or more than the number of "reference points", the game level is increased. Is calculated, and a lottery required for collecting item information used for a game such as music data and character image data is performed in accordance with the number of game levels.

  In this way, the player can enjoy not only increasing the game balls but also increasing the points by playing the game.

  As described above, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-42574, the ability to collect music data, character image data, and the like is certainly one of the pleasures of the game. However, this point is not related to the payout of the game ball, and it can be said that the player is somewhat less interested in the point.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and enables a player to play a diversified game while enjoying an increase in points accumulated in the game, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing such operations.

[Background Art and Issues (Part 5)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area by a launching device, and a game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined number of times. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out for the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening executes the big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state. Further, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hitting game in which a special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from a closed state.

  By the way, in recent years, a movable machine has been provided in a gaming machine in order to improve the performance. As such a gaming machine, Patent Literature 1 includes a first movable body that is a rotating body and a second movable body that is a swing arm, and the second movable body supplies power to the first movable body. A plurality of gears for transmission are attached, and the second movable body is driven by a single driving device, so that the second movable body swings, and the first movable body is rotated by the plurality of gears. Machine is disclosed.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2013-146413, the first movable body and the second movable body are linked by a single driving device by attaching a plurality of gears to each movable body. Is provided at one end of the second movable body and rotates, and the second movable body is configured to rotate around the other end. Therefore, the moving direction of the first movable body depends on the rotating direction of the second movable body. As a result, the possibility that the second movable body and the first movable body are recognized as separate bodies is reduced, and the individual effect of the plurality of movable members of the first movable body and the second movable body is reduced. There was a risk of doing.

  An object of the present invention is to solve such a problem, and to enhance the effect of individual production of each movable member even when a plurality of movable members are interlocked, thereby improving the interest of the player in the production. And

[Background Art and Issues (Part 6)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area on a game board surface by a launching device, and a game ball wins a winning hole or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined A number of game balls are paid out. Some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined number of times. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out for the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening executes the big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state. Further, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hitting game in which a special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from a closed state.

  By the way, in recent years, as a configuration of a winning device, there is a gaming machine having a configuration in which a game ball that has entered a large winning opening rolls to the back side of the game board and a winning sensor detects the game ball. As such a gaming machine, Patent Literature 1 has a function of imparting a probable change state after the end of a jackpot game by allowing a game ball to pass through a specific area provided in a special winning opening, and specifying the opening mode of the special winning opening. A gaming machine is disclosed in which the degree of overlap with the operation mode of the area shutter is changed to vary the difficulty level of a game ball passing through a specific area.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-255784, the rolling speed of the game ball cannot be adjusted when the game ball can pass through the specific area where the winning sensor is provided. In some cases, the moving speed was so fast that the winning sensor could not detect the passing of the game ball.

  An object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately detecting the passage of a game ball by a passage detecting means.

[Background Art and Issues (Part 7)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area by a launching device, and a game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined number of times. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out for the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening executes the big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state. Further, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hitting game in which a special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from a closed state.

  By the way, in recent years, a movable machine has been provided in a gaming machine in order to improve the performance. As such a gaming machine, Patent Literature 1 discloses that the first and second upper peach movable members are rotated so as to open outward, and then the first and second upper peach movable members are closed inward. In the peach-shaped movable accessory device which rotates in the first direction, the first and second magnet portions are provided on each inner portion forming the joint of the first and second upper peach movable members, and the first and second magnets are provided. The first and second magnet portions are disposed so as to be substantially opposed to each other in a state where the first and second upper pink movable members are closed, and in such a state, the first and second magnet portions are in a direction of attracting each other. Gaming machine is disclosed.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-87611, the magnet is used to reinforce the connection between the end faces between the end pieces, so even if the connection between the two pieces can be reinforced, The end of the accessory cannot be reinforced at all for a configuration in which the accessory operates alone, and from the viewpoint of stabilizing the state of the single accessory after operation, it is The configuration was difficult to apply.

  An object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a gaming machine capable of easily stabilizing the state of the accessory after operation by a configuration capable of fixing the operating accessory. .

[Background technology and issues (No. 8)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area by a launching device, and a game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined number of times. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out for the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening executes the big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade member to change from the closed state to the open state. Further, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hitting game in which a special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from a closed state.

  By the way, in recent years, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of movable characters are driven from a standby position at a predetermined timing, and after driving, form one design without contacting each other in front of a display screen. As such a gaming machine, Patent Literature 1 discloses a first movable body pivotally supported via a first movable shaft, and a second movable body pivotally supported via a second movable shaft. The second movable body, the interlocking means for interlocking the first movable body and the second movable body, and the interlocking means are driven to swing the first movable body between the first position and the second position. Driving means for swinging the second movable body between the third position and the fourth position, wherein the driving means moves the first movable body from the first position to the second position and moves the second movable body to the third position. When the interlocking means is driven in the direction of swinging from the position to the fourth position, the first movable body swings upward and the second movable body swings downward in front of the display screen of the effect display device. Gaming machine is disclosed.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-46038, a plurality of movable objects cannot be brought into contact after driving, so that a gap between each other is compensated for by an image displayed on a display screen. Form one design. Therefore, in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to limit the place where one design is formed by a plurality of movable roles, for example, to the front of a display screen.

  Further, when one design is formed only by such a plurality of movable roles, the plurality of movable roles are driven to a place where one design is formed by driving the plurality of movable roles to the place where one design is formed, while keeping the momentum that started driving from the standby position. When the movable members are brought into contact with each other, the movable members may be damaged by the impact.

  In order to solve such a problem, the present invention improves the effect of the movable role while avoiding damage to the movable role when the movable role is driven and brought into contact with another member. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing the following.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 120a Gaming area 610 Second big prize winning device 611f First guide passage 611g Second guide passage 611h Third guide passage 611j Deceleration unit 612 V shutter 613 Right prize ball sensor 614 Left prize ball sensor 615 V Vero 616 V prize Sensor 617 Emission sensor

Claims (2)

A variable prize device in which a game ball rolling in the game area can enter,
A first movable member that is in one of a first state in which a game ball easily enters the variable winning device and a second state in which a game ball hardly enters the variable winning device;
When the first movable member is in the first state, a guide path for guiding a game ball that has entered the variable winning device;
When the first movable member is in the first state, a plurality of first passage detection means capable of detecting the passage of a game ball having entered the variable winning device and providing a predetermined game value to a player; ,
One of a first state provided below the first passage detection means, in which a game ball easily passes through a predetermined area, and a second state in which game balls hardly pass through the predetermined area, A second movable member,
When the second movable member is in the first state, of the game balls that have passed through the first passage detection means, a second passage detection means that can detect a game ball that has passed the predetermined area;
When the second movable member is in the second state, among the game balls that have passed through the first passage detection means, third passage detection means capable of detecting game balls that have not passed through the predetermined area;
With
The second passage detection means includes a first region through which the game ball passes, and a second region through which the game ball does not pass,
A game provided with a curved guide passage below the second movable member and above a second area of the second passage detecting means, which can reduce a rolling speed of a game ball. Machine. A ball supply passage capable of accumulating game balls,
Moving means capable of moving a game ball having passed through the ball supply passage to a payout passage;
Driving means for driving the moving means,
Control means for controlling the driving of the driving means,
A payout detecting means for detecting a game ball moved to the payout passage by the moving means,
The control means, after driving the driving means, stops driving of the driving means for a certain period, and makes a determination regarding the detection of the game ball by the payout detection means during the certain period,
The certain period includes at least a holding period for holding the posture of the moving unit and a cooling period for cooling the driving unit,
During the holding period, the current applied to the driving unit is maintained at the current when the driving unit is driven,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein during the cooling period, a current applied to the driving unit is lower than a current when the driving unit is driven.

Images